AC AC/DC V A - ProElektro DISTRIBUTION

AC AC/DC V A - ProElektro DISTRIBUTION

www.elkoep.com

TECHNICAL CATALOGUE

Presentation of ELKO EP Company

ELKO EP, which is based in Holešov, has been with you on the electrical market for the past 20 years, covering a wide range of domestic equipments in the field of electrical installations. In the last few years there has been dynamic development of smart wiring, in which our company has been seven years developing and launching iNELS smart home system solutions. In modular devices, as well as in smart wiring, we have become market leaders. We‘re developing products that bring comfort to customers and safety for the environment.

The Parent ELKO EP company has gradually grown in 7 branches - Slovakia, Hungary, Poland,

Russia, Ukraine, Romania and most recently Germany. At the same time we export to 60 countries around the world, and our products can be found under the world famous brand names (Schneider Electric, Eaton, HAGER, Siemens, MORS SMITT).

Our work is based on the development and modern technology. In practice, we appreciate you as our customers, because you‘re receiving good products and smart solutions, which meet your requirements. Our development facilities and precise production and distribution, all this gives you the opportunity to use solutions which are both innovative and practical. There are our modern manufacturing facilities to produce all our products. It was extended over the newest and fastest SMD line, which means for you guaranteed quality and flexibility of supply.

We have and supervise 80% share of the Czech market and the fourth position in Europe.

Current-year sales growth: 20%

Number of employees in Holešov: 170

Number of employees of ELKO EP Holding: 236

Awards and Recognition:

In 2011, the experts awarded the top products developed in ELKO EP: RF Touch - wireless touch control unit won a Golden Amper, Moravian Electrical and Electronic

Association Award, Innovation Award of the year and PwC Special Award for Innovation. Also iNELS Multimedia - Multimedia control through television, won an award

- honorable mention Grand Prix.

Providing the possibility for students in technical fields to do their thesis. In 2012, the company ELKO EP became THE Number ONE company in Zlín Region and in the national finals, we won second place.

Our range of products is divided into three product lines - relay (classical modular devices), RF Control (wireless), iNELS BUS system (Bus System). Each product line has its own technical catalogue, where you can find complete information on individual products.

2

Product Lines

RELAYS - Modular electronic devices www.elkoep.com

A wide range of electronic modular devices, which bring new possibilities to home and office control, monitoring and security, as well as to industrial process control: time relays, installation contactors, staircase automatic switches, time switches clocks, dimmers, thermostats, power supplies units, control and signalling devices,

GSM gates, etc.

iNELS - Intelligent electro-installation System www.inels.com

iNELS will transform your house into a timeless intelligent household. It will take charge of heating and air-conditioning regulation, lighting control and home appliance switching, while also providing perfect security for your home. Enjoy controlling your entire house via a TV screen thanks to iNELS Multimedia (iMM) or use the elegant iNELS Touch Panel (iTP).

iNELS RF Control - Wireless control www.elkoep.com

A unique wireless control system providing you perfect control over your home! The RF Control system enables you to control functions such as heating, lighting, electrical appliances and window shutters, all with a single touch. No wall cutting, fast and easy installation, exclusive design of wireless wall switch buttons and other components.

LOGUS 90 – Home switches and sockets www.logus90.com

We offer you exclusive switches, sockets and accessories in a standard plastic or metallic design. However, there are also charming luxury frames from purely natural materials such as genuine wood, metal, granite or hardened glass. Be especial!

iNELS system advantages

Advantages to classical electrical installation:

Comfort

- dimming function (gradual dim-up/dim-down, soft start, light scenes)

- control via touch-screen (built-in a wall) = complete information

- control via any remote controller (e.g. of your TV or stereo)

- control by voice (Sophy unit, listens to your voice commands)

- temperature regulation according to pre-set programs – in each

room individually

- possibility to control by mobile phone, computer and Internet

Automatization

- function is executed automatically on the basis of set value (time, temperature,

light intensity, movement of people, wind strength...)

- it is possible to execute several functions on the basis of one command or

event (e.g. when it is dark - INELS rolls shutters down, switches lights on,

increases room temperature and switches TV on, and many others ...)

- arrival/departure functions: after a code is entered (or a card read) to a

keyboard, system automatically sets electrical appliances according to the

identifi ed user.

Information

- system informs you about selected event/events by SMS text message

- anywhere you are and if you have an access to Internet, you can connect

to your house and supervise or change its state

- integrated security system can be connected to a security agency

Security

- alarm with extended functions is a part of the system

- system is equipped by a keyboard which can be controlled by a code

or by an access card

- all settings and accesses are subjects of passwords in several levels

- protection of a house in case of bad weather (shutters in strong winds or

storm), unexpected events (irregularities in power supply, overload), natural

disasters (sensor for flooding, smoke sensor)

- bio-installation: deconnection of unused electric circuit (e.g. socket

outlets in bedroom while sleeping)

- setting ideal conditions for your children’s sleep (gradual dimming off ,

pleasant temperature, motion monitoring = baby-sitting)

- touchable parts of sensors are supplied by a safe voltage 24V DC

Savings

- regulation of heating / cooling

- time or time-limited switching

- light regulation (possible energy savings up to 10% )

- dependant switching (e.g. when it is dark, for desired temperature etc...)

- blocking of selected appliances in case of high meter readings

- elimination of unwillingly switched appliances (e.g. when there is no

motion – light switches off )

Design

- modern design of the switches and sockets, thermostat, voice activity

detectors – optional designes of Elegant or LOGUS

90

- variety to combine diff erent colours also in multiframe versions

- touch panel screen – unique solution of elegant wireless home

automation

Time for installation

- considerably lower thanks to bus installation (only 2 control wires)

- units are installed and later programmed

Flexibility of changes and extensions

- in future it is possible to add or change units easily

- functions can be changed by PC, also remotely through Internet

Available features for disabled people

- voice and remote control

- sound messages for blind (unit Sophy speaks pre-recorded messages)

- several actions can be done by one command

- control by computer from one spot

Choose the right one!

PRICE

OF INSTALLATION

Control using the TV

Tablet / SmartPhone

PC / Laptop

Music playback

Video cameras

Weather station

Door communicator

Controlling home appliances

Touch panel

Control via GSM telephone

Detectors

Group controller

Heating regulation

Controlling blinds

Dimming lights

Controlling appliances

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Classic electro -installation

Electricity is a necessary companion to our everyday life and follows us almost wherever we go. Not only does it provide us with light or a means of cooking, but it also gets us around from point A to point B.

Everybody knows where to find the home electric control panel and what to do when the power goes out.

We make all the devices that go into such control panels and switchboards, and have been selling them for almost 20 years.

Our assortment includes all modular electronic devices (time relays, installation contactors, staircase switches, timers, dimmers, thermostats, power sources, control and signaling devices).

Thanks to experience, we stand on solid foundations, and we are responsibly developing wide-ranging additions in the form of higher levels of electrical installations - either wireless or intelligent (bus-based).

Energy savings:

Con trolling app lia nces

Dimming lights

Con trolling blinds

Heating reg ulatio n

Group controller

Detectors Control via GSM telephone

Touch panel

Controlling household appliances

Door communicator

Weather station

Video cameras

(outdoor/indoor)

Audio Zone

(music playback)

PC/Laptop Tablet

SmartPhone

Video Zone

(controlling via TV)

Choose the right one!

PRICE

OF INSTALLATION

Control using the TV

Tablet

PC / Laptop

Music playback

Video cameras

Weather station

Door communicator

Controlling home appliances

Touch panel

Control via Smartphone

Detectors

Wireless switch

Heating regulation

Controlling blinds

Dimming lights

Controlling appliances

-

-

-

-

-

-

Wireless electrical installations

Most of you have already built a house or furnished an apartment. If you want to bring life into your home, we have an elegant wireless solution. As the name implies, the wireless communication is working with a range of up to 200 m (it depends on the internal structure of the house/apartment, and the used building materials.

The central brain is in this case the touch RF Touch unit, which can be placed anywhere within the range. It‘s possible not only to program entire system from this unit, but also to control it. Brightly replaces several thermostats and controllers. Within the system, you have an unlimited opportunity to add any drivers and placing them at the suitable places.

Energy savings:

Con trolli appliances

Dim ming lights

Con trolli blinds

Heatin g regulation

Wir ss switch

Det ors C t l i

Smartphone

Tou ch panel

Controlling household a ppl iances

Door communicator

Weather station

Video cameras

(outdoor/indoor)

Audio Zone

(music playback)

PC /Laptop Tablet Video Zone

(controlling via TV)

PRICE

OF INSTALLATIONONE

Control using the TV

Tablet

PC / Laptop

Music playback

Video cameras

Weather station

Door communicator

Controlling home appliances

Touch panel

Control via smartphone

Detectors

Group controller

Heating regulation

Controlling blinds

Dimming lights

Controlling appliances

Bus electrical installations

Are you building a new home? Then you should consider a bus-based solution. A bus in this sense is a data conductor that is distributed in the walls across the entire home. As opposed to a wireless solution, its advantage is range, because up to 6 x 550 m buses can be distributed in a single building.

Connection to a computer expands the scope of its available functions. This system may be expanded to include multimedia extensions and can connect third party devices (household appliances, A/C, etc.). Control and monitoring the system can be performed via PC, the

Internet, telephone, tablet, etc.

The system offers a wider range of functions that can be applied. A computer is used to set the parameters.

Energy savings:

Con tro lli ng appliances

Con tro lli ng blinds

Gro up controller

C tro l v ia

Smartphone

Con tro lli ng hou se hold applian ces

Doo r r commun icator

Wea the r statio n

Vid eo cam era s

(outdoor/indoor)

Aud io Zon e

(music playback)

PC / Lap top Tab let Vid eo Zon e

(controlling via TV)

iNELS smart home solutions

10 reasons to choose bus system

5)

6)

7)

8)

1)

2)

3)

4)

9)

10)

Ideal solution for new buildings

Two-wire bus

Bus once stretched you can always expand

Security system, combined with detectors

Remote control (PC, mobile phone applications)

Imitation of presence

Regulation depending on the weather

Ecology and energy saving

Modern trends in controling

Media under control (can also be controlled via TV)

10 reasons to choose wireless system

5)

6)

7)

8)

1)

2)

3)

4)

9)

10)

Do you know that heating regulations save up to 30% from the energy costs

Without any reconstruction work

The fast duration for electrical installations‘s implementation

Convenient and affordable prices for everyone

The possibility of upgrading your system - gradually upgrade your installations

Battery - powered transmitters - no electrical injury

The variability of the features that you can change

The design, which inspires you

Professional assembly and service of our partners

We are the Czech company, which top priority is customer‘s satisfaction

House switches and sockets

B A SE

Plastic

A Q UARELLA

Metallic design

A N IMATO

Plastic

C R YSTAL

Crystal

M E TALLO

Metal

A R BORE

Wood

P E TRA

Stone

BR - White

MF - Ivory

GE - Ice DG - Green/Ice CG - Crystal/Ice TP - Titanium/Pearl FP - Beech Wood/Pearl GG - Granite/Ice

PE - Pearl ZG - Blue/Ice CP - CRYSTAL/Pearl IA - Inox/Aluminium JP - Cherry Tree/Pearl GP - Granite/Pearl

AL - Aluminium JG - Orange/Ice CA - Crystal/Aluminium OP - Gold/Pearl MS - Mahogany/Grey GA - Granite/Aluminium

IS - Grey VG - Red/Ice CS - Crystal/Grey QS - Nickel/Grey NA - Walnut Tree/Aluminium GS - Granite/Grey

Design ranges

BASE

– Simplicity is the sign of beauty. Precise and convenient shapes, distinctive colours embodied in switches.

AQUARELLA

– Spacetime without limits. Metallic design will draw you into the world of exclusive design.

Animato

– Wide range of colors, modern design and nice price.

CRYSTAL

– Endless elegance of glass. Switches underlining the dynamics of your interior.

METALLO

– Be exceptional! Nobility of metal will inspire you with unforgettable moments.

ARBORE

– The Nature at your fingertips. Warm tones of wood create an atmosphere of absolute bliss.

PETRA

– Feel free to experiment. Stone is a symbol of stability, strength and power. Enjoy the switches you can lean on.

www.logus90.com

Catalogue content

Modular electronic devices

Time relays

Time relays review

Single-function time relay CRM-81J, CRM-83J

Delay OFF without supply voltage CRM-82TO

Doublestage delay unit SJR-2

Delay ON star/delta CRM-2T

Asymmetric cycler CRM-2H

Multifunction time relays

CRM-61

CRM-91H, CRM-93H, CRM-9S

CRM-91HE, CRM-2HE - with external potentiometer

15

16–17

18

PLUG-IN - PRM-91H/11, PRM-91H/8, PRM-92H, PRM-2H 19

Programmable digital relay PDR-2/A, PDR-2/B 20–21

Digital time switch SHT 22

8–9

10

11

12

13

14

Timer with an astronomical program SHT-4

Time switch SHT-6 with DCF managing

DCFR-1 receiver DCF 77

23

24

25

Super-multifunction relay SMR-K, SMR-T, SMR-H, SMR-B 26–27

Staircase switch CRM-4 28

Staircase switch CRM-42 with signalling before switching off, CRM-42F 29

Power and auxiliary relays

Power and auxiliary relays review 31

Modular VS116K, VS308K, VS316/24,VS316/230, VS116U, VS308U 32–33

Plug-in

782L,750L

Dimmers

Overview of dimmers

Staircase switch with dimming DIM-2

Controlled dimmer

DIM-5

34–35

36

37

DIM-14

DIM-6

DIM-6-3M-P

DIM-15, SMR-M

SMR-S, SMR-U

LIC-1

Power supplies

Power supplies review

Line DR

Line PS

Power supplies ZSR-30, ZNP-10

Bell transformer ZTR

Other modular devices

Twilight switch SOU-1

Twilight switch with digital time switch SOU-2 innovation!

Twilight and light switch SOU-3

Memory relay MR-41, MR-42

Controlling and signalling units USS

Monitoring relays

Monitoring relays review

HRN-41/42

59– 60

61

HRN-3x, HRN-6x 62–63

Relay for monitoring phase sequence and failure HRN-55, HRN-55N 64

Relay for monitoring over/undervoltage and phase failure HRN-57, HRN-57N 65

Relay for monitoring over/under voltage, phase sequence and failure HRN-54, HRN-54N 66

Relay for monitoring phase sequence and failure HRN-56 (120, 208, 240, 400, 480, 575) 67

Relay monitoring 3-phase mains HRN-43, HRN-43N

Optical signaling of three-phase network MPS-1

68–69

70

46– 47

48–49

50

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

38

39

40

41

42–43

44

45

Modular electronic devices

Monitoring relays

Monitoring current relays

PRI-32

PRI-51

PRI-52

PRI-53

PRI-41, PRI-42

Current transformer SR for monitoring current relays PRI (accessories) 76

Level monitoring level

Level monitoring relays HRH-1 77

Level monitoring relays HRH-5

Level monitoring relays HRH-4

Level monitoring relays HRH-6

78–79

80–81

82

71

72

73

74

75

Level sensors to level switches SHR-1M, SHR-1N, SHR-2, SHR-3 (accessories) 83

Relay monitoring

COS-1

HRF-10

Thermostats

84

85

Thermostats review

Analog and digital thermostats

86–87

Modular thermostat TER-3 (A, B, C, D, G, H)

Modular thermostat TER-3 (E, F)

Modular 2-stage thermostat TER-4

88

89

90

Modular thermostat for controlling temperature of motor winding TER-7 91

Modular multifunction digital thermostat TER-9 92–93

Thermo - ATR, ATF, ATC 94

Thermo - DTR, DTF, DTC

Energy-saving digital radiator thermostat ATV-1

Single-level thermostat with IP65 TEV-2, TEV-3

Two-level thermostat with IP65 TEV-1

Outdoor thermostat TEV-4

Humidistat RHT-1

Outdoor humidistat RHV-1

Accessories

Thermal sensors to thermostats TC, TZ, PT-100

Installation contactors

Installation contactors review

Installation contactors and installation contactors with manual control

95

96

97

98

99

100

101

102

103

VS120, VS220, VS420, VS425, VS440, VS463

VSM220, VSM425

Loadability of installation contactors

EAN codes

Technical information

Main instructions (for correct use of products)

Product loadability

Electromagnetic compatibility of products

EMC chart

Overview of tested types of light sources and the loads

Products packing

Dimensions

Examples of usage

Support of project design

Production technology

104–105

106

107

108

109

110

111–112

113

114

115

116

117–121

122–129

133

134–135

Time relays

Single-function

CRM-81J

3 functions and 6 time ranges, multivoltage or

230V supply, output 16A changeover/SPDT.

Multifunction

Analog

CRM-83J

as CRM-81J but with 3x8A changeover output/SPDT.

CRM-82TO

“true OFF” relay - delay off without supply, for back-up circuits.

SJR-2

two-state delay unit

(2x delay on), gradual switching of high loads.

CRM-2T

delay start-up of motors star/delta.

CRM-2H

asymmetric cycler, independent time setting

ON/OFF.

CRM-2HE

as CRM-2H , but time setting by external potentiometers (for frequent setting).

Digital

CRM-91H

10 functions, 10 time ranges,

1x output 16A changeover/

SPDT, multivoltage or 230V supply.

CRM-93H

as CRM-91 but output

3x8A chageover/SPDT.

CRM-9S

as CRM-91 but contactless output (triac 0.7A).

CRM-61

cost eff ective version of

CRM-91H, 6 functions,

6 time ranges. Output 8A changeover/SPDT, supply

AC 24-240 V, DC 24V .

CRM-91HE

as CRM-91H but with time setting by external potentiometer

(for frequent setting).

Potentiometer

potentiometer - external control unit for CRM-91HE and CRM-2HE, mounting into a switchboard, max connection length 10 m.

Staircase switch

PLUG-IN

PDR-2A

4 digit display, 16 functions,

2 independent times 0.01s-100 hrs

2 outputs 16A changeover/SPDT

START/STOP inputs.

PDR-2B

as PDR-2A but 10 functions for each output and time - meaning two relays in one device.

SHT-1, SHT-1/2

SHT1: time switch with daily, weekly programming. 1-channel, output 16 A changeover/SPDT.

SHT1/2: as SHT-1, but 2-channel.

SHT-3, SHT-3/2

as SHT-1 but with daily, weekly, monthly, and annual programming up to 2095.

SHT3/2: as SHT-3, but 2-channel.

SHT-4

Timer with an astronomical program to control the lighting without using a light sensor.

2-channel.

SHT-6

Time switch with DCF managing.

Daily, weekly and annual program, output 16 A.

1-channel.

PRM-91H/11

as CRM-91H but into 11-pin socket, multivoltage supply, output contact 16 A.

PRM-91H/8

as PRM-91H/11 but with

8-pin socket, output contact 16A.

PRM-92H

as PRM-91H but with 2x changeover/SPDT 8A contacts, into 11-pin socket.

PRM-2H

as CRM-2H but with 11-pin socket,

2x changeover, 8A contact.

socket to DIN rail

ES-11 (11 pin)

ES-8 (8 pin).

MINI

SMR-K

super multifunction relay for installation into a wiring box, 3 wire connection (without neutral).

Input: can be connected in parallel with LED energy saving light bulb or fl uorescent lamp.

SMR-T

super multifunction relay for installation into a wiring box, 3 wire connection

(without neutral).

SMR-H

as SMR-T but 4 wire connection, output - triac 0-200 VA,

9 functions including function of memory relay.

SMR-B

as SMR-H but output relay contact 16 A

(possibility to switch also fl uorescent lights).

CRM-4

basic version , time

0.5-10 min output contact 16 A , anti-blocking function.

CRM-42

programmable staircase switch with warning before switching off , time setting by number of button pressings.

CRM-42F

programmable staircase switch without warning before switching off , time setting by number of button pressings.

DIM-2

with dimming, setting: dim-up/shining/dim-down brightness only for el. bulbs output up to 500VA.

8

Chart 1. Version - DIN rail mounting

Type

Asymmetric cycler starting with delay

Asymmetric cycler starting with impulse

Delay ON star / delta

Switching in real time

Impuls relay in delay ON

0.1 - 1 s

1 - 10 s

0.1 - 1 min

1 - 10 min

0.1 - 1 hrs

1 - 10 hrs

0.1 - 1 day

1 - 10 days

3 - 30 days

10 - 100 days

30 s - 10 min

99 h 59 min 59 s

Day

Week

Month

Year

230 V AC

12 - 240 V AC/DC

12 - 240 V AC

1x changeover/ SPDT 8 A

1x changeover/ SPDT 16 A

2x changeover 8 A

2x changeover 16 A

3x changeover/ 3PDT 8 A

Static output (triac)

1x NO 16 A

1-MODULE

2-MODULE

3-MODULE

PLUG-IN

Under the switch

Rotary switch

Button

Sliding switch

External potentiometer

Delay OFF after switch off the Input supply

Delay ON

Delay OFF

Symmetrical cycler starting with delay

Delay OFF after impulse OFF

Symmetrical cycler starting with impulse

Staircase switch

Impulse shift

Memory (impulse) relay

Impulse generator

Delay ON at switch on controlling contact

See chart 2 Version - mounting into installation box (KU68)

Chart 2. Version - mounting into installation box (KU68)

Type

0.1 - 1 s

1 - 10 s

0.1 - 1 min

1 - 10 min

0.1 - 1 h

1 - 10 h

0.1 - 1 day

1 - 10 days

A -delay off on entering edge

B - delay off on downward edge

C - delay off on downward edge

D - cycler - fl asher by impuls

E - puls shift

F - delay on

G - pulse relay

H - impulse relay with delay

I - cycler starting with gap j - delay on after switched off

AC 230 V

1x triac

1x NO AgSnO

2

9

Single-function time relay CRM-81J, CRM-83J

!

!

!

!

!

!

!

!

!

Single-function and single-time relay with possibility of fi ne time setting by a potentiometer

(within the frames of a particular time range)

Suitable for applications where function and time requirements are known

Time switch, possible to be used for pump decay time after switching heating off , switching of fans

Choice of 3 functions:

1) ZR - Delay ON

2) ZN -Delay OFF

3) BL - Repeat Cycle

Functions can be controlled by supply voltage or time scale control input.:

(0.1 s - 1 s / 1 s - 10 s / 6 s - 60 s / 1 min - 10 min / 6 min - 60 min / 1 h - 10 hrs)

Universal voltage range AC/DC 12 - 240 V

Output contact: CRM-81J: 1x changeover/ SPDT 16 A

CRM-83J: 3x changeover/ 3PDT 8 A

Red LED output indicator

1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting

EAN code

CRM-81J by type

CRM-83J by type

Technical parameters

Functions:

Supply terminals:

Voltage range:

Burden:

Voltage range:

Consumption (apparent/loss):

Supply voltage tolerance:

Supply indication:

Time ranges:

Time setting:

Time deviation:

Repeat accuracy:

Temperature coeffi cient:

Output

Number of contacts:

Current rating:

Breaking capacity:

Inrush current:

Switching voltage:

Min. breaking capacity DC:

Output indication:

Mechanical life:

Electrical life (AC1):

Control

Consumption of input:

Load between S-A2:

Control terminals:

Glow tubes connetions:

Max. amount of glow lamps connected to controlling input:

Impulse length:

Reset time:

Other information

Power of control input:

Storage temperature:

Electrical strength:

Mounting/DIN rail:

Protection degree:

Operating position:

Overvoltage cathegory:

Pollution degree:

Max. cable size(mm 2 ):

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

CRM-81J

CRM-83J

ZR - delay ON / ZN - delay OFF/ BL- cycler 1:1

A1 - A2

AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz)

AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W

AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz

AC max. 12 VA / 1.3 W AC max. 12 VA / 1.9 W

-15 %; +10 % green LED

0.1 s - 10 h (in 6 alternate) potentiometer

5 % - mechanical setting

0.2 % - set value stability

0.01% / 0 C, at =20 0 C

16 A / AC1

4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC

30 A / <3 s

250 V AC1 / 24 V DC

500 mW

8 A / AC1

2000 VA / AC1, 192 W / DC

10 A / <3 s red LED

3x10

7

0.7x10

5

AC 0.025 - 0.2 VA / DC 0.1 - 0.7 W (UNI), AC 0.53 VA (AC 230 V)

Yes (UNI), Yes (AC 230 V)

A1-S

Yes

UNI - glow lamps cannot connected/NO

230 V - max.10 pcs (Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230 AC) min. 25 ms / max. unlimited max. 150 ms

-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)

-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)

4 kV (supply-output)

DIN rail EN 60715

IP 40 from front panel / IP20 terminals any

III.

2 solid wire max.1x2.5 or 2x1.5 / with sleeve max.1x2.5 (AWG 12)

90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)

(UNI) - 62 g, (230) - 60 g (UNI) - 86 g, (230) - 82 g

EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1

Symbol

CRM-81J

A1 16 18

Connection

S  A2

A1 16 18 26 28 36 38

15 S  A2 15 25 35

+

A1 S  A2

-

35 36 38

25 26 28

15 16 18

A1 S  A2

-

15 16 18

Un

+

A1

S  A2 load

16 18

15

Example of an order

CRM-81J/230, ZR10s

1x changeover contact, voltage AC 230 V, function: delay ON, time 1 - 10 s

CRM-83J/UNI, BL1h

3x changeover contact, voltage AC/DC 12 - 240 V, function: cycler begin with impulse, time 6 - 60 min

Functions

ZR - Delay ON ZN - Delay OFF

BL - Cycler 1:1

Note: the function ZR and ZN is controlled by supply voltage and control input ie. when it comes to failure and refreshing the supply voltage, the relay automatically makes one cycle.

Time range min max

1 s 10 s 1 min 10 min 1 hr 10 hrs

0.1 s 1 s 6 s 1 min 6 min 1 hr

1 s 10 s 60 s 10 min 60 min 10 hrs

Description

Supply terminals

A1 S  A2

Supply indication

Time setting

Control input “S”

Output indication

15 16 18 Output contact

10

Delay OFF without supply voltage CRM-82TO

EAN code

CRM-82TO /UNI: 8595188137614

Technical parameters

Number of functions:

Supply terminals:

Voltage range:

Burden:

Supply voltage tolerance:

Supply indication:

Time ranges:

Time setting:

Time deviation:

Repeat accuracy:

Temperature coeffi cient:

Output

Number of contacts:

Current rating:

Breaking capacity:

Inrush current:

Switching voltage:

Min. breaking capacity DC:

Output indication:

Mechanical life:

Electrical life (AC1):

Other information

Operating temperature:

Storage temperature:

Electrical strength:

Mounting/DIN rail:

Protection degree:

Operating position:

Overvoltage cathegory:

Pollution degree:

Max. cable size (mm 2 ):

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

Function

a - Delay OFF (S break) the power supply is switched off (min. time is 0.5 s)

U e - Off Delay (S break)

U t

CRM-82TO

a - On Delay (Power On)/ e - Off Delay (S Break)

A1 - A2

AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz)

AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W

-15 %; +10 % green LED

0.1 s - 10 min potentiometer

5 % - mechanical setting

0.2 % - set value stability

0.01 % / °C, at = 20 °C ( 0.01 % / °F, at = 68 °F)

2x changeover/SPDT (AgNi/ Silver Alloy)

8 A / AC1

2000 VA / AC1, 192 W / DC

10 A / <3 s

250 V AC1 / 24 V DC

500 mW red LED

3x10 7

0.7x10

5

-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)

-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)

4 kV (supply-output)

DIN rail EN 60715

IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals any

III.

2 solid wire max. 2x2.5 or 1x4 ( AWG 12 ) with sleeve max. 2x1.5 or 1x2.5 ( AWG 12 )

90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)

93 g (3.3 oz.)

EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1

!

„True OFF“ relay - relay timing without supply voltage

!

Sample of use: back-up source for Delay OFF in case of voltage failure (e.g. emergency lighting, emergency respirator, or protection of el. controlled doors - in case of fi re)

!

2 time functions adjustable by rotary switch: a - Delayed return after disconnecting of supply e - Delayed start

!

Time range (adjustable by rotary switch and fi ne setting by potentiometer): 0.1 s - 10 min

!

Universal supply voltage AC/DC 12 - 240 V

!

Output contact: 2x changeover/DPDT 8 A

!

Output status indicated by red LED (only in case of supply voltage connection)

!

Clamp terminals

!

1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting

Symbol Connection

A1

A2

Description

Supply indication

16 18 26 28

15 25

A1 A2

16 26

CRM-82TO

FUNC

e a

18 28

Un

A1 A2

16 26

18 28

15 25

Supply terminals

Output contact

Output indication

Rough time setting

Fine time setting

Function setting

Output contact

15 25

Output contact t t

11

Doublestage delay unit SJR-2

!

For gradual switching of heavy powers (e.g. el.heating), prevents current strokes in the main

!

Function: 2x Delay ON (2 time relays in one)

!

Time scale 0.1s - 10 days divided into 10 time ranges:

0.1s - 1s / 1s - 10s / 0.1min - 1min / 1min - 10min / 0.1h - 1h / 1h - 10hrs / 0.1 day - 1 day / 1 day - 10 days / ON / OFF

!

Times t1 and t2 are independantly adjustable

!

t1 and t2 are switched on after supply voltage connection

!

Rought time setting via rotary switch

!

Voltage range: AC 230 V or AC/DC 12 - 240 V

!

Output contact: 2 x changeover /DPDT 16 A

!

Output indication: multifunction red LED, fl ashing at certain states

!

1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting

EAN code

SJR-2 /230V: 8595188116015

SJR-2 /UNI: 8595188117401

Technical parameters

Number of functions:

Supply terminals:

Voltage range:

Burden:

Voltage range:

Power input (apparent/loss):

Supplyvoltagetolerance:

Supplyindication:

Time ranges:

Time setting:

Time deviation:

Repeat accuracy:

Temperature coeffi cient:

Output

Number of contacts:

Current rating:

Breaking capacity:

Inrush current:

Switching voltage:

Min. breaking capacity DC:

Output indication:

Mechanical life:

Electrical life (AC1):

Reset time:

Other information

Operating temperature:

Storage temperature:

Electrical strength:

Operating position:

Mounting/DIN rail:

Protection degree:

Overvoltage cathegory:

Pollution degree:

Max. cable size (mm

2

):

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

Time ranges

SJR-2

2x delay ON

A1 - A2

AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz)

AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W

AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz

AC max. 12 VA / 1.3 W

-15 %; +10 % green LED

0.1 s - 10 days

rotaty switch and potentiometer

5 % - mechanical setting

0.2 % - set value stability

0.01 % / °C, at = 20 °C ( 0.01 % / °F, at = 68 °F)

Symbol

A1

A2

16 18 26 28

15 25

Description

2x changeover/ DPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)

16 A / AC1

4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC

30 A / <3 s

250 V AC1 / 24 V DC

500 mW multifunction red LED

3x10 7

0.7x10

5 max. 150 ms

-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)

-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)

4 kV (supply-output) any

DIN rail EN 60715

IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals

III.

2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12)

90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝) (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)

UNI - 88 g (3.1 oz.), 230 - 83 g (2.9 oz.)

EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1

Supply voltage indication

Rought time setting t1

Fine time setting t1

Rought time setting t2

Fine time setting t2

Connection

Un

A1 A2

25 26 28

15 16 18

A1 A2

25 26 28

15 16 18

U

15-18

25-28

Function

t1

t2

Supply voltage terminals

U

15-18

25-28

LED

t1 t2

Output indication

Output contact

Output contact

0.1 - 1 s 1 - 10 s 0.1 - 1 min 1 - 10 min 0.1 - 1 h

1 - 10 hrs 0.1 - 1 day 1 - 10 days only ON only OFF

12

Delay ON star/delta

CRM-2T

EAN code

CRM-2T /230V: 8595188112291

CRM-2T /UNI: 8595188112437

Technical parameters

Number of functions:

Supply terminals:

Voltage range:

Burden:

Voltage range:

Burden:

Operating range:

Supply indication:

Time scale:

Time setting:

Time deviation:

Repeat accuracy:

Temperature coeffi cient:

Output

Number of contacts:

Current rating:

Breaking capacity:

Inrush current:

Switching voltage:

Min. breaking capacity DC:

Output indication:

Mechanical life:

Electrical life (resistive):

Reset time:

Other information

Operating temperature:

Storage temperature:

Electrical strength:

Operating position:

Mounting/DIN rail:

Protection degree:

Overvoltage cathegory:

Pollution degree:

Terminal wire capacity:

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

Function

Delay ON star / delta

U

15-18

25-28

t1

t2

CRM-2T

1

A1 - A2

AC/DC 12 - 240 V/AC 50 - 60 Hz

AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W

AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz

AC max. 12 VA / 1.9 W

-15 %; +10 % green LED t1: 0.1 s - 100 days, t2: 0.1 s-1 s potentiometer

5% - mechanical setting

0.2 % - set value stability

0.01 % / °C, at = 20 °C ( 0.01 % / °F, at = 68 °F)

2x changeover/ DPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)

16 A / AC1

4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC

30 A / <3 s

250 V AC1 / 24 V DC

500 mW multifunction red LED

3x10 7

0.7x10

5 max. 150 ms

-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)

-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)

4 kV (supply-output) any

DIN rail EN 60715

IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals

III.

2 max.1x 2.5, 2x1.5 (AWG 12)

with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12)

90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)

84 g (3 oz.)

EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1

!

It serves for delay ON of motors star/delta

!

Time t1 (star) - time scale 0.1 s - 100 days devided into 10 time ranges

- rough time setting by rotary switch

!

Time t2 (delay) between / :

- time scale 0.1 s - 1 s

- fi ne time setting by potentiometer

!

Voltage range: AC 230 V, AC/DC 12 - 240 V

!

Output contact: 2x changeover/ DPDT 16A

!

Output indication: multifunction red LED

!

1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting

Symbol

A1

A2

Connection CRM-2T

Start up of motor( - )

(motor)

( )

S1 S3 S2

( )

L1

L2

L3

Description

Supply indication

Rought time setting t1

Fine time setting t1

Fine time setting t2

A1 A2

16 18 26 28

15 25 start of a motor auxiliary voltage

25 26 28

15 16 18

A1 A2

CRM-2T

25 26 28

15 16 18

( ) ( )

U

15-18

25-28

LED

230 V

LED

24-480V

Supply terminals

Output indication multifunction red

t1

t2

Output contact

Output contact

Time ranges t1: m

1

10

1 10

h

1

10

d m

1

10

1 10

h

1

10

d m

1

10

1 10

h

1

10

d m

1

10

1 10

h

1

d

10

m

1

10

h

1 10

1

10

d

10

S

1

30

100

10

S

1

30

100

10

S

1

30

100

10

S

1

30

100

10

S

1

30

100

0.1 - 1 s 1 - 10 s 0.1 - 1 min 1 - 10 min 0.1 - 1 h

h h h h h m

1

10

1 10

1

d

10

m

1

10

1 10

1

d

10

m

1

10

1 10

1

d

10

m

1

10

1 10

1

d

10

m

1

10

1 10

1

10

d

10

S

1

30

100

10

S

1

30

100

10

S

1

30

100

10

S

1

30

100

10

S

1

30

100

1 - 10 hrs 0.1 - 1 day 1 - 10 days 3 - 30 days 10 - 100 days

13

Asymmetric cycler

CRM-2H

EAN code

CRM-2H /230V: 8595188124201

CRM-2H /UNI: 8595188113007

Technical parameters

Number of functions:

Supply terminals:

Voltage range:

Burden:

Voltage range:

Power input

(apparent input/loss input)

:

Operating range:

Supply indication:

Time scale:

Time setting:

Time deviation:

Repeat accuracy:

Temperature coeffi cient:

Output

Number of contacts:

Current rating:

Breaking capacity:

Inrush current:

Switching voltage:

Min. breaking capacity DC:

Output indication:

Mechanical life:

Electrical life (resistive):

Reset time:

Other information

Operating temperature:

Storage temperature:

Electrical strength:

Operating position:

Mounting/DIN rail:

Protection degree:

Overvoltage cathegory:

Pollution degree:

Terminal wire capacity:

Dimensions:

Weight

Standards:

CRM-2H

2 (function is chosen by connecting S-A1)

A1 - A2

AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz)

AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W

AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz

AC max. 12 VA / 1.3 W

-15 %; +10 % green LED

0.1 s - 100 days rotary switch and potentiometer

5 % - mechanical setting

0.2 % - set value stability

0.01 % / °C, at = 20 °C ( 0.01 % / °F, at = 68 °F)

!

Cycler with independent adjustable switch ON/OFF

!

Used for regular room ventilation, cyclic dehumidifi cation, light control, circulating pumps, noon signs, etc.

!

2 time functions:

1) Cycler beginning with pulse

2) Cycler beginning with pause

!

Function choice is done by an external jumper of terminals S-A1

!

Time scale 0.1 s - 100 days devided into 10 time ranges:

(0.1 s - 1 s / 1 s - 10 s / 0.1 min - 1 min / 1 min - 10 min / 0.1 hrs - 1 h / 1 hrs - 10 hrs / 0.1 day - 1 day /1 day - 10 days /

3 days - 30 days / 10 days - 100 days)

!

Rough time setting via rotary switch

!

Voltage range: AC 230 V or AC/DC 12 - 240 V

!

Output contact: 1x changeover/SPDT 16 A

!

Output indication: multifunction red LED

!

1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting

Symbol Connection

A1

S  A2

16 18

15

Cycler beginning with pulse Cycler beginning with pause

(jumper S-A1)

+

A1 S  A2

-

15 16 18

A1 S  A2

15 16 18

-

1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)

16 A / AC1

4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC

30 A / <3 s

250 V AC1 / 24 V DC

500 mW multifunction red LED

3x10 7

0.7x10

5 max. 150 ms

Function

Cycler beginning with pulse Cycler beginning with pause

U

15-18

t1 t2 t1

t2

t1

U

S

15-18

t2 t1 t2

t1 t2

Description

-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)

-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)

4 kV (supply-output) any

DIN rail EN 60715

IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals

III.

2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12)

90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)

UNI - 65 g (2.3 oz.), 230 - 61 g (2.2 oz.)

EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1

Supply indication

Rought time setting -IMPULSE

Fine time setting-IMPULSE

Rough time setting -PAUSE

Fine time setting -PAUSE

A1 S  A2

Supply terminals

Terminal for function selection

U

15-18

LED

Output indication multifunction LED

t1 t2 t1

Time ranges m

1

10

1 10

h

1

d

10

m

1

10

1 10

h

1

10

d m

1

10

1 10

h

1

10

d m

1

10

h

1 10

1

10

d m

1

10

1 10

h

1

10

d

10

S

1

30

100

10

S

1

30

100

10

S

1

30

100

10

S

1

30

100

10

S

1

30

100

0.1 - 1 s 1 - 10 s 0.1 - 1 min 1 - 10 min 0.1 - 1 h

m

1

10

1 10

h

1

d

10

m

1

10

h

1 10

1

d

10

m

1

10

h

1 10

1

d

10

m

1

10

1 10

h

1

d

10

m

1

10

1 10

h

1

10

d

10

S

1

30

100

10

S

1

30

100

10

S

1

30

100

10

S

1

30

100

10

S

1

30

100

1 - 10 hrs 0.1 - 1 day 1 - 10 days 3 - 30 days 10 - 100 days

15 16 18

Output contact

14

Multifunction time relay CRM-61

EAN code

CRM-61 /UNI: 8595188120210

Technical parameters

Number of functions:

Supply terminals:

Supply voltage :

Burden:

Supply voltage tolerance:

Supply indication:

Time ranges:

Time setting:

Time deviation:

Repeat accuracy:

Temperature coeffi cient:

Output

Number of contacts:

Current rating:

Breaking capacity:

Output indication:

Mechanical life:

Electrical life (AC1):

Controlling

Control. voltage:

Control power input:

Load between S-A2:

Glow-tubes:

Control. terminals:

Max. capacity of cable control:

Impulse length:

Reset time:

Other information

Operating temperature:

Storage temperature:

Electrical strength:

Operating position

Mounting/DIN rail:

Protection degree:

Overvoltage cathegory:

Pollution degree:

Max. cable size (mm

2

):

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

CRM-61

6

A1 - A2

AC 24 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz) a DC 24 V

AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W

15 %; +10 % green LED

0.1 s - 10 h rotary switch and potentiometer

5 % - mechanical setting

0.2 % - set value stability

0.01 % /°C, at = 20°C

1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)

8 A/ AC1

2500 VA / AC1, 240 W / DC multifunction red LED 8 A / AC1

1x10 7

1x10 5

UNI

AC 0.025 - 0.2 VA / DC 0.1 - 0.7 W

Yes

No

A1-S

0.1μF min. 25 ms / max. unlimited max. 120 ms

-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)

-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)

4 kV (supply-output) any

DIN rail EN 60715

IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals

III.

2

max. 2x 2.5, max. 1x4 (AWG 12) with sleeve max. 1x2.5, 2x1.5 mm

2

(AWG 12)

90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)

69 g (2.4 oz. )

EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1

!

Multifunction time relay (6 functions and 6 time ranges), economic version of CRM-91H

!

To be used for electrical appliances, control of lights, heating, motors, pumps, fans, etc.

!

6 functions: - 3 time functions controlled by supply voltage

- 3 time functions controlled by control input

!

Easy to use function and time-range setting by rotary switches

!

Time scale 0.1 s - 10 hrs divided into 6 range:

(0.1 s - 1 s / 1 s - 10 s / 0.1 min - 1 min / 1 min - 10 min / 0.1 hrs - 1 h rs/ 1 hrs - 10 hrs )

!

Universal Voltage range: AC 24-240 V, DC 24 V

!

Output contact: 1x changeover 8 A/ SPDT

!

Multifunction red LED output indicator fl ashes or shines depending of status

!

1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting

Symbol Connection

Function

a

U t t b d e k

U t t

U t tt t t t t

S

S <t t t t i

S  A2

Description

S

Supply indication

A1 t

16 18 t

15

A2 A1

16

15 18

Delay ON after energization

Delay OFF after energization

Un

Cycler beginning with impulse after energization

A2 A1

S

CRM-61

Delay OFF after de-energization, instant make of output

Impulse relay with delay, press its delay ON and next press its delay OFF output if it happens before expiration time

Delay ON after make of the switch till break

Supply terminals

Control input „S“

Output indication

Rought time setting

Fine time setting

Function setting

16

15 18

Output contact

15

Multifunction time relay CRM-91H, CRM-93H, CRM-9S

Technical parameters

Number of functions:

Supply terminals:

Voltage range:

Burden:

Voltage range:

Consumption (apparent/loss):

Supply voltage tolerance:

Supply indication:

Time ranges:

Time setting:

Time deviation:

Repeat accuracy:

Temperature coeffi cient:

Output

Number of contacts:

Current rating:

Breaking capacity:

Inrush current:

Switching voltage:

Min. breaking capacity DC:

Voltage drop on switch:

Load on B1 terminal:

Output indication:

Mechanical life:

Electrical life (AC1):

Controlling

Power on control input:

Load between S-A2:

Control. terminals:

Glow tubes connections:

Max. amount of glow lamps connected to controlling input:

Impulse length:

Reset time:

Other information

Operating temperature:

Storage temperature:

Electrical strength:

Operating position:

Mounting/DIN rail:

Protection degree:

Overvoltage cathegory:

Pollution degree:

Max. cable size (mm 2 ):

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

EAN code

CRM-91 /230V:

CRM-91 /UNI:

CRM-93H /230V:

CRM-93H /UNI:

CRM-9S /UNI:

8595188112444

8595188112420

8595188112789

8595188112468

8595188116008

CCA

!

Multifunction time relay can be used for electrical appliances, control of lights, heating, motors, pumps and fans (10 functions, 10 time ranges, multi-voltage, 16Amps or 3x8Amps contacts)

!

Fulfi lls all requirements for time relays

!

10 functions: - 5 time functions controlled by supply voltage

- 4 time functions controlled by control input

- 1 function of latching relay

!

Comfortable and well-arranged function and time-range setting by rotary switches

!

Time scale 0.1 s - 10 days divided into 10 ranges: (0.1 s - 1 s / 1 s - 10 s / 0.1 min - 1 min / 1 min - 10 min / 0.1 hrs - 1 hrs /

1 hrs - 10 hrs /0.1 day - 1 day/ 1 day - 10 days / only ON / only OFF)

!

CRM-91H, CRM-93H: Universal supply voltage AC/DC 12 - 240 V or AC 230 V,

Output contact: CRM-91H: 1x changeover/SPDT 16 A; CRM-93H: 3 x changeover/SPDT 8 A

!

CRM-9S: Universal supply voltage AC 12 - 240 V AC 12 - 240 V, absolutely noise-less switching

1x static contactless output (triac) 01.7 A (60A/<10 ms), switches potential A1

!

Multifunction red LED output indicator fl ashes or shines depending of status

!

1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting

CRM-9S Symbol Connection CRM-91H CRM-93H

10

A1 - A2

AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz)

AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W

AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz

AC max. 12VA / 1.3W

AC max. 12VA / 1.9W

-15 %; +10 % green LED

0.1 s - 10 days rotary switch and potentiometer

5 % - mechanical setting

0.2 % - set value stability

0.01 % / °C, at = 20 °C ( 0.01 % / °F, at = 68 °F)

AC 12-240V (50-60Hz)

AC max. 0.35VA

x x

CRM-91H

A1

S  A2

CRM-93H

16 18

15

+

A1 S  A2

-

15 16 18

+

A1 S  A2

-

1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)

16A / AC1

4000VA / AC1, 384W / DC

30A / <3s

3x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)

8A / AC1

2000VA / AC1, 192W / DC

10A / <3s

250V AC1 / 24V DC

500mA x x multifunction red LED

3x10

7

0.7x10

5

1x static contactless output (triac)

0.7A

x

60A / <10ms x x max. 0.9 V at I max.

Yes / I max. 0.7 A

> 10 8

>10 8

A1

S  A2

16 18 26 28 36 38

15 25 35

35 36 38

25 26 28

15 16 18

Possibility to connect load onto controlling input

It is possible to connect the load (e.g.: contactor) between terminals

S-A2, without any interruption of correct relay function.

AC 0.025 - 0.2 VA / DC 0.1 - 0.7 W (UNI), AC 0.53 VA (AC 230 V), AC 0.025 - 0.2 VA (AC 12 - 240 V)

YES

A1-S

YES

NO

UNI - glow lamps cannot connected/NO

230 V - max.20 pcs (Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC) min. 25 ms / max. unlimited max. 150 ms glow lamps cannot connected/NO x max. 250 ms

Un

+ load

A1

S  A2

16 18

15

-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)

-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)

4kV(supply-output) any

DIN rail EN 60715

IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals

III.

x

2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12)

90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)

(UNI) - 64 g (2.26 oz.); (230) - 62 g (2.2 oz.) (UNI) - 89 g (3.1 oz.); (230) - 87 g (3 oz.) 51 g (1.8 oz.)

EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1

CRM-9S

A1 /B1

S  A2

18 18

A1 S  A2

B1 18 18

16

Multifunction time relay CRM-91H, CRM-93H, CRM-9S

Function

On Delay (Power On)

When the input voltage U is applied, timing delay t begins. Relay contacts R change state after time delay is complete. Contacts R return to their shelf state when input voltage U is removed. Trigger switch is not used in this function.

a

Interval (Power On)

When input voltage U is applied, relay contacts R change state immediately and timing cycle begins. When time delay is complete, contacts return to shelf state. When input voltage U is removed, contacts will also return to their shelfstate. Trigger switch is not used in this function.

b

Repeat Cycle (Starting Off )

When input voltage U is applied, time delay t begins. When time delay t is complete, relay contacts R change state for time delay t. This cycle will repeat until input voltage U is removed. Trigger switch is not used in this function.

c

U

U

U t t t t t t t t t t

Single Shot

Upon application of input voltage U, the relay is ready to accept trigger signal

S. Upon application of the trigger signal S, the relay contacts R transfer and the preset time t begins. During time-out, the trigger signal S is ignored. The relay resets by applying the trigger switch S when the relay is not energized.

Single Shot Trailing Edge (Non-Retriggerable)

Upon application of input voltage U, the relay is ready to accept trigger signal

S. Upon application of the trigger signal S, the relay contacts R transfer and the preset time t begins. At the end of the preset time t, the relay contacts R return to their normal condition unless the trigger switch S is opened and closed prior to time out t (before preset time elapses). Continuous cycling of the trigger switch

S at a rate faster than the preset time will cause the relay contacts R to remain closed. If input voltage U is removed, relay contacts R return to their shelf state

On/Off Delay

Input voltage U must be applied continuously. When trigger switch S is closed, time delay t begins. When time delay t is complete, relay contacts

R change state and remain transferred until trigger switch S is opened.

If input voltage U is removed, relay contacts R return to their shelf state.

f g h

S

S

S

Latching relay

Input voltage U must be applied continuously. Output changes state with every trigger switch S closure. If input voltage U is removed, relay contacts R return to their shelf state.

i

S t t t t

Repeat Cycle (Starting On)

When input voltage U is applied, relay contacts R change state immediately and time delay t begins. When time delay t is complete, contacts return to their shelf state for time delay t. This cycle will repeat until input voltage U is removed. Trigger switch is not used in this function.

d

U t t t t t t

Off Delay (S Break)

Input voltage U must be applied continuously. When trigger switch S is closed, relay contacts R change state. When trigger switch S is opened, delay t begins. When delay t is complete, contacts R return to their shelf state.

If trigger switch S is closed before time delay t is complete, then time is reset. When trigger switch S is opened, the delay begins again, and relay contacts R remain in their energized state. If input voltage U is removed, relay contacts R return to their shelf state.

e

Time ranges m

10

1

10

S

1 h

1 10

1 d

10

ON

OFF

0.1 - 1s

S m

10

1

10

S

1 h

1 10

1 d

10

ON

OFF

1 - 10 s

t t

Pulse generator

Upon application of input voltage U, a single output pulse of 0.5 seconds is delivered to relay after time delay t. Power must be removed and reapplied to repeat pulse. Trigger switch is not used in this function.

j

m

1

10

10

S

1 h

1 10

1 d

10

ON

OFF

0.1 - 1 min

m

1

10

10

S

1 h

1 10

1 d

10

ON

OFF

1 - 10 min

U t t m

10

1

10

S

1 h

1 10

1 d

10

ON

OFF

0.1 - 1 h

t t t t m

10

1 h

1 10

10

S

1

1 d

10

ON

OFF

1 - 10 hrs

m

10

1

10

S

1 h

1 10

1 d

10

ON

OFF

0.1 - 1 day

m

1

10 h

1 10

10

S

1

1 d

10

ON

OFF

1 - 10 days

m

1

10 h

1 10

10

S

1

1 d

10

ON

OFF

only ON

m

10

1 h

1 10

1 d

10

10

S

1

ON

OFF

only OFF

Description

Supply indication

Rought time setting

Fine time setting

Function setting

A1 S  A2

Supply terminals

Control input “S”

Output indication-multifunction LED

Examples of signaling

Function: a U

15-18

LED t

Function:e U

S

15-18

LED t

15 16 18

Output contact

Notes

1) CRM-93H doesn’t allow switching of diff erent phases or 3-phase voltages.

2) When mounting into steal-plated switchboards, it is necessary keep safety distance of min. 3 mm from terminal’s screws 35-36-38 and 25-26-28 towards the shutter of a switchboard.

17

Time relay with external potentiometer CRM-91HE, CRM-2HE

!

Control by external control unit - potentiometer (can be for example on switch board doors or in panel)

!

CRM-91HE: multifunction time relays

10 functions - 5 time functions controlled by supply voltage

- 4 time functions controlled by control input

- 1 function of latching relay time scale 0.1 s - 10 days divided into 10 ranges

(0.1 s - 1 s / 1 s - 10 s / 0.1 min - 1 min / 1 min - 10 min / 0.1 hrs - 1 hrs / 1 hrs - 10 hrs / 0.1 day - 1 day /

1 day - 10 days / only ON / only OFF)

!

CRM-2HE: asymmetric cycler

2 time functions - cycler beginning with pulse

- cycler beginning with gap function selected via external wired link on control input S-A1

!

CRM-91HE, CRM-2HE :

!

Universal supply voltage AC/DC 12 - 240 V

!

!

Output contact: 1x changeover 16 A/SPDT

1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting

!

Possible to connect external potentiometer - max. distance 10m (32.8 ft.) from relay

CRM-2HE

Symbol

EAN code

CRM-91HE /UNI + potentiometr: 8595188142052

CRM-2HE /UNI + potetiometr: 8595188142069

Potentiometr for CRM-91HE, CRM-2HE : 8595188125215

Technical parameters

CRM-91HE

Number of functions:

Supply terminals:

Voltage range:

Burden:

Supply voltage tolerance:

Supply indication:

Time ranges:

Time setting:

Repeat accuracy:

Temperature coeffi cient:

Output

Number of contacts:

Current rating:

Breaking capacity:

Inrush current:

Switching voltage:

Min. breaking capacity DC:

Output indication:

Mechanical life:

Electrical life (AC1):

Controlling

Control. voltage:

Consumption of input:

Load between S-A2:

Glow-tubes:

Control. terminals:

Impulse length:

Reset time:

Other information

Operating temperature:

Storage temperature:

Electrical strength:

Operating position:

Mounting/DIN rail:

Protection degree:

Overvoltage cathegory:

Pollution degree:

Max. cable size (mm 2 ):

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

10 2

A1 - A2

AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz)

AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W

-15 %; +10 % green LED

0.1 s - 10 days 0.1 s - 100 days rotary switch, external potentiometer

0.2 % - set value stability

0.01 % /°C, at = 20°C

1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)

16 A / AC1

4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC

30 A / <3 s

250 V AC1 / 24 V DC

500 mW multifunction red LED

3x10 7

0.7x10

5

UNI

AC 0.025-0.2VA / DC 0.1-0.7W

Yes

No

A1-S min. 25 ms / max. unlimited max. 150 ms

-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)

-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)

4 kV (supply - output) any

DIN rail EN 60715

IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals

III.

2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12)

90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)

77 g (2.7 oz.) 78 g (2.8 oz.)

EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1

CRM-91HE, CRM-2HE

B1

B2

B3

B4*

A1

A2

*B4 only for CRM-2HE

Connection

CRM-91HE

CRM-2HE

Setting of

IMPULSE

Setting of

PAUSE

A1 S  A2

B1 B3 B2

15 16 18

A1 S  A2

B1 B3 B2

B1 B4 B2

15 16 18

Potentiometer to CRM-91HE, CRM-2HE

16 18

15

Control input “S”

Supply voltage indication

Rought time setting

A1 S  A2

B1 B3 B2

Function setting

Description

15 16 18

Control input “S”

Supply voltage indication

Rought time setting-IMPULSE

Rought time setting-PAUSE

A1 S  A2

B1 B4 B2

CRM-2HE

B1

B1 B4 B2

15 16 18 external control unit

Supply terminals

Intup for external time control

Output indication

-multifunction LED

Example of signaling

U

15-18

LED

h

t

15-18

LED

U

S t

Free position

Output contact

Supply terminals

Input for external time contol - IMPULSE

Output indication-

-multifunction LED

Input for external control time-PAUSE

Output contact

Potentiometer

Function

Functions of CRM-91HE are identical with CRM-91H.

Functions of CRM-2HE are identical with CRM-2H.

Potentiometer:

Protection degree:

Max. cable size (mm 2 ):

Weight:

Dimensions:

47 kΩ, linear

IP 65 from front side/ IP 20 from back side

1.5 mm 2 with sleeve / without sleeve max.2.5 (AWG 12)

15 g (0.5 oz.) see page Accessories

18

Plug-in time relay PRM-91H, PRM-92H, PRM-2H

!

!

Multifunction time relays are equivalents by module types of relay, designed to standardized plump 11 or 8pin socket

Pin type enables easy changing, replacement older type of relays (pin-compatible) or easy changing auxiliary relay for time relays

!

Multifunction time relay PRM-91H

11 and 8 pin type

10 time functions, time scale from 0.1 s to 10 days is divided into 10 ranges output contact 1x 16 A / 4000VA, 250V AC1

!

Multifunction time relay PRM-92H

11 pin type

10 time functions, time scale from 0,1 s to 10 days is divided into 10 ranges output contact 2x 8 A / 2000VA, 250V AC1

!

Asymmetric cycler PRM-2H

11 pin type

2 time functions, time scale from 0,1 s to 100 days is divided into 10 ranges output contact 2x 8 A / 2000VA, 250V AC1

!

!

!

Universal supply voltage AC/DC 12 - 240 V

Output indication: multif. red LED, fl ashing at certain states

PLUG-IN relays

EAN code

PRM-91H-8 /UNI

PRM-91H-11 /UNI

PRM-92H /UNI

PRM-2H /UNI

8595188135511

8595188111638

8595188111096

8595188111645

Technical Parameters

Number of functions:

Supply:

Voltage range:

Burden:

Supply voltage tolerance:

Supply indication:

Time ranges:

Time setting:

Time deviation:

Repeat accuracy:

Temperature coeffi cient:

Output

Number of contacts:

Current rating:

Breaking capacity:

Inrush current:

Switching voltage:

Min. breaking capacity DC:

Output indication:

Mechanical life:

Electrical life (AC1):

Control

Control. voltage:

Control power input:

Load between 5-10:

Glow-tubes:

Control terminals:

Max. capacity of cable control:

-without connected glow-lamps:

Impulse length:

Reset time:

Other information

Operating temperature:

Storage temperature:

Electrical strength:

Operating position:

Mounting/DIN rail:

Protection degree:

Overvoltage cathegory:

Pollution degree:

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

PRM-91H/8 PRM-91H/11 PRM-92H PRM-2H

Symbol

10 2 pins 2 and 7 pins 2 and 10 pins 2 and 10 pins 2 and 10

AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz)

AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W

LEGEND TO DESCRIPTION polarity- outputs/number on module/on socket

PRM-91H

11 pin

A1/2/+

4 3

8 pin

A1/2/+ 4 3

PRM-92H, PRM-2H

A1/2/+

4 3 8 9

-15 %; +10 % green LED

0.1 s - 10 days 0.1 s - 100 days rotaty switch and potentiometer

5 A2/10/-

5 % - mechanical setting

1

5 A2/10/-

1 11

0.2 % - set value stability

0.01 % / °C, at = 20 °C ( 0.01 % / °F, at = 68 °F)

Connection

PRM-92H/11 PRM-91H/8

Recommended socket for DIN rail

ES-11A ES-8

5

1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy) 2x changeover/ DPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)

16 A / AC1 8A / AC1

4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC 2000 VA / AC1, 192 W / DC

30 A / <3 s  10 A / <3 s

250 V AC1 / 24 V DC

500 mW multifunction red LED

3x10 7

0.7x10

5

4

3

2

5

+

1

6

11

7

8

9

10

-

3

4

2

+

Description / Connection

1

8

-

6

7

11 pin

8 pin

Supply indication in the supply voltage range

AC 0.025 - 0.2 VA / DC 0.1 - 0.7 W (UNI)

Yes

No

2 - 5

0.1μF min. 25 ms / max. unlimited max. 150 ms

-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)

-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)

2.5 kV any

DIN rail EN 60715

IP 40 from front panel

III.

2

50 x 38 x 53 mm (2˝ x 1.5˝ x 2.1˝)

57 g (2.01 oz.) 57 g (2.01 oz.) 58 g (2.05 oz.) 58 g (2.05 oz.)

EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1

Time ranges of PRM-91H, PRM-92H are identical with CRM-91H.

Time ranges of PRM-2H are identical with CRM-2H. See page 17.

Functions PRM-2H

Choice Function in PRM-2H is done by connecting terminals 2 and 5

Cycler beginning with pulse

U

2 5

R t1 t2 t1 t2 t1 t2

Cycler beginning with pause

U

2 5

S

R t2 t1 t2 t1 t2 t1 d

Output indication

Rought time setting

Fine time setting

Function setting

Supply indication

Output indication

Rought time setting IMPULSe

Fine time setting IMPULSe

Rought time setting PAUSE

Fine time setting PAUSE

Functions of PRM-91H, PRM-92H are identical with CRM-91H. See page 17.

19

Programmable digital relay PDR-2/A, PDR-2/B

EAN code

PDR-2A /230V:

PDR-2A /UNI:

PDR-2B /230V:

PDR-2B /UNI:

8594030333037

8594030333044

8594030333051

8594030333068

Technical parameters

Function:

Supply terminals:

Voltage range:

Burden:

Voltage range:

Consumption (apparent/loss):

Supply voltage tolerance:

Time ranges:

Repeat accuracy:

Temperature coeffi cient:

Output

Number of contacts:

Current rating:

Breaking capacity:

Inrush current:

Switching voltage:

Min. breaking capacity DC:

Output indication:

Mechanical life:

Electrical strength (AC1):

Control

Control input Burden:

Glow lamps:

Control. impulse length:

Reset time:

Display - colour:

Number and height of digits:

Luminace:

Light wavelength:

Brightness setting:

Memory - memory locations:

Data stored for:

Other information

Operating temperature:

Storage temperature:

Electrical strength:

Operating position:

Mounting/DIN rail:

Protection degree:

Overvoltage cathegory:

Pollution degree:

Max. cable size (mm 2 ):

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

!

Multifunction programmable digital relay with 4 digit red LED display

!

Control and setting is done by 3 buttons, user-friendly menu, absolute accuracy in timer setting, time countdown on a display galvanically separated START and STOP control inputs with UNI supply

!

Thanks to its complexity it is possible to program also more demanding time functions by using 2 independent times

!

2 independent times, with combination of 2 inputs and 2 outputs

!

PDR-2/A: 16 functions, choice of functions of the other relay, 30 memory places for most frequently used times

!

PDR-2/B: 10 functions, 1 output of 10 functions can be assigned to each relay = 2 relays in one device

!

2 independent times in range: 0.01 s - 100 hrs

!

Supply voltage AC/DC 12 - 240 V or AC 230 V

!

3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting

PDR-2/A PDR-2/B

16 10

A1 - A2

AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz)

AC 0.5 - 2.5 VA / DC 0.4 - 2.5 W

AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz

AC max. 16 VA / 2.5 W

-15 %; +10 %

0.01 s - 100 h

0.2 % - set value stability

0.01 % / °C, at = 20 °C ( 0.01 % / °F, at = 68 °F)

Symbol

PDR-2

IN1

IN1

IN2

IN2

Description

2x changeover/ DPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)

16 A / AC1

4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC

30 A / <3 s

250 V AC1 / 24 V DC

500 mW

red LED

3x10

7

0.7x10

5

Supply terminals

AC 0.01 - 0.25 VA (UNI), AC 0.25 VA (AC 230 V)

No min. 1 ms / max. unlimited max. 200 ms red

4 positions with separating colon, height 10 mm (0.39˝)

2200 - 3800 ucd

635 nm range 20 - 100 % in 10 steps adjustable

30 (PDR-2/A) / 20 (PDR-2/B) for times ranges + service function min. 10 years

Indication of operating times

(t1, t2)

Controlling buttons

Output 1

-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)

-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)

4 kV (supply - output) any

DIN rail EN 60715

IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals

III.

2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x1.5 (AWG 12)

90 x 52 x 65 mm (3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝)

(UNI) - 143 g( 5 oz. ), (230) - 134 g( 4.7 oz. )

EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1

Time data

Time range:

Minimal time step:

Time deviation:

Setting error:

Setting, reset accuracy:

Digital places:

A1

A2

16 18 26 28

15 25

26 25 28 18 15 16

0.01 s - 99 h 59 min 59 sec 99 ss

0.01 s

0.01 % of set value

0 %

100 % selected via program

Control inputs

Indication of time

(h, m, s)

Indication of output status

Output 2

20

Programmable digital relay PDR-2/A, PDR-2/B

Connection

PDR-2/A

Un

START input

A1 A2 IN1 IN1 IN2 IN2

PDR-2

STOP input t1 t2 mode stop

h m start s out 1 out 2

PDR-2/B

Un

START input for output 1

(t1)

START input for output 2 (t2)

A1 A2 IN1 IN1 IN2 IN2

PDR-2 t1 t2 mode stop

h m start s out 1 out 2

Function

Functions for PDR-2/A and PDR-2/B

1. Delay ON

A1-A2

15-18

16 15 18 28 25 26 output 1

16A AC1/250V output 2

16A AC1/250V t1

16 15 18 28 25 26 output 1

16A AC1/250V output 2

16A AC1/250V

Functions for PDR-2/A

11. Cycler beginning with impulse with

A1-A2 variable interval

15-18 t1 t2 t1 t2 t1 t2 t1

2. Delay OFF

A1-A2

15-18 t1

12. Cycler beginning with pause with variable interval

A1-A2

15-18 t1 t2 t1 t2 t1 t2 t1

3. Delay ON after break of control. contact

A1-A2

START

15-18 t1

4. Delay ON at make of control. contact

A1-A2

START

15-18

5. Delay OFF after break of output contact

A1-A2

START

15-18

6. Delay OFF at make of output contact

A1-A2

START

15-18

7. Delay OFF at break of control. contact with instant output

A1-A2

START

15-18

8. Delay OFF at make of control. contact with delayed output

A1-A2

START

15-18

9. Cycler beginning with impulse

A1-A2

15-18 t1 t1 t1 t1 t1 t1 t1 t1 t1 t1 t1

13. Generator of impulse

A1-A2

START

15-18 t1

14. Changeover star/delta

15A. Shift of pulse by 2 times

A1-A2

15-18

25-28

A1-A2

START

15-18 t1 t1

15B. Shift of impulse by 2 times

16A. Extended impulse by 2 times

16B. Extended impulse by 2 times

A1-A2

START

15-18 t1

A1-A2

START

15-18 t1

A1-A2

START

15-18 t1 t2 t2 t2 t2 t2 t2 t1 t2

10. Cycler beginning with pause

A1-A2

15-18 t1

Recommendation:

PDR-2/B is replacing by 2 simple time relays = 2 in one.

t1 t1 t1 t1 t1

21

Digital time switch clock SHT

EAN code

SHT-1 /230V:

SHT-1 /UNI:

SHT-1/2 /230V:

SHT-1/2 /UNI:

SHT-3 /230V:

SHT-3 /UNI:

SHT-3/2 /230V:

8595188130424

8595188130431

8595188130400

8595188130417

8595188136761

8595188136754

8595188129015

SHT-3/2 /UNI: 8595188129046

Technical parameters

Supply terminals:

Voltage range:

Burden:

Voltage range:

Burden:

Supply voltage tolerance:

Back-up supply:

Summer/winter time:

Output

Number of contacts:

Current rating:

Breaking capacity:

Inrush current:

Switching voltage:

Min. breaking capacity DC:

Mechanical life:

Electrical life (AC1):

Time circuit

Power back-up:

Accuracy:

Minimum interval:

Data stored for:

Cyclic output:

Pulse output:

Program circuit

Number of memory places:

Program (SHT-1; SHT-1/2):

Program (SHT-3; SHT-3/2):

Data readout:

Other information

Operating temperature:

Storage temperature:

Electrical strength:

Operating position:

Mounting:

Protection degree:

Overvoltage cathegory:

Polution degree:

Max. cable size (mm

2

):

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

!

This time switch clock SHT is used to control various appliances in real time; daily, weekly, monthly and annual mode

!

Switching: according the program (AUTO)/constantly manually, manually to next program change/random (CUBE)

Output

Time programm

1 channel 2 channel day week month year

!

„Holiday program” option to choose an interval when the device doesn´t switch according to the standard program, but will be block during that time

!

Automatic conversion summer / winter time

!

Sealable cover of front panel, easy controlling via 4 buttons

!

100 memory places, clear LCD display, min. interval 1 s

!

Voltage range: AC 230 V or AC/DC 12-240 V

!

Cyclic output

!

Pulse output

!

SHT-1, SHT-3: one channel version, 2-MODULE, DIN rail mounting, clamp terminals

!

SHT-1/2, SHT-3/2: two channel version, 2-MODULE, an individual program can be run on each channel

SHT-1, SHT- 3 SHT-1/2, SHT-3/2

A1 - A2

AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz)

AC 0.5 - 2 VA / DC 0.4 - 2 W

AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz

AC max. 14 VA / 2 W

-15 %; +10 % yes automatic

Symbol

SHT-1

SHT-3

A1

A2

16 18

15

SHT-1/2

SHT-3/2

A1

A2

16 18 26 28

15 25

Connection

SHT-1

SHT-3

A1 16 15 18

SHT-1/2

SHT-3/2

A1 16 15 18

1x changeover/SPDT (AgSnO

2

) 2x changeover/DPDT (AgSnO

2

)

16 A / AC1

4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC

30 A / <3 s

250 V AC1 / 24 V DC

500 mW

3x10 7

0.7x10

5

Un

A2

Description of displayed elements on the screen

up to 3 years max. ±1s/ day at 23 °C (73.4 °F)

1 min min. 10 years

1-99s

1-99s

100 daily, weekly

daily, weekly, monthly, yearly (up to year 2095)

LCD display, with back light mode choice output switching indication (1st channel) output ON/OFF random switching mode manual switching mode channel 1(bargraph)

Description

Supply terminals (A1)

-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)

-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)

4 kV (supply - output) any

DIN rail EN 60715

IP 10 clips, IP 40 from front panel

III.

2

solid wire max. 2x2.5 or 1x4 (AWG 12) with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5 (AWG 12)

90 x 35.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x1.4˝ x 2.5˝)

(UNI) - 130 g (4.6 oz.), (230) - 110 g(3.9 oz.) (UNI)- 143 g 143 g (5 oz.), (230) - 125 g (4.4 oz.)

EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1

Display

Reset

Sealing spot

Supply terminals (A2)

0

1 2

Auto

3 4 5 6 7

Prog

Man

6 12 18

Auto

24

Un

A1 16 15 18

7

0

SHT-3

6

RESET

12

PRG

+

MAN 1

MAN 2

ESC

OK

A2 26 25 28

A2 26 25 28

shows the day in the week

indication of the pulse/ cyclic output indication (2nd channel)

AM/PM shows summer / winter mode indication of closed output channel 2 (bargraph)

Channel 1

(16-15-18)

Transparent cover

Controlling buttons

Channel 2(26-25-28)

only for SHT-1/2, SHT-3 /2

22

Digital time switch with an astronomical program SHT-4

EAN code

SHT-4 8595188144759

Technical parameters

Power supply terminals:

Supply voltage:

Input power:

Supply voltage tolerance:

Real time back-up:

Transition to summer / winter time:

Output

Number of contacts:

Rated current:

Switching power:

Peak current:

Switching voltage:

Min. DC switching power:

Mechanical service life:

Electrical service life (AC1):

Timing circuit

Real time reserve:

Accuracy of operation:

Minimum triggering interval:

Program data storage period:

Programming circuit

Number of memory locations:

Program:

Data display:

Other information

Operating temperature:

Storage temperature:

Electrical strength:

Operating position:

Mounting:

Protection degree:

Overvoltage category:

Polution degree:

Max. cable size (mm

2

):

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

Plug-in module

With battery

Type of backup battery:

SHT-4

A1 - A2

AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz

AC max. 14 VA / 2 W

-15 %; +10 % yes automatic

2 x changeover (AgSnO

2

)

16 A / AC1

4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC

30 A / <3 s

250 V AC1 / 24 V DC

500 mW

> 3x10

7

> 0.7x10

5 up to 3 years max. ±1 s per day, at 23°C

1 minute

10 years at minimum

100 daily, yearly (until 2099)

LCD display, backlight

-20.. +55°C

-30.. +70 °C

4 kV (power supply - output) any

DIN rail EN 60715

IP 10 terminals, IP 40 from front panel

III.

2

max. 2x2.5, max. 1x4 with sleeve max. 1x2.5, max. 2x1.5 mm

2

90 x 35.6 x 64 mm

133 g

EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1

!

!

Used for controlling the lighting (billboards, advertisements, shop windows, etc.) with no light sensor required

Function:

- by entering the geographic coordinates, the lighting can be switched on/off by sunrise and sunset

!

the preset coordinates for European cities, with optional manual adjustment of the geographical coordinates

!

during programming, 120 minutes may be added to the time of sunrise and sunset

!

selection of ON/OFF functions at sunrise or sunset

- astro-clock with adjustable interruption

- operating hours counter for each channel

!

- timer - switching on the basis of real-time

Two-channel design, where each channel is programmable independently of the other

!

!

Automatic switching between winter and summer time

Sealable transparent cover on the front panel

!

!

Data and time backup using the battery

Battery life - up to 3 years

!

!

Easy replacement of the backup battery through the plug-in module, no disassembling is required

Supply voltage: AC 230 V

!

2-MODULE, DIN rail mounting

Symbol Wiring

A1

A2

16 18 26 28

15 25

Description of items displayed on the screen

Displaying the day in week

Status indication (1st channel)

Status indication (2nd channel)

Date display of setup menu

Time display

Control button PRG+

Reset

Control button MAN1 / -

Device description

Supply voltage terminal (A1)

Backlight display

SHT-4

Auto + t Prog Man

Auto

Un

A1 16 15 18

SHT-4

RESET

MAN 2

PRG +

MAN

_

ESC

OK

A1 16 15 18

A2 26 25 28

Operation mode indication

Displays 12/24 hour mode

Indication of the switching program

Control button MAN2 / ESC

Control button OK

Output - Channel 1 (16-15-18)

Control buttons

Lead-sealing point

A2 26 25 28

Plug-in module for replacement of the backup battery

Supply voltage terminal (A2) Output - Channel 2 (26-25-28)

Without battery

CR 2032 (3V)

23

The SHT-6 time switch with DCF managing

EAN code

SHT-6 8595188148382

DCFR-1 8595188148412

Technical parameters

Terminals Supply

Voltage Supply:

Tolerance of voltage supply:

Output

Number of contacts:

Rated current:

Switching capacity:

Peak current:

Max. switching voltage:

Minimum switching capacity DC:

Mechanical life:

Electrical life (AC1):

Time circuit

Backup real. time:

Running accuracy:

Without DCF receiver

Minimum switching interval:

Data retention programs:

Program circuit

Number of memory locations:

Program:

Displayed data:

Other information

Working temperature:

Storage temperature:

Dielectric strength:

Operating position:

Mounting:

Protection:

Over voltage category:

Degree of pollution:

Cable size (mm

2

)

Dimension:

Weight:

Related standards

Plug-in module

With battery

Type of backup battery:

24

NEW

DCFR-1

SHT-6

A1 - A2

AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz

-15 %; +10 %

1 x changeover (AgSnO

2

)

16 A / AC1

4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC

30 A / <3 s

250 V AC1 / 24 V DC

500 mW

> 3x10

7

> 0.7x10

5 up to 3 years max. ±1 s a day with 23°C

1 min min. 10 years

100 daily, yearly ( till year 2099 )

LCD display with backlight

-10.. +55°C

-30.. +70 °C

4 kV (output supply) any

DIN rail EN 60715

IP10 terminals, IP40 from the front panel

III.

2

max. 2x2.5, max. 1x4 with max. ferrule 1x2.5, max. 2x1.5 mm

2

90 x 35.6 x 64 mm

140 g

EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1

!

!

!

!

!

!

!

!

!

!

!

!

Used for controlling appliances depending on real time, that is synchronized by a DCF 77 signal, thanks to the automatic time settings (with DCF 77 signal) it eliminates inaccuracies and errors by time running

1 channel design with external DCF receiver

Automatic switching between winter/summer time

Sealable cover of the front panel

100 memory locations

Backlit LCD display

Switching according to the program: auto / manual / random / holiday program

Backing up data and time using the battery

Reserve battery for up to 3 years

Easy replacement for the backup battery with plugging module without detaching the device

Power supply: AC 230V

2-MODULE, mounting on DIN rail

Symbol Connection

N

DCF

B1 B2 A1 16 18

A1 G B1 B2

DCFR-1

A2 15

A2 16 15 18

L

Description of the displayed elements on the screen

Displaying the day of the week

Status indication ( 1st channel )

Status indication ( 2nd channel )

Diplaying the set-up menu data

Displaying the time

Control button PRG / +

Reset

Control button MAN1 / -

Description

Terminal N

Backlit display

SHT-6

Auto + t Prog Man

Indication of operating mode

Displaying 12/24 h

Indication of the switching

Control button MAN2 / ESC

Control button OK

Connecting the receiver DCFR-1

SHT-6

RESET

MAN 2

PRG +

MAN

_

ESC

OK

Control buttons

Sealing place

Plug module for replacement battery backup

Terminal L Output - channel (16-15-18)

Without battery

CR 2032 (3V)

DCFR-1 receiver DCF 77

!

Universal DCF module, which is designed for controlling the SHT-6 timer, and other devices.

!

!

Outdoor applications (IP65)

Two-wire connection - not polarity sensitive!

!

!

Length of connecting cable is up to 100 m

Visual indication of proper function module

Technical parameters

Connection:

Max. cross-connection conductors:

Max voltage on the wires:

Indication Function:

Other information

Storage temperature:

Protection:

Dimension:

Weight:

Operating position:

The reception area:

DCFR-1

2 conductors

2.5 mm 2

10 V red LED

-30.. +70 °C

IP65

98 x 62 x 34 mm

110 g perpendicular to the direction of reception about 1500 km from Frankfurt / Main

Working position - options

Income (input) direction

Connected to SHT-6 max. 100 m

LED

25

Super-multifunction relay SMR-K, SMR-T, SMR-H, SMR-B

SMR-B

SMR-K

SMR-T

SMR-H

!

!

!

Multifunction relay designed for installation into a wiring box or under wall-switch in an existing electrical installation

Advantageous and fast solution for exchanging standard wall-switch for a switch controlled by time or for an impulse relay controlled by a button

More information about type and size of load for these products can be found on page 111

!

SMR-K

- 3-conductor connection, works without the connection of a neutral conductor.

- power output: 10-160 VA

- for fl awless function of the product is necessary the presence of a load R, L or C between input S and neutral wire

!

SMR-H

- 4-wire connection

- power output: 0 - 200 VA

- it can not be used for fl uorescent lamp and energy saving

bulb (capacitive load)

!

SMR-T

- 3-wire connection, works without the connection of a neutral conductor

- power output: 10 - 160 VA

- between input S and neutral wire is possible connect any load R, L, or C – that is not necessary (unlike SMR-K)

!

SMR-B

- 4-wire connection

- 10 functions

- output contact 1x16A / 4000 VA, 250V AC1

- enables switching of fl uorescent lights and also energy

saving lights

- suitable for switching loads greater than SMR-K, SMR-T,

SMR-H, for example pulse relay, stair automatic switch, switching of ladder radiators in bathrooms

- independent galvanically separated input AC/DC 5-250 V,

for example for control from a security system

EAN code

SMR-K /230V

SMR-T /230V

SMR-H /230V

SMR-B /230V

8595188145176

8595188129107

8595188129114

8595188135566

Technical parameters

SMR-K SMR-T SMR-H SMR-B

Description

Number of functions:

Connection:

Voltage range:

Power input (no operation/make):

Supply voltage tolerance:

Time ranges:

Time setting:

Time deviation:

Repeat accuracy:

Temperature coeffi cient:

Output

Number of contacts:

Resistive load:

Inductive load:

Control

Control voltage:

Control current:

Impulse length:

Glow tubes connetions:

Max. amount of glow lamps connected to controlling input:

Other information

Operating temperature:

Operating position:

Mounting:

Protection degree:

Overvoltage cathegory:

Pollution degree:

Fuse:

Connection:

Glow-lamps in control button:

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

9 10

3-wire, without neutral 4-wire, with neutral

AC 230V / 50-60Hz

0.8 / 3VA max 1 / 1VA

-15%; +10%

0.1 s - 10 days via rotaty switch

10 % - mechanical setting

2 % - set value stability

0.1 % / °C, at = 20 °C

1 x triac 1x NO(AgSnO

2

)

10 - 160 VA 0 - 200 VA 16A 125/250 V AC1

10 - 100 VA 0 - 100 VA 8A 250 V AC (cos φ > 0.4)

AC 230 V AC230V, UNI-5-250VAC/DC

25μA 3 mA min. 50ms / max. unlimited

x Yes

230V - max. amount 50 pcs

(Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC)

0..+50°C any free at connecting wires

IP30 in standard conditions

III.

2

SMR-H

Output indication

Rought time setting

Fine time setting

Function setting

Neutral (only in SMR-H)

Switch (button)

SMR-B

Galvanically separated control input 5-250 V AC/DC

F 1A / 250V x

3x CY, Ø 0.75 mm

2

(AWG 18) 4x sol. wir., Ø 0.75 mm

2

(AWG 18) 2 x CY, Ø 0.75mm

2

(AWG 18) lenght 90mm (3.5˝) lenght 90mm (3.5˝)

2 x CY, Ø 2.5 mm

2

(AWG 10)

Output indication

x max.10 max.20

49 x 49 x 13 mm (1.9˝x 1.9˝x 0.8˝) 49 x 49 x 21 mm (1.9˝x 1.9˝x 0.8˝)

26 g (0.92 oz. ) 26 g (0.92 oz. ) 27 g (0.95 oz. ) 53 g ( 1.9 oz.)

EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1

Rought time setting

Fine time setting

Output

Phase

Exchangeable

fuse

Output

Phase

Function setting

Neutral

Switch (button)

Time ranges m

10

1

10

S

1 h

1 10

1 d

10

ON

OFF

0.1 - 1 s

m

10

1

10

S

1 h

1 10

1 d

10

ON

OFF

1 - 10 hrs

m

10

1

10

S

1 h

1 10

1 d

10

ON

OFF

1 - 10 s

m

1

10

10

S

1 h

1 10

1 d

10

ON

OFF

0.1 - 1 day

m

10

1

10

S

1 h

1 10

1 d

10

ON

OFF

0.1 - 1 min

m

10

1

10

S

1 h

1 10

1 d

10

ON

OFF

1 - 10 days

m

10

1

10

S

1 h

1 10

1 d

10

ON

OFF

1 - 10 min

m

10

1

10

S

1 h

1 10

1 d

10

ON

OFF

only ON

m

1

10 h

1 10

10

S

1

1 d

10

ON

OFF

0.1 - 1 hrs

m

10

1

10

S

1 h

1 10

1 d

10

ON

OFF

only OFF

26

Super-multifunction relay SMR-K, SMR-T, SMR-H, SMR-B

Function

Function a - delay OFF on entrering edge output times when it is switched. Each following pressing (max. 5x) increases time. Long pressing swithes output off

Function b - delay OFF on downward edge output times after button is swithed off , switches immediately

Function c - delay OFF on downward edge after switching off output switches on and times.

Function d - cycler - fl asher impulsem output cycles in regular interval, cycler starts with an impulse

Function e - puls shift delay on after the switch is switched on and delay on after it is switched off

Connection SMR-K, SMR-T, SMR-H, SMR-B

N

L

V tt t t 2xt t

>2 s

t t t t t t

V t t t t t t t

Function f - delay ON delay on after switch is switched on until it is switched off

Function g - impulse relay switches on by a press, another pressing switches the output off . The length of pressing doesn’t matter, it is possible to set reaction delay by a potentiometer and thus eliminate rebound of a button

Function h - impulse relay with delay one press switches on, another one switches the output off in case it is done before the end of timing

Function i - cycler starting with pause output cycles in regular intervals, cycler starts with a pause

Function j* - cycler starting with gap delay ON until switched off until it is de-energized or a switch is pressed again.

Note.: *- Function j is valid only for SMR-B

t t

V t t t t

V t t t

V L S V L S N V L S N N S L V

V

L

S

SMR-K

SMR-

SMR-T SMR-H SMR-H

Typical wiring of SMR-K, SMR-T

- timer for lamp unit

Fan control depending on the SMR-K , SMR-T lighting

Typical wiring of SMR-H

- timer for lamp unit

Fan control depending on the lighting

Input for external control voltage AC/

DC 5-250 V

Note: The products of the SMR-K, SMR-T, SMR-H are not intended for switching capacity load (energy saving light bulbs and LED lights with capacity power etc.), these products are only intended for switching resistive and inductive loads (incandescent bulbs, fans, etc.). For other types of traffi c is determined by the SMR-B with relays output. This output is possible to switch the load character of R, L or C-values listed in the load table. Between inputs S and neutral wire is possible to connect any load of R, L or C, however this is not (unlike the SMR-K) condition.

Example of connection SMR-T

Original connection

N

neutral wire incoming phase wire

L

N

Control of an appliance by button neutral wire incoming phase wire

L

Button

(switch)

After the light bulb switch is switched off , fan starts operating and after set time switches off .

N

neutral wire

L

incoming phase wire

Button

Switch

27

Staircase switch CRM-4

EAN code

CRM-4 /230V: 8595188115605

Technical parameters

Function:

Supply terminals:

Voltage range:

Burden:

Supply voltage tolerance:

Supply indication:

Time ranges:

Time setting:

Time deviation:

Repeat accuracy:

Temperature coeffi cient:

Output

Number of contacts:

Current rating:

Breaking capacity:

Inrush current:

Switching voltage:

Min. breaking capacity DC:

Output indication:

Mechanical life:

Electrical life (AC1):

Control

Control voltage:

Power on input:

Load between S-A2:

Control terminals:

Glow tubes connetions:

Max. amount of glow lamps connected to controlling input:

Impulse length:

Reset time:

Other information

Operating temperature:

Storage temperature:

Electrical strength:

Operating position:

Mounting/DIN rail:

Protection degree:

Overvoltage cathegory:

Pollution degree:

Max. cable size (mm

2

):

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

Function

U switch

S t t

AUTO t

28

CRM-4

delay off reacting to control contact switching

A1 - A2

AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz

AC max. 12 VA / 1.8 W

-15 %; +10 % green LED

0.5 - 10 min potentiometer

10 % - mechanical setting

5 % - set value stability

0.05 % / °C, at = 20 °C ( 0.05 % / °F, at = 68 °F)

!

Used for delayed switching of lights in the corridors, entrances, stairways, halls or for delayed fi nish of fans (WC, bathroom, etc.)

!

It is controlled by a button or by several buttons from more places (connected in parallel) buttons can be equipped by glow lamps (max. 20 pcs of glow lamps)

!

Output relay contact 16 A/AC1 with surge current up to 80 A enables switching of el. bulbs and fl uorescent lamps

!

Operating system switch:

AUTO - normal Function according to set time

OFF – permanently OFF (e.g. when changing bulbs)

ON – permanently ON (e.g. while cleaning, servicing)

!

Time range: 0.5 - 10 min

!

Time setting by potentiometer

!

Supply voltage : AC 230 V

!

Protection against button blocking ( e.g. a match inserted in a button)

!

1- MODULE, DIN rail mounting

Symbol Connection

A1

S  A2

16 18

15

It is possible to connect load between S-A2 (e.g. contactor, control of light or any other device), without disturbing a correct function of relay (load is energized while the switch is ON).

U n load

A1

S  A2

16 18

15

1x changeover/SPDT (AgSnO

2

)

16 A / AC1

4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC

30 A / <3 s

250 V AC1 / 24 V DC

500 mW

red LED

3x10

7

0.7x10

5

Circuit connection

L

N

3-wire connection 4- wire connection

L

N

A1 S  A2 A1 S  A2

250V AC1

16A/4000VA

250V AC1

16A/4000VA AC 230 V

AC 0.53 VA

Yes

A1-S

Yes

AC 230V - max. amount 35 pcs

(Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC) min. 25 ms / max. unlimited max. 150 ms

15 16 18

Description

A1 S  A2

15 16 18

Supply terminals

Controlling contact

Output indication

-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)

-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)

4 kV (supply - output) any

DIN rail EN 60715

IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals

III.

2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12)

90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)

62 g (2.2 oz.)

EN 60669-2-3, EN 61010-1

Supply indication

Operating system swich

Time setting

OFF

ON

15 16 18

Output contact

EAN code

CRM-42 /230V: 8595188136693

CRM-42F /230V: 8595188146883

Technical parameters

Function:

Supply terminals:

Voltage range:

Burden:

Supply voltage tolerance:

Supply indication:

Time ranges:

Time setting:

Time deviation:

Repeat accuracy:

Temperature coeffi cient:

Output

Number of contacts:

Current rating:

Breaking capacity:

Inrush current:

Switching voltage:

Min. breaking capacity DC:

Output indication:

Mechanical life:

Electrical life (AC1):

Electrical life (AC5b):

Control

Control voltage:

Input Burden:

Glow tubes connetions:

Max. amount of glow lamps connected to controlling input:

Control. terminals:

Impulse length:

Reset time:

Other information

Operating temperature:

Storage temperature:

Operating position:

Mounting/DIN rail:

Protection degree:

Overvoltage cathegory:

Pollution degree:

Max. cable size (mm

2

):

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

Programmable staircase switch with signalling before switch off CRM-42, CRM-42F

CRM-42 / CRM-42F

delay OFF responsive to control contact switch on

A1 - A2

AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz

AC max. 12 VA / 1.8 W

-15 %; +10 % green LED

Mode AUTO: 0.5 - 10 min, Mode PROG potentiometer

5 % - mechanical setting

5 % - set value stability

0.05 % / °C, at = 20 °C ( 0.05 % / °F, at = 68 °F)

!

!

!

!

!

!

!

!

!

!

!

Intelligent staircase switch, the same use as CRM-4, but with enlarged possibility of control in mode „PROG“, it is possible to select time of delayed OFF by number of button pressing. Each pressing multiplies time set by potentiometer, it means that in case you set time to 5 min and press the button 3 times, then the output is automatically prolonged to 15 min. Output can be also switched off before time (reset) by long pressing of button (longer than 2 sec)

Output relay contact 16A/AC1 with inrush current up to 80 A enables switching of el. bulbs and also fl uorescent lights

Operating system switch:

ON - output is constantly ON (service mode)

AUTO - timing according to adjusting by potentiometer in range 30 s - 10 min

PROG - timing with time prolongation option by number button pressing

Timing (in mode AUTO and PROG) is possible to be stopped by long pressing of the button (> 2 s)

Voltage range: AC 230 V, clamp terminals

Output indication: multif. red LED, fl ashing at certain states

Possibility to connect up to 100 buttons equipped with glow lamps (in total 100mA)

3-wire or 4-wire connection (it is possible to control input S by potential A1 or A2)

Warning before switch OFF- output doublefl ash 40 and 30 sec before switch OFF

CRM-42F: Staircase switch without warning fl ashes especially suited for use with energy-saving lamps, where frequent fl ashing may cause damage to the light source

1- MODULE, DIN rail mounting

Connection

N

L

3- wire connection 4- wire connection

A2 S 

A1 18

N

L

A2 S 

A1 18

Description

1x NO - SPST(AgSnO

2

), switches potencial A1

16 A / AC1

4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC

30 A / <3 s

250 V AC1 / 24 V DC

500 mW

red LED

3x10

7

0.7x10

5

8x10

4

(bulbs 1000 W) *

Supply terminal A2

Supply indication

Operating system switch

Time setting

A2 S

Controlling input

Output indication multifunction red LED

AC 230 V

AC 0.53 VA

Yes

230V - max. amount 50 pcs

(Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC)

A1-S or A2-S min. 50 ms / max. unlimited max. 150 ms

-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)

-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) any

DIN rail EN 60715

IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals

III.

2 solid wire max. 2x2.5 or 1x4, (AWG 12) with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5, (AWG 12)

90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)

65 g (2.3 oz.)

EN 60669-2-3, EN 61010-1

Supply terminal A1

Function

MODE ON

U

S

18

red LED

Symbol

A1

S  A2

400ms

A1 18

18

red LED

U

S

MODE AUTO

t

2s

Output contact

MODE PROG (the illumination time is defi ned by number of button pressing)

U

>2s

S

18

red LED

t t t t t t

18

t

* For bigger bulb loads and frequent switching is recommended to intensify the contact relay with power contactor e.g. VSXXX

29

30

Notes

Auxiliary and Power relays

VS(B,K)

VS116B/230

Supply voltage :

AC 230 V

Output contact:

1x changeover/ SPDT 16 A.

VS116K

Supply voltage :

AC 230 V and AC/DC 24 V

Output contact:

1x changeover/ SPDT 16 A.

VS308K

Supply voltage :

AC 230 V and AC/DC 24 V

Output contacts:

3x changeover/ SPDT 8A.

VS316/24

Supply voltage :

AC/DC 24 V

Output contacts:

3x changeover/SPDT 16 A, possibility to be connected into 3-phase circuit.

VS316/230

Supply voltage :

AC 230 V

Output contacts:

3x changeover/ SPDT 16 A, possibility to be connected into 3-phase circuit.

VS(U)

782L

782L

Power relays plug-in

Output contacts: 4 x changeover contact/

SPDT 6 A

Plug-in type.

VS116U

Supply voltage :

AC/DC 12-240 V

Output contact:

1x changeover/SPDT 16 A.

750L

ES-15/4NA - socket

Max. voltage: 12 A

Weight: 59 g

Mounting to DIN rail

Designated for 4-contact relay.

Other features

750L

Power relays plug-in

Output contacts:

3 x changeover contact /

SPDT 10 A

Plug-in type.

VS308U

Supply voltage :

AC/DC 12-240 V

Output contacts:

3x changeover/ SPDT 8 A.

ES-11A- socket

Max. current: 10 A

Weight: 60 g

Monting to DIN rail

Designated for 3-contact relay.

VS116B/230

VS116K

VS116U

VS308K

VS308U

VS316/24

VS316/230

782L

750L

MINI

1M-DIN

1M-DIN

1M-DIN

1M-DIN

1M-DIN

1M-DIN

PLUG-IN

PLUG-IN

AC 230 V/50-60 Hz

AC 230 and AC/DC 24 V

AC/DC 12..240 V

AC 230 and AC/DC 24 V

AC/DC 12..240 V

AC/DC 24 V

AC 230 V

AC 6-230 V,

DC 6-110 V

AC 6-230 V,

DC 6-110V

1x16 A changeover/

SPDT

1x16 A changeover/

SPDT

1x16 A changeover/

SPDT

3x8 A changeover/

3PDT

3x8 A changeover/

3PDT

3x16 A changeover/

3PDT

3x16 A changeover/

3PDT

4x8 A changeover/

4PDT

3x16 A changeover/

3PDT

More about contact loadability on page 111

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

VS116/B230 MINI, with installation into junction box or ceiling that allows control of lights, shades or awnings drives as a separation relay (4kV), direct switching of appliances up to 4000VA

(e.g. heaters), well visible signalization, noiseless as VS116K, but multivoltage supply coil a “multiplication” of contacts, 3x changeover contact/ 3PDT only in 1-MODULE, well visible signalization, noiseless

32-33

32-33

32-33

32-33 as VS308K, but multivoltage supply coil

32-33

32-33

3x changeover contact in 1-MODULE, possibility of “multiplication” of contacts and in the same time possibility of switching high output, possibility of 3 phase switching as VS316/24, but AC 230V compact small relay for installation into plug relay, basic version equipped by LED indication, detent and testing lever as 782, but into 11-pin round socket,

3x changeover contact / 3PDT 16A/250V

32-33

34-35

34-35

31

Power relays modular type VS

Technical parameters

Supply terminals:

Voltage range:

Burden:

Supply terminals:

Voltage range:

Burden:

Supply voltage tolerance:

Output

Number of contacts:

Current rating:

Breaking capacity:

Inrush current:

Switching voltage:

Min. breaking capacity DC:

Output indication:

Mechanical life:

Electrical life (AC1):

Time between switching:

Other information

Operating temperature:

Storage temperature:

Electrical strength:

Operating position:

Mounting/DIN rail:

Protection degree:

Overvoltage cathegory:

Pollution degree:

Max. cable size (mm 2 ):

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

Symbol

VS116B/230

L 12 14

EAN code

see page 33

VS116B/230

L-N

AC 230 V/50-60 Hz

AC max. 7.5 VA/ 1W x x x red LED min. 2s free at connecting wire

IP 30

2x 0.75 mm 2 ,

3x 2.5 mm 2

49 x 49 x 21 mm

48 g

EN 61810-1, EN 61010-1

VS116K

A1

12 14

!

Power relay used for switching larger load output, strengthen or „multiplying“ contacts of the existing device

Type

VS116K

VS116U

VS116/B230

VS308K

VS308U

VS316/24

VS316/230

Current rating

16 A

16 A

16 A

8 A

8 A

16 A

16 A

3

3

1

3

3

Number of contacts

1

1

Design

DIN (1M)

DIN (1M)

BOX (MINI)

DIN (1M)

DIN (1M)

DIN (1M)

DIN (1M)

Supply terminals

A1 - A2 230V AC/ A1 - A3 24V AC/DC

A1 - A2 12- 240V AC

L-N 230V AC

A1 - A2 230V AC/ A1 - A3 24 V AC/DC

A1 - A2 12-240V AC/DC

A1 - A2 24V AC/DC

A1 - A2 230V AC

!

Relays VS316/24, VS316/230 enable connection to a 3-phase circuit

!

In the design 1-MODULE , DIN rail mounting, output status indicated by high intensity LED with choice of LED color

(red, green, yellow, blue or white LED*)

!

VS116/B230 MINI, mounting in installation box or ceilings, enabling switching of lights, motors for blinds or awnings

!

For VS116/B230 status of output indicated by LED on front panel of device

VS116K VS116U VS308K VS308U

AC 230 V/50-60 Hz

AC max. 7.5 VA/ 1W

A1-A3

AC/DC 24 V (50-60 Hz)

AC 1 VA/ DC 1W

AC/DC 12-240 V/ 50-60 Hz

AC 0.7 - 3 VA/ DC 0.5 - 1.7 W x x x

AC 230 V/ 50-60 Hz

AC max. 10.3 VA/ 1.1 W

A1 - A2

AC/DC 12-240 V/ 50-60 Hz

AC 0.7 - 3 VA/ DC 0.5 - 1.7 W

A1-A3

AC/DC 24 V (50-60 Hz)

AC 1 VA/ DC 1W

-15%; +10%

VS316/24

AC/DC 24 V/ 50-60 Hz

1.6 VA/ 1.2 W x x x

1 x changeover/ SPDT (AgSnO

2

)

16 A/ AC1

4000VA/ AC1, 384W/ DC

30 A/ <3s

54 g (1.9 oz.) 58 g (2.05 oz.)

VS116U

A1 12 14

3 x changeover/3PDT (AgNI / Silver Alloy)

8 A/ AC1

2000VA/ AC1, 192W/ DC

10 A/ <3s

250 V AC1/ 24 V DC

500 mW high intensity of LED

3x10 7

0.7x10

5 min. 2s

-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)

-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)

4 kV (supply-output) any

DIN rail EN 60715

IP 40 from front panel

III.

2 max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5

max. 1x2.5

90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)

52 g (1.83 oz.) 83g (2.9 oz.)

EN 61810-1, EN 61010-1

VS308K

A1

12 14 22 24 32 34

VS316/230

AC 230 V/ 50-60 Hz

2.5 VA

3 x changeover/ 3PDT (AgSnO

2

)

16A/ AC1

4000VA/ AC1, 384W/ DC

30 A/ <3s

20 ms

90 g (3.17 oz.)

1x10 7

1x10 5

50 ms

92 g (3.25 oz.)

VS308U

A1

12 14 22 24 32 34

N

11

A2 A3

11

A2

VS316/24 VS316/230

A1 12 14 22 24 32 34 A1 12 14 22 24 32 34

11

A2 A3 11 21 31 A2 11 21 31

Notes:

Max. time of changeover of contact is 10ms.

VS316/24 or VS316/230 enables switching of diff erent phases or 3 phase voltage.

* possibility to choose blue, white and yellow color of LED for power relays line VS in case of minimal order quantity 100 pcs.

11 21 31

A2 11 21 31

32

A2

Power relays modular type VS

Description

VS116K, VS116U

A1 A3 A2

Red/čevená

Supply terminals

Indication LED

11 12 14

Output changeover contact terminal A3 only for VS116K

VS316/24, VS316/230

2nd output changeover contact

Supply terminals

21 22 24

A1 A2

Indication LED

VS308K, VS308U

A1 A3 A2

21 22 24

Red/piros

Supply terminals

2nd output changeover contact

Indication LED

11 12 14

31 32 34

1st output changeover contact

3rd output changeover contact terminal A3 only for VS308K

VS116B/230

EAN codes

VS116U /red

VS116U /green

VS116U /yellow

VS116U /white

VS116U /blue

VS116K /red

VS116K /green

VS116K /yellow

VS116K /white

VS116K /blue

8595188124607

8595188136433

8595188138499

8595188138482

8595188138475

8595188122597

8595188122610

8595188122580

8595188122573

8595188122603

VS116B/230 8595188147543

11 12 14

31 32 34

Output changeover contact

3rd output changeover contact

VS308U /red

VS308U /green

VS308U /yellow

VS308U /white

VS308U / blue

VS308K /red

VS308K /green

VS308K /yellow

VS308K /white

VS308K /blue

8595188130103

8595188136440

8595188138529

8595188138512

8595188138505

8595188122696

8595188122719

8595188122689

8595188122672

8595188122702

Neutral wire

Phase wire

VS316 /230 red

VS316 /230 green

VS316 /230 yellow

VS316 /230 white

VS316 /230 blue

VS316 /24 red

VS316 /24 green

VS316 /24 yellow

VS316 /24 white

VS316 /24 blue

8595188135559

8595188136075

8595188136082

8595188136051

8595188136068

8595188135771

8595188136105

8595188136129

8595188136099

8595188136112

Output indication

Output changeover contact

33

Power relays plug-in type 750L, 782L

34

!

Used for switching a higher power (load) than that of the switched element amplifier

!

For auxiliary lighting control, signalization, the relay interlockings, boilers, HDO, heaters

!

3x changeover contacts of 10A(AgNi) for 750L

!

4x changeover contacts of 6A(AgNi) for 782L

!

Recommended bases - ES-11A base for 750L, ES-15/4NA base for 782L

750L 782L

Technical parameters

Contacts

Number of switching contacts

Contact material:

Rated voltage:

Rated current: peak current

Switching capacity

Switching capacity

Switching capacity

Switching capacity

Minimum switching voltage / current:

Coil

Rated Voltage (DC):

Rated voltage (AC, 50-60Hz):

Rated power (AC / DC)

Tolerance of supply voltage:

Isolating data

Rated insulation voltage (AC):

Dielectric strength (AC) coil - contact: contact - contact:

Isolating resistance at 500 V DC:

Distance contact - coil air: surface:

General information

Mechanical life:

Electrical life (AC1):

Max. switching frequency at rated load:

Without load:

Pick-up time / returning contact:

Working temperature:

Storage temperature:

Protection:

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

750L 782L

3

AgNi

AC 250 V/440 V (50 - 60 Hz)

10 A

20 A

10A/250A

3A/120V/1.5A/240V

10 A / 24 V DC

0.22 A / 120V 0.1 A/250 V

5mA/5V

1.5W/DC

6, 12, 24, 48, 110 V

6, 12, 24, 120, 230 V

AC 2.8 VA (50Hz) /2.5 VA (60Hz)/ DC 1.5 W

-20 / +10 %

2500 V

2500 V

1500 V

10

7

Ω

≥ 3 mm

≥ 4.2 mm

≥ 2x10

7

≥ 2x10

5

10A/250V AC

1200 cycles / hrs

12000 cycles / hrs max. 12/10 ms

-40.. +55 °C (AC)

-40 .. +85 °C

IP40 from the front panel

35 x 35 x 54.4 mm

83 g

EN 60947-4-1, EN 60947-5-1

4

AgNi

AC 250 V/250 V (50 - 60 Hz)

6 A

12 A

6A/250A

1.5A/120V/0.75A/240V

6 A / 24 V DC

0.22 A / 120V 0.1 A/250 V

5mA/5V

1.5W/DC

6, 12, 24, 48, 110 V

6, 12, 24, 120, 230 V

AC 1.6 VA/ DC 0.9 W

-20 / +10 %

2500 V

2500 V

1500 V

10

7

Ω

≥ 1.6 mm

≥ 3.2 mm

1x10

7

≥ 10

5

6A/250V AC

1200 cycles / hrs

18000 cycles / hrs max. 10/8 ms

-40.. +55 °C

-40.. +85 °C

IP40 from the front panel

27.5 x 21.2 x 35.6 mm

35 g

EN 61810-1,

EN 60255-1-00, EN 61810-7

Coil data for 782L

1024

1048

1060

1080

DC voltage

1005

1006

1012

1110

1125

1220

5127

5220

5230

5240

5080

5110

5115

5120

Product Type

AC voltage

5006

5012

5024

5042

5048

5060

Coil data for 750L

1120

1012

1024

1220

1006

1048

1060

1110

Product Type

AC voltage

5006

5012

5024

5048

5060

5115

5120

5220

5230

5240

DC voltage

Voltage[V]

AC 6

AC 12

AC 24

AC 48

AC 60

AC 115

AC 120

AC 220

AC 230

AC 240

DC 6

DC 48

DC 60

DC 110

DC 120

DC 12

DC 24

DC 220

Voltage [V]

AC 115

AC 120

AC 127

AC 220

AC 230

AC 240

AC 6

AC 12

AC 24

AC 42

AC 48

AC 60

AC 80

AC 110

DC 5

DC 6

DC 12

DC 24

DC 48

DC 60

DC 80

DC 110

DC 125

DC 220

Resistance [Ω]

475

1 840

1 910

6 980

4.3

18.5

75

305

7 080

7 760

28

1 750

2 700

9 200

11 000

110

430

37 000

Resistance[Ω]

3 610

3 770

4 000

15 400

16 100

16 800

740

930

1 720

3 450

9.8

39.5

158

470

28

40

160

640

2 600

4 000

7 100

13 600

16 000

15 400

Power relays plug-in type 750L, 782L

Connection

The 750L connection The 782L connection

Socket ES-11A - for 750L

Max. Current: 10A

Weight: 60 g

Mounting on DIN rail

Designed for 3- relay contacts

ES-11A

Socket ES-15/4N - for 782L

Max. Current: 12A

Weight: 59 g

Mounting on DIN rail

Designed for 4- relay contacts

ES-15/4NA

Accessories to ES-11A - for 750L

Clip to relay 750L: 16-1351

EAN code

750L/110V DC

750L/120V AC

750L/12V AC

750L/12V DC

750L/230V AC

750L/24V AC

750L/24V DC

750L/48V DC

750L/6V AC

750L/6V DC

782L/110V DC

782L/120V AC

782L/12V AC

782L/12V DC

782L/230V AC

782L/24V AC

782L/24V DC

782L/48V AC

782L/48V DC

782L/6V AC

782L/6V DC

8595188129992

8595188130028

8595188130011

8595188129978

8595188119221

8595188119207

8595188125147

8595188129985

8595188130004

8595188129961

8595188129923

8595188129947

8595188119085

8595188119030

8595188119115

8595188119092

8595188119047

8595188129954

8595188129916

8595188129930

8595188129909

ES-15/4NA

ES-11A

ES8

Clip to relay 750L

Clip to relay 782L

8595188119245

8595188129879

8595188136167

8595188119283

8595188119276

Accessories to ES-15/4NA - for 782L

swivel label - TR1

The LED module, the protective diode and

R/C member can be assigned into the slot.

35

MODULAR

R, L

Dimmers

R, L, C

MODULAR

DIM-2

staircase switch with gradual dimming up/ down, level and time of illumination, all values are adjustable.

R = 10 -500 VA

L = 10 -250 VA

DIM-5

control by a button/ buttons ( connected in parallel), short pressing

ON/OFF, long pressing regulates brightness, memory storing.

R = 10 -500 VA

L = 10 -250 VA

MINI

DIM-14

as DIM-5 but dims all types of loads, in-built protection against temperature and current overload, electronic fuse.

R = 500 VA

L = 500 VA

C = 500 VA

DIM-15

designated for dimming of

1) LED lamps and LED lighting sources

2) dimmable energy saving fl uorescent lamps

R, L, C

LIC-1

intensity controller for maintaining the constant illumination level.

Dimmable energy saving fl uorescent lamps, LED lamps.

R,L,C, - resistive, inductive and capacitive loads

DIM-6

power dimming to 2kW.

Can be controlled by button, external potentiometer, 0-10

V (1-10 V) system iNELS.

R = 2000VA

L = 2000 VA

C = 2000VA

DIM6-3M-P

DIM6-3M-P is a power module expansion unit for

DIM-6. It cannot be operated independently.

R = 1000VA

L = 1000 VA

C = 1000VA

SMR-S

as DIM-5, but for mounting under a wall-switch into an installation box

KU-68 (or the similar),

3 wire connection (without neutral).

R = 10-300VA

L = 10-150 VA

SMR-U

as DIM-14, but for mounting under a wall-switch into an installation box

KU-68 (or the similar).

R = 1000VA

L = 1000 VA

C = 1000VA

Recommendation for mounting:

Recommendation for mounting modular dimmers: leave a gap of min. 0.5 module ( approx. 9 mm/ 0.4” ) on side of the device to ensure better cooling of the device.

Type of dimmed load

Output

Dimming principal

SMR-M

for mounting under a wallswitch into an installation box KU-68 (or similar).

Dimmable energy saving fl uorescent lamps, LED lamps.

36

DIM-2

DIM-5

DIM-14

DIM-15

1M-DIN

1M-DIN

1M-DIN

1M-DIN

DIM-6 6M-DIN

DIM-6-3MP 3M-DIN

SMR-S

SMR-U

SMR-M

LIC-1

BOX

BOX

BOX

1M-DIN

AC 230V

R L C ESL LED

# # x x

R L triac 10-500VA* 10-250VA

AC 230V

# # x

Rated load

AC 230V

AC 230V

AC 230V

AC 230V

AC 230V

AC 230V

AC 230V

AC 230V

# #

-

-

-

# #

#

#

# #

# #

-

# #

# x

-

#

# x

# x x

# x

-

#

#

#

C

-

# x triac 10-500VA* 10-250VA x

# x

2x

MOSFET

500 VA* 500 VA* 500 VA*

2x

MOSFET

4x

MOSFET

#

2 000 VA*

-

2 000 VA*

#

2 000 VA* x x

2x

MOSFET

1 000 VA* 1 000 VA* 1 000 VA*

triac

10-300VA* 10-150VA

#

# x

# x

# x

2x

MOSFET

500VA*

#

#

2x

MOSFET

2x

MOSFET

#

300 VA*

500VA*

-

500VA*

#

300 VA* 300 VA*

#

#

#

Note: * - with load over 300 VA is necessary to ensure suffi cient cooling

Expandatory:

R, L, C

Dimmer with designatedload:

R - RESISTIVE

L - INDUCTIVE

C - CAPACITIVE

ESL - energy saving fl uorescent lamps

LED - LED lamps bulbs, halogen lamps type of load

(symbols)

Demonstrated symbols are informative

R x x

# x

# x x

#

#

# staircase switch with gradual dim-up/dim-down, level and length of illumination, all values are adjustable control by button/buttons (connected in parallel), short pressing ON/OFF, long pressing regulated brightness, memory recording as DIM-5, but dims all types of load, inbuilt protections against thermo and current overload, electronic fuse

37

38

39 designated for dimming of:

1) LED bulbs and LED lighting sources

2) dimmable saving fl uorescent lamps for controlled dimming of lights up to 2kW, with a possibility of module extention up to 20kW (el.bulbs and hallogen lights, also with ballast type C or L)

42

40 is expanding power modul for controlled dimmer DIM-6 41 as DIM-5, but for mounting under a wall-switch, into a wiring box, 3 wire connection (without neutral) is expanding power modul for controlled diммer DIM-6 as DIM-14, but for mounting under a wall-switch, into an installation box designated for dimming of:

1) LED bulbs and LED lighting sources

2) dimmable saving fl uorescent lamps for maintaining the constant illumination level.

ESL dimmable compact fluorescent lamps, LED lamps,

R,L,C, - resistive, inductive and capacitive loads

44

44

42

45 low-voltage el.bulbs 12/24V

WIth wound transformers

low-voltage el.bulbs 12/24V

WIth electronic transformers

ESL dimmable compact fl uorescent lamps

L C ESL

LED lamps

LED

Staircase switch with dimming DIM-2

EAN code

DIM-2 /230V: 8595188112475

DIM-2-1h /230V: 8595188135740

Technical parameters:

Supply terminals:

Voltage range:

Burden:

Supply voltage tolerance:

Supply indication:

Time setting by:

Time deviation:

Repeat accuracy:

Temperature coeffi cient:

Recovery time:

Controlling T1 (button)

Terminals:

Voltage:

Power on control input:

Impulse length:

Glow-lamps:

Max. amount of glow lamps connected to controlling input:

Controlling T2 (switch)

Terminals:

Voltage:

Power on control input:

Impulse length:

Output

Current rating:

Resistance load:

Inductive load:

Other information

Operating temperature:

Storage temperature:

Operating position:

Mounting/DIN rail:

Protection degree:

Overvoltage cathegory:

Pollution degree:

Max. cable size (mm 2 ):

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

DIM-2

A1 - A2

AC 230 V / 50 Hz max. 5 VA

-15 %; +10 % green LED potentiometers

10 % - mechanical setting

5 % - set value stability

0.01 % /°C, at = 20°C max.80ms

!

!

Designated for dimming el. bulbs, halogen lights and halogen lights with winding transformers

Intelligent control of halogen lights, function of gradual switching on and dimming

!

!

Controlling inputs for push button and switch

Values are set by potentiometers on front panel of the product, adjustable:

- maximum dim-up

- speed (fl uency) of dim-up

- speed (fl uency) of dim-down

- time for which a light is on with maximum dim-up

!

!

All time intervals can be adapted according to a request

Output without contact: 1x triac

!

!

Load AC 5b (el. bulbs) 500 W

Clamp terminals

!

!

Parallel connection of controlling pushbuttons is possible

Protection against over-temperature inside the product - switches output off + signalizes overheating by LED fl ashing

!

!

Note: possibility of start and fi nish adjustment up on 1 hour, device has description DIM-2 1h

1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting

Symbol Connection

T1

T2

A1

A2

L

A1 V

T2

T 2.5 A recomended fuse

A2 T1

R, L

T1 - A1

AC 230 V max. 1.5 VA min.100 ms /max. unlimited

Yes

230V - max. amount 50 pcs

(Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC)

Description

Supply terminal A1

N

A1 V

T2

Output

Controlling input for switch

T2 - A1

AC 230 V

0.1 VA min.100 ms /max. unlimited

Supply indication

- brightness setting

Output indication t1 - dim-up time settting

2 A

10 - 500 VA

10 - 250 VA t3 - dim-down time setting t2 - time delay setting

-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)

-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) any

DIN rail EN 60715

IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals

III.

2 solid wire max.2x 2.5 or 1x4/ with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5 (AWG 12)

90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)

65 g (2.3 oz.)

EN 60669-2-1, EN 61010-1

Supply terminal A2

A2 T1

Controlling input for push button

Recommendation for mounting: leave a gap of min. 0.5 module (approx. 9 mm) on side of the device to ensure better cooling of the device.

Function

Legend:

Brightness: 10-100% t1 Dim-up time: 1-40 s t2 Time delay: 0s-20min t3 Dim-down time: 1-40s

Controlled via input T1(button) t1 t2 t3

Dim-up delay-down is started by a button. Cycle extensionanother button pressing (during cycle).

Controlled via input T2 (switch) t1 t2 t3

The switch starts the cycle and it stops on max.set brightness.

After the switch is off , the cycle will continue until completed.

T1

T2

37

Controlled dimmer DIM-5

EAN code

DIM-5 /230V: 8595188115612

Technical parameters

Supply terminals:

Voltage range:

Burden:

Supply voltage tolerance:

Supply indication:

Controlling

Control terminals:

Control voltage:

Power control input:

Impulse length:

Glow-lamps:

Max. amount of glow lamps connected to controlling input:

Output

Current rating:

Resistance load:

Inductive load:

Output indication:

Other information

Operating temperature:

Storage temperature:

Operating position

Mounting/DIN rail:

Protection degree:

Overvoltage cathegory:

Pollution degree:

Max. cable size (mm 2 ):

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

Function

Supply

A1-A2

Output

Brightness

Controlling contact

LED

T

<0.5s

<0.5s

>0.5s

DIM-5

A1 - A2

AC 230 V / 50 Hz max. 5 VA

-15 %; +10 % green LED

T - A1

AC 230 V max. 1.5 VA min. 80 ms / max. unlimited

Yes

230V - max. amount 50 pcs

(Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC)

2 A

10 - 500 VA

10 - 250 VA red LED

-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)

-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) any

DIN rail EN 60715

IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals

III.

2 solid wire max. 2x2.5 or 1x4 (AWG 12) with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5 (AWG 12)

90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)

58 g (2 oz.)

EN 60669-2-1, EN 61010-1

!

Designated for dimming el. bulbs, halogen lights and halogen lights with winding transformers

!

For switching and dimming lights in corridors, stairways... control input for push-buttons (parallel connection possible)

!

Short press turns light on/off , longer press (> 0.5 s) provides dim up / dim down

!

When switched off , brightness level is stored in a memory and when On again it restores last brightness level

!

Voltage range: AC 230 V

!

Contactless output, triac 2A/ 500 VA

!

LED output indication (with any level of brightness)

!

Possibility to connect control buttons in parallel

!

1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting

!

Clamp terminals

!

Protection against over-heating inside the product - switches output off + signalizes overheating by LED fl ashing

Symbol Connection

L

A1

T

A2

Description

Supply terminal A1

Supply indication

A1 V 

N

A1 V 

A2 T

T 2.5 A recomended fuse

R, L

Output

Output indication

<0.5s

>0.5s

<0.5s

Supply terminal A2

A2 T

Controlling input for push button

Recommendation for mounting: leave a gap of min. 0.5 module ( approx. 9 mm/ 0.4”) on side of the device to ensure better cooling of the device.

38

Controlled dimmer DIM-14

EAN code

DIM-14 /230V: 8595188135955

Technical parameters

Supply terminals:

Voltage range:

Burden:

Supply voltage tolerance:

Dissipated power:

Indication output:

Controlling

Control terminals:

Control voltage:

Power control input:

Impulse length:

Glow-lamps:

Max. amount of glow lamps connected to controlling input:

Output

Contactless:

Current rating:

Resistance load:

Inductive load:

Capacitive load:

Output state indication:

Other information

Operating temperature:

Storage temperature:

Operating position:

Mounting/DIN rail:

Protection degree:

Overvoltage cathegory:

Pollution degree:

Max. cable size (mm 2 ):

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

Function

Supply A1-A2

Output

Brightness

Controlling input T

<0.5s <0.5s

>0.5s

DIM-14

A1-A2

AC 230 V / 50 Hz

1.3 W

-15 %; +10 %

6 VA green LED

A1- T

AC 230 V

AC 0.3-0.6 VA min. 80 ms / max. unlimited

Yes

230V - max. amount 20 pcs

(Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC)

2 x MOSFET

2 A

500 VA*

500 VA*

500 VA* red LED

-20 °C to +35 °C (-4 °F to 95 °F)

-20 °C to +60 °C (-4 °F to 140 °F) any

DIN rail EN 60715

IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals

III.

2 solid wire max. 2x2.5 or 1x4 (AWG 12) with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5 (AWG 12)

90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)

58 g (2 oz.)

EN 60669-2-1, EN 61010-1

>0.5s

<0.5s

!

Designed for dimming of incandescent bulbs and halogen lights with wound or electronic transformer

!

For switching and dimming of lights, control inputs for a button

!

Short impulse switches ON/OFF, longer impulse (>0.5s) enables gradual light intensity setting

!

Last intensity level is stored in memory when switched off

!

Voltage range: AC 230 V

!

Output without contacts: 2x MOSFET

!

LED output indicator with any level of brightness possibility of parallel connection of control buttons

!

Resistive, inductive or capacitive load, up to 300 W, for a short term up to 500 W

!

1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting

!

Electronic overvoltage protection

!

Protection against over-heating inside the device - output off

Symbol

Description

A1

T A2

Supply indication

Supply terminal A2

Connection

L

N

A2 T

A1 V 

DIM - 14

A1 V 

A2 T

DIM-14

T 2.5 A recomended front-end protection

R, L, C

Supply terminal A1

Output

Output indication

Button output

* When load is above 300 VA it is necessary to ensure suffi cient cooling.

Recommendation for mounting: leave a gap of min. 0.5 module ( approx. 9 mm/ 0.4”) on side of the device to ensure better cooling of the device.

Warning for DIM-14: it is not allowed to connect together loads of inductive and capacitive type in the same time.

39

Controlled dimmer DIM-6

2

2

2

2

!

Designed for RLC dimming lights, also available for appliance switching

!

DIM-6 can be controlled by: button (parallel button connection), external potentiometer, analog signal 0-10 V

(1-10 V), iNELS system bus

!

Actuator manages output 230 V AC, controlled by 1 semi-conductor. Maximum output power is 2000 VA

!

Power range can be increased up to 10 000 VA by module DIM6-3M-P

!

Electronic overcurrent protection, overvoltage and short-circuit protection

!

Protection against over-heating inside device - switch off output+signalize overheat by fl ashing red LED

EAN code

DIM-6 /230V: 8595188136914

Technical parameters DIM-6

!

6-MODULE version, DIN rail mounting

Supply terminals:

Supply voltageí:

Input:

Tolerance of Voltage range:

Max. output power:

Dissipated power:

Module extendable:

Galvanic separation of bus and power output:

Isul. volt. between outputs and inner circuits:

Control - button type

Control voltage:

Control terminals:

Power of control input:

Length of control impulse:

Recovery time:

Connection of glow lamps:

Control 0(1)-10V:

Control terminals:

Control voltage:

Min. current of control input:

CIB control:

Control terminals:

Bus voltage:

Current of control input:

Indication of data transmission:

Output

Contactless:

Current rating:

Resistive load:

Inductive load:

Capacitive load:

Indication of output state:

Other information

Operating temperature:

Storing temperature:

Operating position:

Mounting:

Protection degree:

Purpose of control device:

Construction of control device:

Char. of automatic operation:

Heat and fi re resistance cat.:

Anti-stroke category (immunity):

Rated impulse voltage:

Overvoltage category:

Pollution level:

Profi le of connecting wires :

- output part:

- control part:

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

L, N

AC 230 V / 50 Hz

10 VA

-15 %; +10 % max. 2 000 VA

2.5 % from load

to 10 000 VA

yes

3.75kV, SELV according to EN 60950

AC 12-240V

S - S, galvanically separated

AC 0.53VA (AC 230V), AC 0.025-0.2VA (AC 12-240V) min. 25ms / max. unlimited max. 150ms

NO (AC 230V); NO (AC 12-240V)

0(1)-10V, GND

0-10V or 1-10V

1mA

CIB+, CIB-

27V DC

5mA

yellow LED

4 x MOSFET

10 A

2 000 VA*

2 000 VA*

2 000 VA* yellow LED, according to load type

-20 °C to +35 °C (-4 °F to 95 °F)

-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) vertical

DIN rail EN 60715

IP 40 from front panel

operative control device

individual control device

1.B.E

FR-0

class 2

2.5 kV

III.

2 max.1x2.5, max2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x1.5 (AWG 12) max.1x2.5, max2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12)

90 x 105 x 65 mm (3.5˝ x 4.1˝ x 2.6˝)

410 g (14.5 oz.)

EN 60669-2-1, EN 61010. EN 55014

Device description

14

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Symbol

(x)

N

Types of indication LED

V

(x) - according to control type setting

- Yellow-indicates confi guration of load RL

- Yellow-indicates confi guration of load RC

- Green-button control mode selected

- Green - 0-10 V signal control mode selected

- Green – 1-10 V signal control mode selected

- Green – CIB conductor bar-INELS control mode selected

- Yellow – indicates CIB conductor bar data transfer comunication

- Red – indicates overload, fl ashing LED signalizes over-heating inside the device, shinnig LED

signalizes current overload

1

Terminals for CIB bus connection

2

Load type indication

3

Control type indication

4

CIB data transfer indication

5

Overload indication

L

R,L,C

6

Terminals for connecting control button

7

Terminals of neutral wire

8

9

Terminal for phase conductor connection

13

Terminals for control by signal

0(1)-10V, or by potentiometer

Output terminals

14

Terminal for regulation load of wire jumper

10

Button for output control

11

Button for output control

12

Terminal for additional modul conductor bar

* Warning : it is not allowed to connect inductive and capacitive loads at the same time.

13

12

11

10

9

8

40

Expanding power module DIM6-3M-P

EAN code

DIM-6-3M-P: 8595188139106

Technical parameters

Load

Dissipated power:

Output

Contactless:

Current rating:

Resistive load:

Inductive load:

Load capacity:

Other information

Operating temperature:

Storing temperature:

Operating position:

Mounting:

Protection degree:

Controlling device purpose:

Controlling device construction:

Automatic operating char.:

Heat and fi re resistance category:

Imunity category:

Rated impuls voltage:

Overvoltage category:

Pollution level:

Profi le of connecting wires (mm

2

)

- output part:

- control part:

Size:

Weight:

Standards:

Connection

!

Expanding power module only for use in combination with DIM-6

!

DIM6-3M-P provides power increasement (of about 1000VA) of load connected to DIM-6

(it means: 2 000VA (DIM-6) + 1 000VA (DIM6-3M-P) = 3 000VA)

!

DIM-6 can be connected with up to 8 DIM6-3M-P to expand power up to 10 000 VA

!

Attention-device has to be protected by circuit breaker accordant to the load connected to device

!

DIM-6 in installation is cooled by natural air fl ow. If the natural air fl ow access is reduced, cooling has to be provided by ventilator. Rated operating temperature is 35°C/ 95 °F

!

If there are several DIM6-3M-P connected to DIM-6, the distance between them has to be min. 2 cm/ 0.8”

!

Max. lenght of bus EB is 1 m/ 39.4” and the connection has to be realized by schielded cable

Device description DIM6-3M-P

max. 1 000VA

2.5 % from load Terminal for additional modul conductor bar

2 x MOSFET

5 A

1 000 VA*

1 000 VA*

1 000 VA*

-20 °C to +35 °C (-4 °F to 95 °F)

-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) vertical

DIN rail EN 60715

IP 40 from front panel operating control device additional control device

1.B.E

FR-0 class 2

2.5 kV

III.

2 max.1x2.5, max2x1.5 / with sleeve max. 1x1.5 (AWG 12) max.1x2.5, max2x1.5 /with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12)

90 x 52 x 65 mm (3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝)

134 g (4.7 oz.)

EN 60669-2-1, EN 61010. EN 55014

Phase connection term

EB1 EB2 EB3 EB4 EB5

L L L V  V 

V

Output terminals

*Warning: it is not allowed to connect loads of inductive and capacitive character at the same time

CIB+

CIB -

0(1)-10V

50k

L

N

F max.15A*

2

2

2

2

R, L, C

*Potencial L on device terminal, has to be protected by circuit breaker accordant to the load connected to device.

41

Dimmer for LED bulbs and dimmable fl uorescent lamps DIM-15 and SMR-M

!

!

!

!

!

!

!

!

Designated for dimming of: a) LED bulbs and LED light sources

b) dimmable saving fl uorescent lamps

Enables gradual setting of luminance by push-button (non-detent) or parallel buttons

Returns to last state upon re-energization

Type of light source (LED or saving fl uorescent lamp) is set by switch-over on the front panel of device

Minimal luminance, set by potentiometer on the front panel, eliminates fl ashing of some types of saving fl uorescent lamps

DIM-15

Supply voltage 230V AC

Output status is indicated by red LED:

- shines when output is active

-fl ashes while heating overload, at the same time output is disconnected

1-MODULE version, DIN rail mounting, saddle terminals

SMR-M

!

!

button-controlled dimmer intended to be installed in an installation box (e.g. KU-68) into the existing electrical wiring protection against excessive temperature inside the device - switches off the output

DIM-15

EAN code

DIM-15/230V: 8595188140690

SMR-M: 8595188143776

Technical parameters

Supply terminals:

Voltage range:

Operating range:

Apparent power:

Loss power:

Dissipated power:

Supply indication:

Control

Control terminals:

Control wire:

Control voltage:

Control input power:

Control impulse lenght:

Glow tubes connection:

Max. amount of glow lamps connected to controlling input:

Output

Contactless:

Load:*

Output status indication:

Other information

Operating temperature:

Storing temperature:

Operating position:

Mounting:

Protection degree:

Overvoltage category:

Pollution level:

Terminal wire capacity:

Connection:

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

SMR-M

DIM-15 SMR-M

A1-A2 x

x 4-wire, with neutral

AC 230 V / 50 Hz

-15 %; +10 % max. 1.5VA

max. 0.7W

green LED

Symbol

DIM-15

(SMR-M)

A1 (L)

T(S) A2(N)

Light source type setting

dimmable saving fl uorescent lamps LED bulbs

A1 - T x

x L - S

AC 230 V

AC 0.3-0.6 VA min. 80 ms / unlimited

Yes

230V - max. amount 15 pcs 230V - max. amount 10 pcs

(Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC)

(Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC)

DIM-15

L

A1 V 

L

N

SMR-M

T 2.5 A recomended fuse

2 x MOSFET

300 W (at cos φ =1) 160 W (at cos φ =1)

red LED x

T 1.6 A recomended fuse

V L N S

A2 T

-20 °C to +35 °C (-4 °F to 95 °F)

-20 °C to +60 °C (-4 °F to 140 °F) any

DIN rail EN 60715 free at connecting wires

IP 40 from front panel / IP30 in standard

IP 10 clips conditions

III.

2

max. 2x2.5, with sleeve max. 1x2.5,

max. 2x1.5 (AWG 12) x

solid w. CY, Ø 0.75 mm 2 (AWG 18),

x lenght 90mm (3.5˝)

90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝) 49 x 49 x 21 mm (1.9˝x 1.9˝x 0.8˝)

57 g (1.98 oz.) 38 g (1.3 oz.)

EN 60669-2-1, EN 61010-1

N

Functions and controlling

Supplying Un

V min

V min

T max max

>0.5s

<0.5s

Controlling:

!

short button press (<0.5s)

turns the light off or on

!

long press (>0.5s) enables

slight regulation of light intensity

!

setting of minimal luminance

is possible only during

decreasing of luminance by long

button press

Minimal luminance setting:

„LED bulb“ :

!

if the light is turned off, short press (<0.5s) switches the light onto last set luminance level

* Due to a large number of light source types, the maximum load depends on the internal construction of dimmable LEDs and ESL bulbs and their power factor cos φ.

The power factor of dimmable LEDs and ESL bulbs ranges from cos φ = 0.95 to 0.4.

An approximate value of maximum load may be obtained by multiplying the load capacity of the dimmer by the power factor of the connected light source.

„Energy saving lamp“ :

!

when light is off, short impulse turns lamp on and then luminance is decreased to set level

!

setting of minimal luminance by saving fluorescent lamps serves for harmonizing of lowest light

intensity prior its unprompted switching off

42

Dimmer for LED bulbs and dimmable fl uorescent lamps DIM-15 and SMR-M

Device describtion

Supply voltage L

Supply voltage indication

Light source type selection

A1 V 

DIM - 15

Output

Output indication

Minimal luminance setting

Supply voltage N

A2 T

Controlling input

Minimal luminance setting

Supply voltage indication

Switch (button)

Neutral

Connection example

N

L

Light source type selection

Output to an appliance

Phase

Additional information

!

it is possible to dim only LED bulbs equipped with capacitator supplying

!

it is not possible to dim saving fl uorescent lamps without marking: dimmable

!

an incorrect setting of light source has eff ect only on dimming range, it means neither dimmer or

load get demaged

!

maximal load is counting with usage of LC fi lter

!

actual list of tested light sources is constantly refreshing, further information on www.elkoep.com/products/

43

Controlled dimmer SMR-S, SMR-U

!

Button-controlled dimmers designated for fl ush mounting into a wiring box, into an existing electroinstallation

!

(SMR-S doesn´t need neutral for correct function)

Used to control lamp brightness, dimming, possible to control from more places (parallel connections)

!

!

Protection against temperature overrun inside the device – output off

By changing wall-switch for a switch with SMR-S/SMR-U installed below you can reach eff ective brightness control

!

!

!

SMR-S enables dimming of electric bulbs 12 V, halogen lights with wound transformers (inductive load)

SMR-U enables also dimming 12 V halogen lights with electronic transformers (capacitive load)

It can not be used for dimming of fl uorescent lamps and energy saving lamps

EAN code

SMR-S /230V: 8595188123518

SMR-U /230V: 8595188130738

Technical parameters

SMR-S

!

SMR-S - 3-wire connection, functional without neutral

- max. load: 300 VA (el. bulbs or halogen lights with wound transformer)

- contactless output -1x triac

- with exchangeable fuse

!

SMR-U - 4-wire connection

- max. load: 500 VA (el. bulbs or halogen lights with electronic or wound transformer)

- contactless output - 2 xMOSFET

- electronic over-heating protection - output off in case of short-circuit or overload

SMR-U

Connection SMR-S, SMR-U

Connection:

Voltage range:

Power input (no operation/make):

Supply voltage tolerance:

Output

Resistive load:

Inductive load:

Capacitive load:

Control

Control voltage:

Current:

Impulse lenght:

Glow tubes connection:

Max. amount of glow lamps connected to controlling input:

Other information

Operating temperature:

Operating position:

Mounting:

Protection degree:

Overvoltage cathegory:

Pollution degree:

Fuse:

Connection:

Glow lamps in a button:

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

3-wire con., without neutral 4-wire con., with neutral

10 - 300 VA

10 - 150 VA x

230 V AC / 50Hz max. 3 VA

-15 %; +10 %

0 °C to +50 °C (32 °F to 122 °F) any free at connecting wires

IP 30 in standard conditions

III.

2

F 1.6A / 250V x solid wires 0.75 mm 2 (AWG 18), lenght: 90 mm (3.5” ) max. number 10

49 x 49 x 13 mm (1.9” x 1.9” x 0.5”)

32 g (1.1 oz.) 32 g (1.1 oz.)

EN 61010-1, EN 60669-2-1

500 VA*

500 VA*

500 VA*

AC 230 V max. 3 mA min. 50 ms / max. unlimited

Yes

230V - max. amount 50 pcs 230V - max. amount 10 pcs

(Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC) (Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC)

Note:

* - with load over 300 VA is necessary to ensure suffi cient cooling.

N

L

V L S

SMR-S

Typical connection of SMR-S

- dimmer of lights

R, L

S N

Typical connection of SMR-U

- dimmer of lights

Warning: it cannot be used for fl uorescent lights and energy saving lights!

V

L

SMR-

U

R, L, C

SMR-U: It is not allowed to connect together loads of inductive and capacitive type in the same time.

Function SMR-S, SMR-U

Supply

Output

Brightness

Description of SMR-S

Indication Exchangeable fuse Controlling contact

<0.5s <0.5s

>0.5s

>0.5s

<0.5s

Short press (<0.5s) turns a light on, another short press turns it off . A longer press (>0.5s) causes a gradual regulation of light intensity min-max-min round until the button is released. After releasing a set intensity is kept in memory, further short presses turn the light on/off keeping the set intensity.

The intensity can be changed by further long press. After de-energising the relay remembers the set value.

Button control input

Output

Phase

44

Lighting intensity controller LIC-1

EAN code

LIC-1 8595188144933

SKS photosensor: 8594030337288

Technical parameters

Supply voltage tolerance:

Supply voltage:

Supply voltage tolerance:

Apparent/loss power input:

Power supply indication:

Control

Button - control terminals:

Control voltage:

Control input power:

Duration of control pulse:

Glow tubes connection (terminals L-T):

Max. amount of glow lamps connected to controlling input:

Blocking input - terminals:

Control voltage:

Input power:

Glow tubes connection (terminals L-B):

Duration of control pulse:

Output:

Output status indication:

Load capacity:*

Other information

Operating temperature:

Storage temperature:

Operating position:

Mounting:

Ingress protection:

Overvoltage category:

Contamination degree:

Connecting conductor cross-section (mm

2

):

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

Mounting of SKS photosensor on the wall

Mounting of SKS photosensor into the panel

!

Automatically regulates the intensity of light in a room

!

External sensor scans the intensity and based on the preset value it decreases or increases the brightness of light

!

Designed for dimming the LED lights, ESL - dimmable energy saving lamps, R - inductive, L - resistive and C - capacitive load

!

Operating status:

1 - Off

2 - Automatic regulation

3 - Cleaning (maximum level of illumination)

4 - Setting the minimum lighting brightness

5 -Setting the desired level of illumination

!

Optional connection of buttons with 50 neon lamps

!

Blocking the automatic control via external signal, power supply 230V AC

!

1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting, clamping terminals

LIC-1 Connection Symbol

L-N

AC 230 V / 50-60 Hz

±15 % max. 1.6VA / 0.8W

green LED

L - T

AC 230 V max. 0.6 VA min. 80 ms / max. unlimited

Yes

230V - max. amount 50 pcs

(Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC)

L - B

AC 230V max. 0.1VA

No min. 80 ms / max. unlimited

2x MOSFET red LED

300 W (at cos φ =1)

L

N

Description

Supply voltage L

L V 

B

Blocking input

Supply voltage indication

Selection of light source type

IN IN

N T

Sensor SKS

L V 

B

T 2.5 A recomended front-end protection glow-lamp

IN

IN

B L

T N

Output

Output indication

-20 °C to +35 °C (-4 °F to 95 °F)

-20 °C to +60 °C (-4 °F to 140 °F) any

DIN rail EN 60715

IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals

III.

2

solid wire max. 2x2.5 or 1x4 (AWG 12) with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5 (AWG 12)

90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)

57 g (1.98 oz.)

EN 60669-2-1, EN 61010-1

IN IN

Lighting-up speed setting*

Dimming speed setting*

Terminals for the connection of the SKS sensor

* Due to a large number of light source types, the maximum load depends on the internal construction of dimmable LEDs and ESL bulbs and their power factor cos φ.

The power factor of dimmable LEDs and ESL bulbs ranges from cos φ = 0.95 to 0.4.

An approximate value of maximum load may be obtained by multiplying the load capacity of the dimmer by the power factor of the connected light source.

Supply voltage N

N T

Control input

*by automatic regulation

Function

Control (external button):

!

Pressing the button shortly (<0.5 s ) - always switches the light off

!

Medium-long press (0.5 - 3s) - automatic control

!

Long press (> 3s) - cleaning

!

3 x short presses from "off" - setting the desired level of illumination

!

5 x short presses from „off“ - setting the minimum brightness

In mode 4 and 5, the lamp brightness changes periodically from minimum to maximum. At a required level of brightness, the value is stored into memory by pressing the button shortly.

Selection of light source type

energy saving lights halogen lamp with electronic transformer

LED lamp, 230 V 230 V bulb halogen lamp with ferromagnetic transformer

45

Voltage

12V

Power supplies

Stabilized

DC- switching

PSB-10-12

IN: AC 100-250 V

OUT: DC 12V stabil

LOAD: 0.84 A / 10 W

- galvanically separated

- electronic fuse

- thermo protection

-MINI, into an installation box (such as KU-68).

PS-10-12

IN: AC 230 V

OUT: DC 12 V stabil

LOAD: 0.84 A / 10 W

- galvanically separated

- fusion safety

- electronic fuse

- thermo protection

- 1 MODULE.

PS-30-12

IN: AC 230 V

OUT: DC 12 V stabil

LOAD: 2.5A / 30 W

- galvanically separated

- electronic fuse

- thermo protection

- 3 MODULE.

DR-60-12

IN: AC 100-240 V

OUT: DC 12 V stabil

LOAD: 4.5A / 54 W

- galvanically separated

- electronic fuse

- range of incoming voltage

- 4.5 MODULE .

PS-100-12

IN: AC 230 V

OUT: DC 12 V stabil

LOAD: 8,4A / 100 W

- galvanically separated

- fusion safety

- electronic fuse

- thermo protection

- 6 MODULE.

Stabilized

DC- linear

Nonstabilized

AC+DC

ZNP-10-12V

IN: AC 230V

OUT: AC/DC 12V nostabil

LOAD: 0.4A / 10VA

- galvanically separated

- fuse

- 3 MODULE.

24V

PSB-10-24

IN: AC 100-250 V

OUT: DC 24 V stabil

LOAD: 0.42A / 10W

- galvanically separated

- electronic fuse

- thermo protection

-MINI, into an installation box (such as KU-68).

PS-10-24

IN: AC 230 V

OUT: DC 24 V stabil

LOAD: 0.42A / 10W

- electronic fuse

- thermo protection

- 1 MODULE.

PS-30-24

IN: AC 230 V

OUT: DC 24 V stabil

LOAD: 1.25A / 30W

- galvanically separated

- electronic fuse

- thermo protection

- 3 MODULE.

DR-60-24

IN: AC 100-240 V

OUT: DC 24 V stabil

LOAD: 2.5A / 60W

- galvanically separated

- electronic fuse

- 4.5 MODULE .

PS-100-24

IN: AC 230 V

OUT: DC 12 V stabil

LOAD: 4,2A / 100 W

- fusion safety

- electronic fuse

- thermo protection

- 6 MODULE.

ZNP-10-24V

IN: AC 230V

OUT: AC/DC 24V nostabil

LOAD: 0.4A / 10VA

- galvanically separated

- fuse

- 3 MODULE.

Regulated

PS-30-R

IN: AC 230 V

OUT: DC 12-24 V regul., stab.

LOAD: 2.5-1.25A / 30W

- galvanically separated

- electronic fuse

- thermo protection

- 3 MODULE.

ZSR-30

IN: AC 230V

OUT: DC 5-24 V reg., stab.

OUT: AC 24V, DC24V

LOAD: 1.6-0.3A/10VA

- range of incoming voltage

-current restrictor

- electronic fuse

- 3 MODULE.

Nonstabilized AC

Bell transformer

ZTR-8-8

output voltage 8 V.

Power: 8W.

ZTR-8

-

12

output voltage12 V.

Power: 8W.

ZTR-15-12

output voltage 4-8-12 V.

Power: 4V5V - 8V 10V- 12V 15V.

46

Power supplies

Output

Protection against overload

ZNP-10-12

ZNP-10-24

ZSR-30

PSB-10-12

3M-DIN

3M-DIN

3M-DIN

AC 230 V,

-15/+10%

AC 230 V,

-15/+10%

AC 230 V,

-15/+10%

#

#

#

MINI-BOX AC 100-250V

#

#

# #

AC 12V

DC 12 V

AC 24V

DC 24V

DC 5-24V

AC 24 V

0.8 A

0.4 A

1.6 A- 0.3 A

#

#

DC 12 V

0.84 A

PSB-10-24

PS-10-12

PS-10-24

PS-30-12

PS-30-24

PS-30-R

PS-100-12

PS-100-24

DR-60-12

DR-60-24

ZTR-8-8

ZTR-8-12

ZTR-15-12

MINI-BOX AC 100-250V

# #

DC 24V

0.42 A

1M-DIN

1M-DIN

3M-DIN

3M-DIN

3M-DIN

6M-DIN

6M-DIN

4.5M-DIN

4.5M-DIN

2M-DIN

2M-DIN

3M-DIN

AC 230 V,

-20/+10%

AC 230 V,

-20/+10%

AC 230 V,

-20/+10%

AC 230 V,

-20/+10%

AC 230 V,

-15/+10%

AC 230 V,

-20/+10%

AC 230 V,

-20/+10%

AC 100-240V

DC 124-370 V

AC 100-240V

DC 124-370 V

AC 230 V,

-15/+10%

AC 230 V,

-15/+10%

AC 230 V,

+/- 10%

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

DC 12 V

DC 24V

DC 12 V

DC 24V

DC 12 V

DC 24V

DC 12 V

DC 24V

8 V

12 V

4-8-12 V

0.84 A

0.42 A

2.5 A

1.25 A

#

DC 12-24 V

2.5 A-1.25 A

8.4A

4.2 A

4.5 A

2.5 A

1A

0.66A

2-1.5-1A

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

-

-

-

-

-

S

S

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

DC and AC nonstabilized, output voltage 12 V – where it is not required or where there is stabilized diff erently/later

DC and AC nonstabilized output voltage 24 V – where it is not required or is stabilized later regulated output voltage in a wide range DC 5-24 V: possibility to adjust output voltage with load according to request stabilized switching power supply with fi xed output voltage 12 V / 10 W, box

51

51

51

48-49 stabilized switching power supply with fi xed output voltage 24 V / 10 W, box

48-49 stabilized switching power supply with fi xed output voltage 12 V / 10 W,

1 module stabilized switching power supply with fi xed output voltage 24 V / 10 W,

1 module stabilized switching power supply with fi xed output voltage 12 V / 30 W,

3 module stabilized switching power supply with fi xed output voltage 24 V / 30 W,

3 module stabilized switching power supply with fi xed output voltage 12-24 V / 30 W,

3 module stabilized switching power supply with fi xed output voltage 12 V / 100 W,

6 module stabilized switching power supply with fi xed output voltage 24V / 100W,

6 module

48-49

48-49

48-49

48-49

48-49

48-49

48-49 effi cient switching power supply of DC voltage 12V / 54 W, wide range of input voltage (AC 100-240 and DC 124-370V) effi cient switching power supply of DC voltage 24V / 60 W, wide range of input voltage (AC 100-240 and DC 124-370V)

50

50

#

52

# bell transformer (short-circuit-proof) for supplying of bells, door openers, home call-boxes

#

52

52

47

Power supplies PS

PS-10-24

EAN code

PSB-10-12

PSB-10-24

8595188145022

8595188143783

PSB-10-24

PS-30-12V

PS-30-24V

PS-30-R

PS-100-12V

PS-100-24V

8595188137966

8595188139045

8595188136655

8595188137195

8595188139021

PS-10-12V

PS-10-24V

8595188139052

8595188139069

Technical parameters:

Input

Voltage range:

Burden without load (max):

Burden with full load (max):

Protection:

Output

Output voltage DC / max. current:

PSB-10-12 PSB-10-24

AC 110 - 250V / 50-60Hz

3VA / 0.5W

26VA / 13W x

PS-10-12 PS-10-24

AC 184 - 253V/50-60Hz

5VA / 2W

25VA / 13W fuse T1A

12V/0.84A 24V/0.42A

!

!

!

!

!

!

!

PSB-10: switching stabilized power supplies with fi xed output voltage, for mounting into an installation box (such as KU-68)

PSB-10-12 - stabilized power supply 12V/10W

PSB-10-24 - stabilized power supply 24V/10W

PS-10: switching stabilized power supplies with fi xed output voltage, version 1-module

PS-10-12 - stabilized power supply 12 V/10 W

PS-10-24 - stabilized power supply 24 V/10 W

PS-30: switching stabilized power supplies, version 3-module

PS-30-12 - stabilized power supply with fi xed output voltage 12 V/30 W

PS-30-24 - stabilized power supply with fi xed output voltage 24 V/30 W

PS-30-R – stabilized regulated power supply 12-24 V/30 W

PS-100: stabilized power supply with fi xed output voltage, version 6-module

PS-100-12 - stabilized power supply 12 V/100 W

PS-100-24 - stabilized power supply 24 V/100 W

Output current is limited by electronic fuse, in case maximal current is exceeded, the device switches off and after a shot time interval it again switches on.

Indication of output voltage by green LED on front panel (except PSB-10)

Temperature protection – if temperature is exceeded, the device switches off and after cooled down, it switches on again

12.2V/0.84A 24.2V/0.42A

PS-30-12

PS-30-24 PS-30-R

AC 100-250V / 50 - 60Hz

9VA / 1W 10VA/1,5W

70VA / 37W

fuse T2A

4VA / 1,7W

70VA / 37W

PS-100-12 PS-100-24

AC 184-253V/50-60Hz

6VA / 2W

195VA / 118W fuse T 3.15A

12.2V/2.5A

24.2V/1.25A

12.2V/8.4A

24.2V/4.2A

Tolerance of output voltage:

Output indication:

Wave of off -load output voltage:

12.2V/2.5A 24.2V/1.25A

± 2% green LED

40mV

80mV

30mV

40mV 55mV

Wave of output voltage with max load:

Time delay after connection:

Time delay after over-load

Overload capacity:

Effi ciency:

Electronic fuse:

Other information

Working humidity:

Operating temperature:

Storage temperature:

Electrical strength input- output:

Protection degree:

Overvoltage category:

Polutioon degree:

Max. cable size (mm 2 ):

Outlets:

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

380mV

> 75%

IP30 x solid wire CY, Ø 4x0.75mm

2

, 90mm

48 x 48 x 21 mm

70 g 70 g

20mV

> 75%

90 x 17.6 x 64 mm

62 g 62 g

80mV max. 1s

500mV max. 1s

max. 120% of rated output

>82% electronic protections short-circuit, over load, over voltage

>81%

20 .. 90% RH

-20 °C to +40 °C (-4 °F to 104°F)

-40 °C to +85 °C (-40 °F to 185 °F)

4kV

IP40 device/ IP20 in-built in distribution board

II.

1

solid wire max.1x2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max.1x1.5

x

90 x 52 x 65 mm

158 g 158 g

EN 61558-1, EN 61010-1, EN 61558-2-17

90 x 52 x 65 mm

158 g

5mV

>82%

90 x 105 x 65 mm

375 g 363 g

Connection

PSB-10-12

(PSB-10-24)

AC 110-250 V

50 Hz/ 60 Hz

N L

PS-10-12

(PS-10-24)

AC 184-253 V

50 Hz/ 60 Hz

N L

PS-30-12

(PS-30-24)

AC 100 - 250 V

50 Hz/ 60 Hz

N L

PS-30-R AC 100 - 250 V

50 Hz/ 60 Hz

N L

PS-100-12

(PS-100-24)

AC 184-253 V

50 Hz/ 60 Hz

N L

AC

DC

+

-

DC 12 V / 0.84A

(DC 24 V / 0.42A)

AC

DC

+

-

DC 12 V / 0.84A

(DC 24 V / 0.42A)

T 1A

AC

DC

+

-

DC 12 V / 2.5A

(DC 24 V / 1.25A)

T 2A

AC

DC

+

-

DC 12 V - 24 V /

2.5 -1.25A

T 2A

AC

DC

+

-

DC 12 V / 8.4A

(DC 24 V / 4.2A)

T 3.15A

48

Power supplies PS

Connection

NOVINKA

PSB-10-12 / PSB-10-24 designated for installation into an installation box. Suitable for controlling of lighting sources, thermo valves, shutter engines, etc.

PSB-10-12

Output voltage

Output voltage

PS-10-12

Supply terminals

Output voltage indication

N L

PS-30-12

Supply terminals

Output voltage indication

N L

Neutral

Phase

Output voltage terminals

+ -

Output voltage terminals Output voltage terminals

+ + + \ - - -

Output voltage terminals

PS-100-12

Supply terminals

N L

- - - - -

PS-30-R

Output voltage terminals Supply terminals

Output voltage indication

Indication of over-load

Setting output voltage

N L

Output voltage terminals

+ + + + + +

- - - - - -

Output voltage terminals

Output voltage terminals

+ + + \ - - -

Output voltage terminals

49

Power supplies DR

!

Stabilized switching power supply

!

Input voltage (Uprim) in a wide range 100 - 240 V AC

!

DR-60-12: power supply with fi xed output voltage DC 12 V, stabilized 54 W

!

DR-60-24: power supply with fi xed output voltage DC 24 V, stabilized 60 W

!

Max. load 12 V-4.5 A, 24 V-2.5 A

!

Electronic protection of short-circuit, over-loading, over-voltage, fi ne setting of output voltage by trimmer

in a range ±10%

!

LED power indicator light, viewable from the front panel

!

Ambient air cooled through the perforated housing

!

4.5-MODULE, DIN rail mounting, isulation class II

EAN code

DR-60-12V: 8595188125048

DR-60-24V: 8595188125055

Technical parameters:

Input (U prim)

Voltage range:

Supply voltage tolerance:

Consumption without load (max):

Consumption with full load (max):

Output (Usec)

Output voltage:

Max.load:

Output voltage-no load DC:

Wave of output voltage:

Effi ciency:

Tolerance of output voltage:

Electronic fuse:

Fine adjustment of output voltage:

Overloud protection:

Time delay after connection:

Other information

Working humidity:

Thermal coefi cient:

Operating temperature:

Storage temperature:

Electrical strength (prim/sec):

Protection degree:

Max. cable size (mm 2 ):

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

Description

Terminal supply voltage Uprim

88-264 V AC/ 47-63 Hz nebo 124-370 V DC in the range of supply voltage

3VA

AC 65 VA AC 70 VA

12V ±10% 24V ±10%

4.5A / 54W 2.5A / 60W

12V ±10% 24V ±10%

0.12V 0.15V

83.5% 86%

±1 % electronic protections short-circuit, over load, over voltage

±10 % - trimrem to 105-160 % of rated output

100 ms for 100% loading and AC 230 V

20 - 90 % RH

0.03 % /°C (0 to 50 °C)/ 0.03 % /°F (32 °F to 122 °F)

-20 °C to +60 °C (-4 °F to 140 °F)

-40 °C to +85 °C (-40 °F to 185 °F) / (10 - 95% RH )

3 kV

IP20 device/ IP40 in-built in distribution board solid wire max.1x2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max.1x1.5 (AWG 10)

78 x 93x 56 mm (3.1˝ x 3.7˝ x 2.2˝)

300 g (10.6 oz.)

EN 61010-1, EN 61558-1, EN 61558-2-17

Input voltage terminals U DC

Symbol

Connection

DR-60-12

DR-60-24

N

L

AC

DC

+ -

Uprim supply voltage

AC 100-240 V

DC 124-270 V

U DC

Output voltage

DC 12 V/4.5 A

DC 24 V/ 2.5 A

N L + + trimmer for fi ne setting of output voltage

±10%

+ +

Trimmer for fi ne setting

of output voltage ±10%

50

Power supply ZSR-30, ZNP-10

Regulated stabilized power supply ZSR-30

!

Supply of various devices and appliances by safe voltage with fully galvanic separation from the main.

!

Input voltage: AC 230 V

!

Output voltage: DC 5-24 V stab., DC 24 V unstab. and AC 24 V

!

Exceeded current limit values is indicated by LED fl ashing

!

When there is full short-circuit, output is disconnected, output current is limited by an electronic fuse

!

3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting

EAN code

ZNP-10-12V: 8594030332733

ZNP-10- 24V: 8594030334089

ZSR-30: 8594030331750

Technical parameters

Entry (U prim)

Voltage range:

Supply voltage tolerance:

Consumption without load (max):

Consumption with load (max):

Output (Usec)

Output voltage:

Output voltage-no load AC:

Output voltage-no load DC:

Fuse:

Wave of output voltage:

Effi ciency:

Tolerance of output voltage:

Electronic fuse:

Other information:

Operating temperature:

Storing temperature:

Electrical strenght (prim/sec):

Protection degree:

Max. cable size (mm

2

):

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

ZSR-30

6 VA

Nonstabilized power supply ZNP-10-12V, ZNP-10-24V

!

AC and DC output voltage: 12 V or 24 V, nonstabilized

!

Power supply with fi xed output voltage

!

Protection against short-circuit and overload by a safety fuse

!

Input voltage: AC 230 V

!

3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting

ZNP-10-12V

AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz

-15 %; +10 %

7 VA

ZNP-10-24V

6.5 VA

DC 5-24 V stab.

DC 24 V nonstab.

AC 24 V

32 V

44 V

300 mV

75 %

±5 %

Towards black-out and and current overloading

DC 12 V nonstab.

AC 12 V

17 V

22 V primary wind T100 mA max.4 V

x

x

x

DC 24 V nonstab.

AC 24 V

32 V

44 V max.3 V

-20.. +40°C (-4 °F to 104 °F)

-20.. +60°C (-4 °F to 140 °F)

4 kV

IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals solid wire max.1x2.5 or 2x1.5 / with sleeve max.1x1.5 (AWG 12)

90 x 52 x 65 mm (3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝)

390 g (13.8 oz.) 360 g (13.8 oz.) 360 g (13.8 oz.)

EN 61010-1, EN 61558-2-1. EN 61558-1

Connection

ZSR -30

ZNP-10

PRI

АС 230 V

50 Hz / 60 Hz

T100 mA/250 V 

SEC

AC AC

+

DC

DC

DC

REG

-

+

-

REG

-

PRI

АС 230 V

50 Hz / 60 Hz

T100 mA/250 V 

SEC

AC

DC

DC

-

+

-

DC

WARNING! Values of max. load are valid for (operational) temperature.

Total loads on all output terminals may not exceed this values: by supplying 230 V-253 V – 8W from 230 V…207 V output power is proportionately decreesing onto 5 W

Description

ZSR-30

Input voltage terminals

ZNP-10-12V

ZNP-10-24V

Input voltage terminals

Output voltage

indication

AC output voltage

DC nonstabilized output voltage

AC output voltage

DC output regulated voltage

DC unregulated output voltage

51

Bell transformers ZTR

!

Designated for general use – e.g. as home bells supply, door locks supply

!

Input voltage: AC 230 V

!

Short-circuit-proof, doubled output terminals

!

2-MODULE, DIN rail mounting

ZTR-8-8: output voltage 8 V

ZTR-8-12: output voltage 12 V

!

3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting

ZTR-15-12: output voltage 4 - 8 -12V

EAN code

ZTR-8-8V : 8595188136808

ZTR-8-12V: 8595188136815

ZTR-15-12V: 8595188139281

Technical parameters

Entry (U prim)

Voltage range:

Supply voltage tolerance:

Consumption without load (max):

Output (Usec)

Output voltage:

Output voltage-no load AC:

Max.loability:

Fuse:

Other information:

Operating temperature:

Storing temperature:

Electrical strenght (prim/sec):

Protection degree:

Max. cable size (mm 2 ):

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

ZTR-8-8 ZTR-8-12 ZTR-15-12

-15 %; +10 %

7.2 VA

AC 8 V

12 V

8 VA

AC 230 V / 50 Hz

9.4 VA

AC 12 V

16 V

8 VA

short-circ.resistant

± 10 %

3.5 VA

AC 4 V

AC 8 V

AC 12 V

16 V

4V 5VA - 8V 10VA - 12 V 15VA

-20.. +40°C (-4 °F to 104 °F)

-20.. +60°C (-4 °F to 140 °F)

3.75 kV

IP20/40 solid wire max.1x2.5 or 2x1.5 / with sleeve max.1x1.5 (AWG 12)

90 x 35.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x1.4˝ x 2.5˝)

90 x 52 x 65 mm (3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝)

314 g (11.1 oz.)

312 g (11 oz.)

350 g (12.3 oz.)

EN 61558-1, EN 61558-2-8, EN 61558-2-1

Connection

ZTR-8-8

3

8V

4

1

230V ~ 50 Hz

N L 2

ZTR-8-12

3

12V

4

1

230V ~ 50 Hz

N L 2

ZTR-15-12

52

Twilight switches

SOU

Accessories of twilight switches:

SOU-1

Twilight switch.

Voltage range:

AC 230 V a AC/DC 12-240 V

Output contact:

1x changeover/SPDT 16 A.

Photosensor SKS

Protection degree: IP56.

It is suitable for mounting on the wall or in panel.

SOU-2

Twilight switch with digital time clock.

Voltage range:

AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz

Output conatct:

1x changeover /SPDT 8 A.

Memory relays

MR

MR-41

Voltage range:

AC 230 V or AC/DC 12 -240 V

Output contact:

1x changeover/SPDT 16 A.

Control and signalling devices

MR-42

Voltage range:

AC 230 V or AC/DC 12 -240 V

Output contact:

2x changeover / SPDT 16 A.

USS

USS

designated for switching, controlling and signalling by auxiliary any power circuits.

SWITCHES,

PUSH BUTTONS

SWITCHES

WITH GLOW LAMP

SIGNALLING LIGHT

BLIND FLANGE

62x34x98

IP65

SOU-3

Twilight and light switch

Voltage range:

AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz

Output conatct:

1x changeover/SPDT 16 A.

53

Twilight switch SOU-1

EAN codes:

SOU-1 /230V + photosensor SKS: 8595188121002

SOU-1 /UNI + photosensor SKS: 8595188121019

Photosensor SKS: 8594030337288

Technical parameters

Mounting of photosensor SKS on the wall

!

It serves to control lights on the basis of ambient light intensity

!

Used for switching street illumination and garden lights, illumination of advertisements, shop windows, etc.

!

Level of ambient intensity is monitored by an external sensor and output is switched according to set level on the device

!

Control input for additional control, e.g. time switch, preswitch etc.

!

Level of illumination adjustable in two ranges: 1 - 100 Lx and 100 - 50000 Lx

!

Adjustable time delay to eliminate short term fl uctuation in illumination

!

External sensor IP56 suitable for mounting on the wall (cover and holder of a sensor are a part of the package)

!

Supply voltage AC 230 V or AC/DC 12 - 240 V

!

Output contact: 1x changeover/ SPDT 16 A

!

Mounting of photosensor SKS into the panel

!

Red LED output indication

1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting

SOU-1

Symbol Connection

Supply terminals:

Voltage range:

Burden:

Voltage range:

Power input (apparent/loss):

Supply voltage tolerance:

Supply indication:

Time delay:

Time delay setting:

Illumination rang 1):

Illumination rang 2):

Output

Number of contacts:

Current rating:

Breaking capacity:

Inrush current:

Switching voltage:

Min. breaking capacity DC:

Output indication:

Mechanical life:

Electrical life (AC1):

Control

Power the control input:

Load between S-A2:

Control. terminals:

Glow tubes connetions:

Max. amount of glow lamps connected to controlling input:

Impulse length:

Reset time:

Other information

Operating temperature:

Storage temperature:

Electrical strength:

Operating position:

Mounting/DIN rail:

Protection degree:

Sensor cable length:

Overvoltage cathegory:

Pollution degree:

Max. cable size (mm

2

):

Dimensions of the sensor:

Weight of sensor:

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

A1 - A2

AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz)

AC 0.7 - 3 VA / DC 0.5 - 1.7 W

AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz

AC max. 12 VA / 1.8 W

-15 %; +10 % green LED

0 - 2 min potentiometer

1 - 100 Lx

100 - 50000 Lx

1x changeover/ SPDT (AgSnO

2

)

16 A / AC1

4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC

30 A / <3 s

250 V AC1 / 24 V DC

500 mW red LED

3x10

7

0.7x10

5

0.8 - 530 mVA (UNI), 0.8 - 530 mVA (AC 230 V)

Yes(UNI, AC 230 V)

A1-S

AC 230 V - Yes / UNI - No

230 V - max. amount 20 pcs

(Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC) min. 25 ms / max. unlimited

150 ms

-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)

-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)

4 kV (supply - output) any

DIN rail EN 60715

IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals max. 50 m (standard wire)

III.

2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 10) see page 133

20 g (0.7 oz.)

90x17.6x64 mm

(UNI) - 75 g (2.6 oz.), (230) - 65 g (2.3 oz.)

EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1

IN

IN

A1

S  A2

Description of DIP switch

DIP 1 - LUX

ON

100 - 50000 Lx

1 - 100 Lx

DIP 2 - TEST

ON

ТЕSТ ON

NORMAL

Description

Supply voltage indication

Setting of level of illumination

Fine setting of level of

illumination

Setting time delay

16 18

15

L

N

Function

A1 S  A2

IN IN ambient light intensity

LEVEL

A1-A2

ТЕSТ

S

15-18

15 16 18

A1 S  A2

IN IN

15 16 18

Lx

Hysteresis

t tt

Supply voltage terminals

Terminals for sensor

Terminal of blocking input

Output indication

Switch of test function TEST

Output contact

54

Twilight switch SOU-2 with digital time switch clock

innovation!

A1 A2 T1 T1

15 16 18

Mounting of photosensor SKS on the wall

!

It serves for control of lights on the basis of ambient light intensity and real time (combination of SOU-1 and time switch clock SHT-1 in one device)

!

Time clock can override the light sensor for applications when lights are not required

!

Adjustable light intensity 1-50000 lx

!

Function „random switching“ enables simulation of presence in a house when nobody is at home

!

Switching: according to a program (AUTO) / permanently manual / random (CUBE)

!

External sensor IP56 issuitable for mounting on the wall/ in panel ( cover and sensors are part of delivery)

!

easy replacement of backup battery with plug-in module located on front panelof device (no disassembly required)

EAN code

SOU-2 /230V + photosensor SKS: 8595188130523 photosensor SKS: 8594030337288

SOU-2 : 85957888121644

Technical parameters

Supply terminals:

Voltage range:

Burden:

Voltage range:

Back-up supply:

Typ záložní baterie:

Summer/winter time:

Output

Number of contacts:

Current rating:

Breaking capacity:

Switching voltage:

Mechanical life:

Electrical life (AC1):

Time circuit

Power back-up:

Accuracy:

Minimum interval:

Data stored for:

Program circuit

Illumination range:

Program place number:

Program period:

Data readout:

Other information

Operating temperature:

Storage temperature:

Electrical strength:

Operating position:

Mounting:

Protection degree:

Overvoltage cathegory:

Pollution degree:

Max. cable size (mm 2 ):

Dimensions:

Dimensions of the sensor:

Weight:

Weight sensor:

Standards:

!

2-MODULE, DIN rail mounting

Mounting of photosensor SKS into the panel

SOU-2

A1 - A2

AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz max. 4 VA

-15 %; +10 % yes

CR 2032 (3V) automatic

1x changeover/ SPDT (AgSnO

2

)

8 A / AC1

2000 VA / AC1, 240 W / DC

250 V AC1 / 30 V DC

1x10 7

1x10 5

3 years max. ±1 s day (23 °C/ 73.4 °F )

1 min min. 10 years

1-50000 Lx

100 daily, weekly

LCD display, illuminated by back up

-10 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)

-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)

4 kV (supply - output) any

DIN rail EN 60715

IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals

III.

2

solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5 (AWG 12)

with sleeve max. 1x1.5 (AWG 12)

90 x 35.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 1.4˝ x 2.5˝) see page 119

110 g (3.9 oz.)

20 g (0.7 oz.)

EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1, EN 60255-6

Symbol

T1

T1

Description of visual elements on the display

Displaying the day

Status indication

Display of date / the lighting setup menu

Time display

Control button PRG / +

Reset

Control button MAN1 / -

Description

A1

A2

16 18

SOU-2

Supply voltage terminal (A1)(A2)

Backlight display

15

Auto + t

Connection

Prog

A1 A2 T1 T1

Auto

external sensor

Man

SOU-2

RESET

PRG +

MAN

_

ESC

OK

Un

A1 A2 T1 T1

15 16 18

Operation mode indication

Displays 12/24 hour mode

Indication of the switching program

Control button ESC

Control button OK

Sensor-Terminal

Controlling buttons

Lead-sealing point

Plug-in module:

15 16 18

Plug-in module for replacement of the backup battery

Output - Channel 1(15-16-18) with battery backup without battery backup

55

Twilight switch SOU-3

98x62x34

IP65

EAN code

SOU-3 /230V: 8595188140560

Technical parameters

Supply

Supply terminals:

Voltage range:

Tolerance of voltage range:

Input (apparent/loss):

Setting the scale level of lighting:

Function (twilight switch)

- range 1:

- range 2:

- range 3:

Function (light switch)

- range 1:

- range 2:

- range 3:

Setting function

Level of light-slight:

Slight setting of light level:

Time delay t:

Delay setting t:

Output

Output contact:

Current rating:

Switching output:

Peak current:

Switched voltage:

Min.switching output:

Mechanical life:

Electrical life:

Other information:

Operation temperature:

Storing temperature:

Electrical strengh:

Operation position:

Protection degree:

Overvoltage cathegory:

Pollution level:

Max. cable size (mm

2

):

Suggested power-supply cable:

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

Function

Actual illumination level

Setup

illumination level

L - N

Function

twilight switch

15 - 18

Function

light switch

15 - 18

t

!

It serves as control of the device on the basis of ambient light intensity

!

External version in IP65, box for mounting on the wall, front cover removable without screws

!

Built in high resolution light sensor

!

Two devices in one, function is set by jumper:

- twilight switch – contact closes by decreasing of ambient light intensity, and opens by its increasing

- light switch – contact closes by increasing ambient light intensity, and opens by decreasing light intensity. Used for switching of devices by reaching of pre-set ambient light level, usually sun shine(pulling down the shutters or blinds, activation of solar panels) adjustable (by jumper) ranges of light level

!

3 adjustable levels of time delay (for elimination of short-term fl uctuations of light intensity – for short increases in light intensity)

!

Supply voltage 230 V AC

!

Potential-free output contact 12A/AC1 switching

SOU-3

L - N

AC 230V / 50 - 60Hz

- 15% .. +10% max 6VA / 0.7W

by jumper J2

1 ... 10 Lx

10 ... 100 Lx

100 ... 1.000 Lx

100 ... 1 000 Lx

1 000 ... 10 000 Lx

10 000 ... 100 000 Lx by jumper J3

0.1 ... 1 x range potenciometer

0 / 1 min. / 2 min.

by jumper J1

1 x NO- SPST (AgSnO

2

)

12 A / AC1

3000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC

30 A / < 3 s

250 V AC / 24 V DC

500 mW

3 x 10 7

0.7 x 10

5

-30 °C to +60 °C (-22 °F to 140 °F)

-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)

4kV (supply-output) sensor-side down or on the sides

IP65

III.

2 max.1x2.5, max. 2x1.5/ with sleeve max.1x2.5 (AWG 12)

CYKY 3x2.5 (CYKY4x1.5)

98 x 62 x 34 mm (3.9˝ x 2.4˝ x 1.3˝)

122 g ( 4.3 oz.)

EN 60255-6, 61010-1

Description (proportion is accordant to real size)

Cable gommet M16x1.5

for cable max. Ø 10mm/ 0.4”

Hole for mounting on the wall Ø4.3mm/ 0.2”

Connection

L

N jumper for L potential

SOU-3

L

15

L

N

0

1

2

J1

Delay

(min)

18

J2

Adjustable range

setting (Lx)

10

100

1.000

1.000

10.000

100.000

J3

Function

light switch

twilight switch

Slight setup fi nish in the frame of range

N

L potentialless

NO contacts

L

15

18

L

N

L

15

18

Hole for mounting on the wall Ø 4.3mm/ 0.2”

Sensor of ambient light

L

N

t t t t

Solid hysteresis 12%

3- wiring connection

Device is standardly supplied with jumper L-15 (3-wire connection).

For the correct function of device is neccesary sensor-side down device mounting.

4- wiring connection

56

Memory & latching relays MR-41, MR-42

EAN code

MR-41 /230V

MR-41 /UNI

MR-42 /230V

MR-42 /UNI

8595188115889

8595188115896

8595188115902

8595188115919

Technical parameters

Number of functions:

Supply terminals:

Voltage range:

Burden:

Voltage range:

Consumption (apparent/loss):

Supply voltage tolerance:

Supply indication:

Output

Number of contacts:

Current rating:

Breaking capacity:

Inrush current:

Switching voltage:

Min. breaking capacity DC:

Output indication:

Mechanical life:

Electrical life (AC1):

Controlling

Consumption of input:

Load between A2-ON/OFF:

Control. terminals:

Glow tubes connetions:

Max. amount of glow lamps connected to controlling input:

Impulse length:

Other information

Operating temperature:

Storage temperature:

Electrical strength:

Operating position:

Mounting/DIN rail:

Protection degree:

Overvoltage cathegory:

Pollution degree:

Max. cable size (mm 2 ):

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

!

Latching relays, controlled by buttons from several locations can replace three way switches or cross bar switches thanks to control by buttons (unlimited number, connected in parallel by 2 wires), installation gets more transparent and faster for mounting

!

Relay MR-41/UNI, MR-42/UNI memorize its last state even after supply failure. During the failure relay will turn off and after re-energizing will automatically turns on.

!

MR-41

- output contact: 1x changeover / SPDT 16 A

!

MR-42

- options - 2x parallel contacts or the other relay is latching

- function selected via external jumper between B1 - B2

- output contact: 2x changeover /SPDT 16 A

!

Supply voltage AC 230 V or AC/DC 12-240 V

!

1-MODULE version, DIN rail mounting, controlling by buttons

MR-41 MR-42

1 2

A1 - A2

AC/DC 12 - 240 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz)

AC 0.17 - 3 VA / DC 0.1 - 1.2 W AC 0.17 - 12 VA / DC 0.11 - 1.9 W

AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz

AC max. 12 VA / 1.2 W AC max. 12 VA / 1.9 W

-15 %; +10 % green LED

1x changeover / SPDT (AgSnO

2

) 2x changeover/ SPDT (AgSnO

2

)

16 A / AC1

4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC

30 A / <3 s

250 V AC1 / 24 V DC

500 mW red LED

3x10

7

0.7x10

5

AC 0.025 - 0.2 VA / DC 0.1 - 0.7 W (UNI), AC 0.53 VA (AC 230 V)

Yes

A1 - ON/OFF

Yes

230V - max. amount 5 pcs

(Measured with glow lamp 0.68mA/230V AC) min. 25 ms / max. unlimited

-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)

-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)

4 kV (supply - output) any

DIN rail EN 60715

IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals

III.

2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12)

90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)

(UNI) - 62 g, (230) - 60 g (UNI) - 89 g, (230) - 85 g

EN 61810-1, EN 61010-1

Symbol

MR-41

ON/OFF A2

Connection

MR-41

L

N

Function

MR-41

A1

+ -

11 12 14

12 14

A1 - A2

ON/OFF

11 - 14

MR-42

A1 - A2

ON/OFF

B1 B2

11 - 14

21 - 24

B1 B2

11 - 14

21 - 24

MR-42

A1

11

ON/OFF A2

L

N

MR-42

+ -

B1 B2

21 22 24

11 12 14

12 14 22 24

11 21

57

Controlling and signalling modul es USS

!

Independent switch units designed for fl exible controlling and switching of power circuits

!

USS - “Do It Yourself” = it is possible to “click into” diff erent types of switches and signalling units into the basic module

!

Units are delivered as components and confi gured by the user

!

15 types of units: switches, push buttons, signal lights of diff erent colours including fl ashing lights units are replaceable also for future (for example when an application is changed, extended, etc...)

!

It is possible to place up to two units into one MODULE (for example 2x switch,

2x signalling lights or combinations) = saves space in switchboard panels

!

1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting

!

Operating temperature

-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)

!

M3 screw with clamp terminals

EAN code

USS-ZM

USS-00

USS-01

USS-02

USS-03

USS-04

USS-05

USS-06/S

USS-06/R

USS-07

USS-08

USS-09

USS-10

USS-11

USS-12

USS-13

USS-14

USS-15

8595188124577

8595188124614

8595188124621

8595188124638

8595188124645

8595188124652

8595188124669

8595188124676

8595188136372

8595188124683

8595188124690

8595188124706

8595188124331

8595188124348

8595188124355

8595188124362

8595188124898

8595188124379

Units

CONNECTION INDICATION

USS-ZM MODUL

RATED CURRENT/VOLTAGE

FOR SWITCHES SUPPLY

VOLTAGE FOR SIGNALLING

LIGHTS

DESCRIPTION

Basic MODULE (housing with terminals and contacts)

USS-00

Blind fl ange

Make your own device USS - easy and intelligent solution!

BLIND FLANGE

Used to fi ll in an empty position in the front panel of the USS Module

Color: Grey, RAL7035 (the same as the housing).

Unit: 00

Example of an order:

USS - ZM

+ USS - 07

+ USS - 11

A3 A1

A2

USS-01 A3

(A13)

USS-02 A3

(A13)

A1

(A12)

6A / 250 V AC

8 A / 250 V AC

Switch

Alternation switch

SWITCHES, PUSH BUTTONS

They have a low uplift and a large fi ngerboard. High quality contacts, easy rock switch and large button area provide years of useful life.

Unit: 01-06

USS-03

A3

(A13)

USS-04

A3

(A13)

USS-05

A3

(A13)

USS-06/S A3

(A13)

USS-06/R

A3

(A13)

USS-07

A3

(A13)

USS-08

A3

(A13)

USS-09

A3

(A13)

A1

(A12)

A2

(A11)

A1

(A12)

A2

(A11)

A1

(A12)

A2

(A11)

A1

(A12)

A2

(A11)

A1

(A12)

A1

(A12)

A1

(A12)

A2

(A11)

A1

(A12)

A2

(A11)

A1

(A12)

A2

(A11)

6 A / 250 V AC

6 A / 250 V AC

6 A / 250 V AC

8 A / 250 V AC

8 A / 250 V AC

Switch with cental position

Switch + button with central position

Switching button with central position

NO switch

NC switch

10 A / 250 V AC

Switch with glow lamp (red)

10 A / 250 V AC

Switch with glow lamp (green)

10 A / 250 V AC

Switch with glow lamp (yellow)

SWITCHES WITH GLOW LAMP

Switch and signalization in one unit.

Signalization is carried out by a glow lamp in dolly including series resistance. It is possible to instal it for permanent indication or for an intermittend by contact of the switch.

Colours: red, green, yellow.

Supply voltage of the signalling light:

AC 250 V.

SIGNALLING LIGHT

High luminescence SMD/LED that illuminates the entire button area surface.

Input voltage can be either AC 230 V or AC/

DC 24 V (output light may vary).

Red sig. light is delivered also in a fl ashing version.Unit: 14.

Colours: red, green, yellow, white, blue

Unit: 10-15

APEM

A 12

A 11 A 13

Terminal connection Laser marking

USS-10

A1

(A11)

USS-11

A1

(A11)

USS-12

A1

(A11)

USS-13

A1

(A11)

USS-14

A1

(A11)

USS-15

A1

(A11)

A3

(A13)

A2

(A12)

A1-A2. AC 250 V

A1-A3, AC/DC 24 V

Signalling LED (red)

A3

(A13)

A2

(A12)

A1-A2. AC 250 V

A1-A3, AC/DC 24 V

Signalling LED (green)

A3

(A13)

A2

(A12)

A1-A2. AC 250 V

A1-A3, AC/DC 24 V

Signalling LED (yellow)

A3

(A13)

A2

(A12)

A1-A2. AC 250 V

A1-A3, AC/DC 24 V

Signalling LED (white)

A3

(A13)

A2

(A12)

A1-A2. AC 250 V

A1-A3, AC/DC 24 V

Signalling LED fl ashing (red)

A3

(A13)

A2

(A12)

A1-A2. AC 250 V

A1-A3, AC/DC 24 V

Signalling LED (blue)

A3 A1

A2

A12

A11 A13

Dimensions

See page 117-121

4

8

8

4

U

L

Switches and buttons are marked by laser according to your request in case you order 50 pcs and more.

Max. number of symbols:

58

AC/DC

Monitoring relays

Current

A

Voltage

V

1 phase

HRN-33(HRN-63)

Supply and monitored voltage in range

AC 48-276 V, 1x output for Umax and

Umin adjustable level.

AC

HRN-35 as HRN-33 but individual output for each level ( Umax/Umin). Adjustable time delay to eliminate voltage peaks.

HRN-37 (HRN-67) as HRN-33(63), but in voltage range

AC 24-150 V.

HRN-41 (Hysteresis)

Monitoring DC and AC voltage

10-500 V, divided into 3 inputs and

3 ranges, 2 independent outputs 16 A,

2x time delay.

HRN-42 (Window) as HRN-41 but function WINDOW. Other functions (applicable for HRN-41): faulty state memory, hysteresis, galv. separated supply AC 230, 400, or AC/DC 24 V.

HRN-34(HRN-64) as HRN-33(63) but in voltage range

DC 6-30 V for monitoring battery circuits

( 6,12,24 V).

3 phase

AC

HRN-55 supply from all phases

HRN-55N supply L1-N (monitors also disconnection of neutral wire) Time delay to eliminate peaks.

HRN-57 supply from all phases

HRN-57N supply L1-N (monitos also neutral wire disconnection)

Adjustable voltage level.

PRI-32 monitoring by current transformer

(wire through an opening, galv. separated, without heat loss), adjust. current 1-20A, multivoltage

AC 24-240 and DC 24V, output 8A changeover.

HRN-54 supply from all phases

HRN-54N supply L1-N (monitors also disconection of neutral wire).All parameters adjustable by potentiometers.

HRN-56 adjustable level Umin

HRN-56/120

HRN-56/208

HRN-56/240

HRN-56/400

PRI-51 monitoring of current by in-built transformer,

5 ranges (in versions 1/2/5/8/16A), range

5A is suitable for current transformer

(X/5), supply and output as PRI-32, diff erence from PRI-32: direct monitoring and fi ner ranges (higher sensitivity) = higher accuracy in measuring.

HRN-56/480

HRN-56/575

PRI-52

For scanning the current up to 25 A. Long distance device diagnostics (black-out, increasement of take-off )

Priority relay

Supplying voltage AC 230 V

Output 8A/ SPST switching over

HRN-43

HRN-43N galvanically separated supply AC 230V,

AC 400 or AC/DC 24V, memory, adjustable hysteresis and delay,

2 x independent output.

MPS-1

Optical signaling of three-phase network.

PRI-53 for monitoring the current in three-phase devices. Power supply: 24-240 V AC/DC, galvanically separated from the circuit of the monitored current 2 types depending on the strength of rated current In (1A, 5A)

AC/ DC

PRI-41 (Hysteresis)

3 inputs (0,4-1,6, 1,25-5, 4-16A) divided into 3 ranges (selectable by a switch).

PRI-42 (Window) as PRI-41 but function “WINDOW”.

Level

HRH-5

Replacemat for HRH-2, simple version , 2 functions, galvanically separated supply voltage UNI 24.. 240 V AC/DC

HRH-1

4 functions, advanced setting for various combinations, galvanically separated supply AC 230 V or AC/DC 24 V,

2 output contacts/2PDT 16A.

Power factor

cos-φ

Frequency

COS-1 monitors and scores power factor

(phase shift between current and voltage cos φ) in 3phase/1phase circuits (motors, pumps etc.).

HRF-10 for monitoring the frequency of AC voltage. The monitored frequency 50/60/400 Hz is selected by a switch.

HRH-6

Device monitors 5 levels by using six probes. Supply voltage: 12-24 V DC or galvanically separated 230 V AC.

HRH-6/S

Additional signalization to HRH-6 with 6 control lights on the front panel of device.

HRH-4 a set of level relay HRH-5 and a contactor VS425.

For automatic operation

1-phase and 3-phase pumps. 2 function. IP55.

Level switches accessories:

Level sensors SHR

SHR-1(M, N) - for monitoring fl ooding

SHR-2- for level detection

SHR-3 - for demanding and industrial environment

59

60

Monitoring relays review

Relay for current monitor Relays monitor voltage

Secure variables Nastavení

Type Description

HRN-33

HRN-34

HRN-35

HRN-37

HRN-63

HRN-64

HRN-67

HRN-41/230V

HRN-41/110V

HRN-41/400V

HRN-41/24V

HRN-42/230V

HRN-42/110V

HRN-42/400V

HRN-42/24V

HRN-43/230V

HRN-43/110V

HRN-43/400V

HRN-43/24V

HRN-43N/230V

HRN-43N/110V

HRN-43N/400V

HRN-43N/24V

HRN-55

HRN-55N

HRN-57

HRN-57N

HRN-54

3-M

1-M

1-M

1-M

1-M

1-M

AC 110V

AC 400V

AC/DC 24V

AC 230V

AC-110V

AC 400V

AC/DC 24V from monitored from monitored from monitored from monitored from monitored

1-M

1-M

1-M

1-M

1-M

1-M

1-M

3-M

3-M from monitored from monitored from monitored

AC 230V

AC 110V

AC 400V

AC/DC 24V from monitored from monitored from monitored from monitored

AC 230V

AC 110V

AC 400V

AC/DC 24V

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

3

3

3

AC 48 - 276 V

DC 6 - 30 V

AC 48 - 276 V

AC 24 - 150 V

AC 48 - 276 V

DC 6 - 30 V

AC 24 - 150 V

AC/DC

10 - 50 V

32 - 160 V

100 - 500 V

AC/DC

10 - 50 V

32 - 160 V

100 - 500 V

AC 3 x

84 - 480 V

AC 3 x 48 - 276 V

AC 3 x 300 - 500 V

3 AC 3 x 172 - 287 V

3

3

3

AC 3 x 300 - 500 V

AC 3 x 172 - 287 V

AC 3 x 300 - 500 V

 

      

  

 

 

 

HRN-54N

HRN-56/120

HRN-56/208

HRN-56/240

HRN-56/400

HRN-56/480

HRN-56/575

1-M from monitored

3 AC 3 x 172 - 287 V

 

1-M from monitored

3-M from monitored

3

3

AC 3 x 72 - 160 V

AC 3 x 125 - 276 V

AC 3 x 144 - 276 V

AC 3 x 240 - 460 V

AC 3 x 228 - 550 V

AC 3 x 345 - 660 V

  

  

For all types, the delay is adjustable from 0 - 10 seconds (to eliminate short-term outages or peaks)

The lower voltage level (Umin) is set in % of the upper level (Umax)

61

Second relay function (independent/parallel)

Galvanically separated power supply from measuring inputs

61

68

2 output relays, functions of the second relay may be selected (independent/parallel)

Galvanically separated power supply

68

Power supply from all phases, i.e. the relay function is preserved even if one phase fails

Power supply L1-N, i.e. the relay also monitors the neutral wire interruption

64

64

Power supply from all phases, i.e. the relay function is preserved even if one phase fails

65

Power supply L1-N, i.e. the relay also monitors the neutral wire interruption, replacement for HRN-52

65

If the supply voltage falls below 60% of Un (OFF lower level), the relay will immediately disconnects with no delay

Power supply from all phases, i.e. the relay function is preserved even if one phase fails

If the supply voltage falls below 60% of Un (OFF lower level), the relay will immediately disconnects with no delay

Power supply L1-N, i.e. the relay also monitors the neutral wire interruption

66

66

67

Thanks to the power supply from all three phases, the relay is operational even if one phase fails

67

62

62

62

62

62

62

62

Signal relays

MPS-1

1-M from monitored

3 AC 3 x 50 - 253 V

  

Optical signaling of three-phase network

70

Type

PRI-32

PRI-41/230V

PRI-41/24V

PRI-42/230V

PRI-42/24V

PRI-51/0.5

PRI-51/1

PRI-51/2

PRI-51/5

PRI-51/8

PRI-51/16

PRI-52

PRI-53/1

PRI-53/5

1-M AC 24-240 V

DC 24 V

1

1 3-M AC 230 V

AC/DC 24 V

3-M AC 230 V

AC/DC 24 V

1

1-M AC 24-240 V

DC 24 V

1

1-M

6-M

AC 230 V

AC/DC

24-240 V

1

3

Level switches

Monitoring values

Type

HRH-1/230V

HRH-1/110V

HRH-1/400V

HRH-1/24V

HRH-4/230V

HRH-4/24V

HRH-5

HRH-6/AC

HRH-6/DC

3-M

Set

1-M

AC 230 V

AC 110 V

AC 400 V

AC/DC 24 V

AC 230 V

AC/DC 24 V

AC/DC

24-240 V box

IP65

AC 230 V

AC/DC 12-24V

Relay for factor cos-φ monitoring

Type

COS-1/230V

COS-1/110V

COS-1/400V

COS-1/24V

3-M AC 230V

AC 110V

AC 400V

AC/DC 24V

3

Relay for frequency monitoring

Type

HRF-10

Monitoring values Setting

Description

AC 1-20 A

AC/DC 0.12 - 1.6 A

AC/DC 0.375 - 5 A

AC/DC 1.2 - 16 A

AC/DC 0.12 - 1.6 A

AC/DC 0.375 - 5 A

AC/DC 1.2 - 16 A

AC 0.05 - 0.5 A

AC 0.1 - 1 A

AC 0.2 - 2 A

AC 0.5 - 5 A

AC 0.8 - 8 A

AC 1.6 - 16 A

AC 0.5 - 25 A

AC 3 x 0.4 - 1.2 A

AC 3 x 2 - 6 A

   

  

  

Exceeding the current value - the current fl owing through the monitored conductor must not exceed 100 A even on a short-term basis

71

 

 

The adjustable delay for elimination of short-term outages and peaks for every level

Galvanically separated power supply

The adjustable delay for elimination of short-term outages and peaks for every level

Galvanically separated power supply

75

75

May be used for scanning the current from the current transformer - up to 600A

Power supply is galvanically separated from the measured current

 

May be used for scanning the current from the external current transformer - up to 600A

Monitors the drop in the strength of current below the preset value

Monitors exceeding the preset value

72

73

74

*

Monitoring values

0.1 - 0.99

Monitoring values

3-M AC

161 - 346V

1 40 - 60 Hz

48 - 72 Hz

320 - 480 Hz

Setting

Setting

Description

Sensitivity adjustable by potentiometer.

Galvanically separated power supply

78

Unit with no protection devices - adequate protection element needs to be integrated before the unit. Ingress protection of the assembly is IP55

Measuring the frequency of 10 Hz will protect liquid from polarisation and measuring probes from increased oxidation

Galvanically separated power supply

* devices mainly designated for monitoring water level in fi re-engine tanks

82

77

80

Setting

Description

    

Two output relays, one independent relay for each level

Galvanically separated power supply

Description

     

Switchable ranges of rated frequency

84

85

Monitoring voltage relay HRN-41, HRN-42

!

Monitoring DC / AC 1-phase in 3 ranges

!

Monitoring voltage with 2 independent levels (overvoltage / undervoltage)

!

Two versions, HRN-41: Function “HYSTERESIS” a HRN-42: Function “WINDOW”

!

“MEMORY” function - manual reset key on frontal panel

!

function of second relay (independent/parallel)

!

Adjustable delay for short peaks

EAN code

HRN-41 /110V

HRN-41 /230V

HRN-41 /400V

HRN-41 /24V

HRN-42 /110V

HRN-42 /230V

HRN-42 /24V

8595188140430

8595188140409

8595188121521

8595188140416

8595188140478

8594030337653

8594030338070

Technical parameters HRN-41 HRN-42

!

Galvanically separated supply voltage

!

Output contact: 1x changeover/SDPT 16 A / 250 V AC1 for all monitored levels

!

3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting

Description

Supply

Supply terminals:

Voltage range:

Burden:

Supply voltage tolerance:

Measuring

Ranges:

Terminals:

Input resistance:

Max. permanent overload:

Peak overload <1ms:

Time delay for Umax:

Time delay for Umin:

Accuracy

Setting accuracy (mechanical):

Repeat accuracy:

Dependance on temperature:

Tolerance of limit values:

Hysteresis (from fault to normal):

Output

A1 - A2

AC 110 V, AC 230 V, AC 400 V or AC/DC 24 V (AC 50-60Hz) max. 4.5 VA

-15 %; +10 %

10 - 50 V (AC 50Hz)

C - B1

110 kΩ

100 V

250 V

32 - 160 V (AC 50Hz)

C - B2

360 kΩ

300 V

700 V adjustable, 0 -10 s adjustable, 0 -10 s

100 - 500 V (AC 50Hz)

C - B3

1.1 MΩ

600 V

5 %

<1 %

< 0.1 % / °C

5 % selectable 5 % / 10 %

Supply indication

Adjusting upper level

- Umax

Indication Umax

Output indication

Indication Umin

Symbol

C

B1

B2

B3

~~

A1 16 18 26 28

Connection

MEMORY function

Function of 2nd relay

(1st-paralel, 2nd-independent)

Hysteresis from faulty to OK normal state

Un t1 - time delay for Umax

Adjusting bottom level - Umin

Uin 100-500

10-50

Measured voltage AC or DC

32-160 t2 - time delay for Umin

A1 A2 C B1 B2 B3

Number of contacts:

2x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)

A2 15 25

Current rating:

16 A / AC1

Breaking capacity:

4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC

Inrush current:

30 A / < 3 s

16 15 18 28 25 26

Switching voltage:

250 V AC1 / 24 V DC

Min. breaking capacity DC:

500 mW

Function

Output indication: yellow LED

Mechanical life:

3x10 7

Un

Electrical life (AC1):

0.7x10

5

Umax

Hysteresis Hysteresis

Other information

Uin

Operating temperature:

-20 °C to + 55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)

Umin

Hysteresis

Storage temperature:

-30 °C to + 70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)

Electrical strength:

4 kV (supply - output)

15-18

25-28

Operating position:

Mounting: any

DIN rail EN 60715

15-18

25-28

Protection degree:

Overvoltage cathegory:

IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals

III.

RESET

LED > U

Pollution degree:

Max. cable size (mm 2 ):

2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x1.5 (AWG 12)

LED < U

LED

Dimensions:

90 x 52 x 65 mm (3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝)

MEMORY-ON (DIP2)

Weight:

Standards:

239 g (8.4 oz.)

EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1

Relay is delivered in two versions – according to the way of setting and monitoring voltage levels.

HRN-41 has function Hysteresiss, which means that only upper level is set ( Umax) and lower level (Umin) is set in % from upper level. Therefore lower level automatically changes when changing upper level.

HRN-42 has function “WINDOW”, which means that upper level (Umax) and lower level (Umin) are set independently in % from rated monitores range.

Both types have choice of function MEMORY, in case the relay gets into a faulty state it keeps output in this state until it is reset by button RESET. DIP switch No.3 can be used to choose if relays should switch individually for each level or in parallel in case any level of voltage is overrun. DIP switch No.4 serves to set hysteresis which applies when going from normal state to a faulty one.

Relay has protection against polarity reversing for DC voltage or incorrectly chosen AC-DC voltage (this fault is indicated by fl asching of both LEDs ( LED <U a LED >U).

61

Monitoring voltage relay line HRN-3x and HRN-6x

EAN code

HRN-33

HRN-34

HRN-35

HRN-37

HRN-63

HRN-64

HRN-67

8595188115636

8595188115643

8595188115650

8595188130615

8595188130622

8595188130639

8595188130646

Technical parameters

Supply and measuring

Terminals:

Voltage range:

Burden:

Upper level (Umax):

Bottom level (Umin):

Max. permanent:

Peak overload <1ms:

Time delay:

Accuracy

Setting accuracy (mechanical):

Repeat accuracy:

Dependance on temperature:

Tolerance of limit values:

Hysteresis (from fault to normal):

Output - Number of contacts:

Current rating:

Breaking capacity:

Inrush current:

Switching voltage:

Min. breaking capacity DC:

Output indication:

Mechanical life:

Electrical life (AC1):

Other information

Operating temperature:

Storage temperature:

Electrical strength:

Operating position:

Mounting:

Protection degree:

Overvoltage cathegory:

Pollution degree:

Max. cable size (mm

2

):

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

Symbol

HRN-33, HRN-37.

HRN-63, HRN-67

A1 16 18

HRN-33/ HRN-63

A1 - A2

AC 48 - 276 V / 50Hz

AC max. 1.2 VA

AC 160 - 276 V

30 - 95 % Umax

AC 276 V

AC 290 V

!

It serves to control supply voltage for appliances sensitive to supply tolerance, protection of the device against under/over voltage

!

HRN-3x is band voltage relay, HRN-6x is over/under voltage relay. For diff erence - see graph of function

HRN-33, HRN-63 - monitors voltage in range AC 48 - 276 V

- U max and U min can be monitored independently

HRN-34, HRN-64 - like HRN-33, but voltage range is DC 6 - 30 V

- monitoring of battery circuits (12, 24 V)

HRN-35 - like HRN-33, but independent output relays for each voltage level

- switching of other loads possible

HRN-37, HRN-67 - like HRN-33, monitors voltage in range AC 24 -150 V

- it is possible to monitor level of overvoltage and undervoltage independently

!

Adjustable time delay for all types is 0 - 10 s (to eliminate short voltage drops or peaks)

!

Voltage Umin adjusted as % of Umax

!

3-state indication - LEDs indicating normal state and 2 fault states

!

Supply from monitored voltage (monitors level of its own supply)

!

1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting

HRN-34/ HRN-64

A1 - A2

DC 6 - 30 V

DC max. 1.2 VA

DC 18 - 30 V

35 - 95 % Umax

DC 36 V

DC 50 V

HRN-35

adjustable 0 - 10 s

A1 - A2

AC 48 - 276 V / 50Hz

AC max. 1.2 VA

AC 160 - 276 V

30 - 95 % Umax

AC 276 V

AC 290 V

HRN-37/ HRN-67

A1 - A2

AC 24-150 V / 50Hz

AC max. 1.2 VA

AC 80-150 V

30 - 95 % Umax

AC 276 V

AC 290 V

5 %

<1 %

< 0.1 % / °C

5 %

2 - 6 % of adjusted value (only HRN-33, HRN-34, HRN-35, HRN-37)

1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy) 1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy) 1x chang. for each level of voltage,(AgNi) 1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)

16 A / AC1

4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC

30 A / < 3 s

250 V AC1 / 24 V DC

500 mW red/ green LED

3x10

7

0.7x10

5

HRN-34, HRN-64

A1

-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)

-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)

4 kV (supply - output) any

DIN rail EN 60715

IP 40 from front panel

III.

2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5, with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12)

90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)

61 g (2.2 oz.) 73 g (2.6 oz.) 85 g (3 oz.) 61 g (2.2 oz.)

EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1

Connection

HRN-35

HRN-33, HRN-37.

HRN-63, HRN-67

A1 A2

HRN-34,

HRN-64

+

A1 A2

-

HRN-35

A1 A2

16 18

A1

16 18 26 28

A2

15

A2

15

A2

15 25 15 16 18

15 16 18

25 26 28

15 16 18

62

Monitoring voltage relay line HRN-3x and HRN-6x

Indication LED

HRN-33, HRN-37

Normal state

Umin<Un<Umax

Green LED = ON

Red LED = OFF

Exceeded Umax(overvoltage)

Drop below Umin(undervoltage)

Un>Umax or Un<Umax

Green LED = ON

Red LED = ON

HRN-35

Normal state

Umin<Un<Umax

Green LED = ON

Red LED = OFF

Description

HRN-33, HRN-37

HRN-63, HRN-67

A1 A2

HRN-34

Normal state

Umin<Un<Umax

Green LED = ON

Red LED = OFF

Exceeded Umax(overvoltage)

Drop below Umin(undervoltage)

Un>Umax or Un<Umax

Green LED = OFF

Red LED = ON

Exceeded Umax(overvoltage)

Un>Umax

Green LED = ON

Red LED = ON

HRN-63, HRN-67

Exceeded Umax(overvoltage)

Un>Umax

Green LED = ON

Red LED = ON

Drop below Umin(undervoltage)

Un<Umin

Green LED = ON

Red LED = OFF

HRN-64

Drop below Umin(undervoltage)

Un<Umin

Green LED = OFF

Red LED = ON

Supply/monitoring voltage

HRN-35

A1 A2

Adjusting of upper value Umax

Adjusting of delay

Adjusting of bottom value Umin

Indication

Adjusting of upper value Umax

Adjusting of delay

Adjusting of bottom value Umin

Exceeded Umax(overvoltage)

Un>Umax

Green LED = OFF

Red LED = ON

Drop below Umin(undervoltage)

Un<Umin

Green LED = ON

Red LED = OFF

Supply/monitoring voltage

Indication

25 26 28

Output contact for Umin

15 16 18

15 16 18

Output contact

Output contact for Umax

Function HRN-33, 34, 35, 37 (band voltage relay)

>

>

HRN-33,HRN-37

HRN-35

Hysteresis

Hysteresis

Hysteresis

Hysteresis

HRN-34

Legend:

Hysteresis

Hysteresis

Umax - upper adjustable level of voltage

Un - measured voltage

Umin - bottom adjustable level of voltage

15-18 - switching contact of output relay No.1

25-28 - switching contact of output relay No. 2

LED ≥ Un - indication green

LED U - indication red

Monitoring relay series HRN-3x monitors level of voltage in single - phase circuits. Monitored voltage serves also as supply voltage. It is possible to set two indipendent (all occurrences) levels of voltage, when exceeded the output is activated. HRN-33 and HRN-34 - in normal state the output relay is permanently switched. It switches off when there is a limit settings. This combination of linkage of the output relay is advantageous when the full failure of supply (monitored) voltage is considered to be a faulty state in the same way as a decrease of voltage within the set level. Output relay is in both situations always switched off .

Diff erently HRN-35 version uses indipendent relay for each level, in normal state it is switched off . If the upper level is exceeded (for example overvoltage) 1 relay switches on, when the bottom level (e.g.

undervoltage) is exceeded 2 relay switches. It is thus possible to see the particular faulty state.

To eliminate short peaks in the main the time delay, which is possible to be set in range 0 - 10 s, is used. It functions when changing from normal to faulty state and prevents unavailing pulsation of the output relay caused by parasitive peaks. Time delay doesn´t apply when changing from faulty to normal state, but hysteresis (1-6% depends on the voltage setting) apply. Thanks to changeover contacts it is possible to get other confi gurations and functions according to actual requirements of the application.

Function HRN-63, 64, 67 (over/under voltage relay)

HRN-63, 64, 67

Legend:

Umax - upper adjustable level of voltage

Un - measured voltage

Umin - bottom adjustable level of voltage

15-18 - switching contact of output relay

LED U> - indication red LED

Monitoring relay line HRN-6x serves to monitor levels of voltage in single-phase or DC circuits.

Monitored voltage is in the same time also supply voltage. It is possible to set two indipendent levels of voltage. When Umax is exceeded, output is activated. In case voltage level falls below Umin, output is deactivated. This combination is advantageous when full absence of supply voltage is understood as faulty state. as well as voltage drop in the frames of set level. To eliminate short voltage peaks in the main there is time delay which can be set in a range of 0-10 sec. Such delay applies in case of going from overvoltage to undervoltage. In case of returning from undervoltage to overvoltage this delay doesn’t apply. Thanks to changeover output contacts it is possible to reach various confi gurations and functions according to requirements or an application.

63

Relay for monitoring phase sequence and failure HRN-55, HRN-55N

!

Replacement for HRN-51 and HRN -51N

!

Relay monitors phase sequence and failure, exceeding of monitored voltage in 3 phase main

!

HRN-55 - supply from all phases, which means that function of relay is applicable also if one phase fails

!

HRN-55N - supply L1-N, it means that relay also monitors break of neutral point

!

Fixed delay T1 (500ms) and adjustable delay T2 (0.1-10s)

!

Faulty state is indicated by LED and output contact of relay is OFF.

!

Output contact: 1x changeover / SPDT 16 A / 250 V AC1

!

1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting

EAN code

HRN-55

HRN-55N

8595188137225

8595188137232

Technical parameters

Monitoring terminals:

Supply terminals:

Voltage:

Level Umax:

Level Umin:

Burden:

Hysteresis:

Max. permanent:

Peak overload <1ms:

Time delay T1:

Time delay T2:

Output

Number of contacts:

Current rating:

Breaking capacity:

Inrush current:

Switching voltage:

Min. breaking capacity DC:

Output indication:

Mechanical life:

Electrical life (AC1):

Other information

Operating temperature:

Storage temperature:

Electrical strength:

Operating position:

Mounting:

Protection degree:

Overvoltage cathegory:

Pollution degree:

Max. cable size (mm 2 ):

HRN-55 HRN-55N

L1, L2, L3 L1, L2, L3,N

L1, L2, L3 L1, N

3x400 V / 50 Hz 3x400V/230V / 50 Hz

125 % Un

75% Un

max. 2 VA

5%

AC 3x460 V AC 3x265 V

AC 3x500 V AC 3x288 V max. 500 ms adjustable 0.1-10 s

Description

Indication

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)

8 A / AC1

2500 VA / AC1, 240 W / DC

10 A

250 V AC1 / 24 V DC

500 mW red LED

1x10 7

1x10 5

Output contact

Symbol

HRN-55

L1

-20 °C to + 55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)

-30 °C to + 70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)

4 kV (supply - output) any

DIN rail EN 60715

IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals

III.

2 solid wire max. 2x2.5 or 1x4 with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5 ( AWG 12)

90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)

67 g (2.36 oz.) 66 g (2.3 oz.)

EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1

3

~

U

L2 L3

HRN-55N

L1 N

3

~

U

L2 L3

Function

Function description

Relay in 3-phase main monitors correct phase sequence and failure of any phase. Green LED is permanently ON and indicates presence of power supply voltage. In case of phase failure or exceeding voltage level red LED fl ashes and relay breaks. When changing to faulty state, time delay applies. Time delay setting is set by a potentiometer on front panel of the device. In case of incorrect phase sequence red LED shines permanently and relay is open. In case supply voltage falls below 60% Un (OFF lower level)relay immediately opens with no delay and faulty state is indicated by red LED.

HRN-55: thanks to supply form all phases, this relay is able to stay operational also if one phase is out.

HRN-55N -supply L1-N, means that relay monitor also failure in neutral wire.

Umax

Umin

UOFF

L1

Umax

Umin

UOFF

L2

Umax

Umin

UOFF

L3

15-18 green LED red LED

16 18

15

16 18

15

L1

L2 L3

Connection

HRN-55

Hysteresis

16

15 18

L1

L2 L3

16

15 18

Supply/monitoring terminals

Adjusting of time delay T2

HRN-55N

Hysteresis

L1 N

L2 L3

16

15 18

64

Relay for monitoring over/under voltage in 3-phase mains HRN-57, HRN-57N

EAN code

HRN-57

HRN-57N

8595188137256

8595188137249

Technical parameters

Monitoring terminals:

Supply terminals:

Voltage:

Level Umax:

Level Umin:

Burden:

Hysteresis:

Max. permanent overload:

Peak overload <1ms:

Time delay T1:

Time delay T2:

Output

Number of contacts:

Current rating:

Breaking capacity:

Inrush current:

Switching voltage:

Min. breaking capacity DC:

Output indication:

Mechanical life:

Electrical life (AC1):

Other information

Operating temperature:

Storage temperature:

Electrical strength:

Operating position:

Mounting:

Protection degree:

Overvoltage cathegory:

Pollution degree:

Max. cable size (mm 2 ):

HRN-57 HRN-57N

L1, L2, L3 L1, L2, L3,N

L1, L2, L3 L1, N

3x400 V / 50 Hz 3x400V/230V / 50 Hz

105 - 125 % Un

75 - 95 % Un

max. 2 VA

5 %

AC 3x460V AC 3x265V

AC 3x500V AC 3x288V max. 500 ms adjustable 0.1-10 s

!

It serves to monitor voltage in a switchboard, protection of devices in 3-phase main

!

It monitors value of voltage in 3-phase main

!

It is possible to set upper and lower level independently

!

Adjustable time delay eliminated short voltage peaks and failures in the main

!

The device is supplied from monitored voltage

!

Faulty state is indicated by red LED and by breaking output relay contact

!

Output contact 1x changeover/ SPDT 8 A /250 V AC1

!

Relay doesn’t monitor phase sequence

!

HRN-57 – supply from all phases, means that relay is functional also in case of failure in one phase

!

HRN-57N -supply L1-N, means that relay monitors also failure of neutral wire, replacement for HRN-52

!

1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting

Description

Supply indication

Adjusting of time delay T2

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)

8 A / AC1

2500 VA / AC1, 240 W / DC

10 A

250 V AC1 / 24 V DC

500 mW red LED

1x10 7

1x10 5

Output contact

Symbol

HRN-57

L1

-20 °C to + 55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)

-30 °C to + 70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)

4 kV (supply - output) any

DIN rail EN 60715

IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals

III.

2 solid wire max.2x 2.5 or 1x4, with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5 ( AWG 12)

90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)

68 g (2.4 oz.) 66 g (2.3 oz.)

EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1

3

~

U

L2 L3

HRN-57N

L1 N

3

~

U

L2 L3

Function

Function description

Relay in 3-phase main monitors size of phase voltage. It is possible to set two independent voltage levels and thus it is possible to set two independent voltage levels and monitor e.g. undervoltage and overvoltage independently. In normal state when voltage is within set levels, output relay is closed and red LED shines. In case voltage exceeds or falls below the set levels, output relay breaks and red LED shines (LED indicates faulty state – fl ashes when timing)

In case supply voltage falls below 60 % Un (UOFF lower level) relay immediately breaks without delay and faulty state is indicated by red LED.

In case timing is in progress and faulty state is indicated, timing is immediately stopped.

15-18

green LED

red LED

Umax

Umin

UOFF

L1

Umax

Umin

UOFF

L2

Umax

Umin

UOFF

L3

Connection

HRN-57

16 18

15

16 18

15

L1 N

L2 L3

Hysteresis

16

15 18

L1

L2 L3

16

15 18

Supply / monitoring terminals

Adjusting upper value Umax

Hysteresis

Indication

Adjusting bottom value Umin

HRN-57N

L1 N

L2 L3

16

15 18

65

Relay for monitoring over/under voltage, phase sequence and failure HRN-54, HRN-54N

EAN code

HRN-54

HRN-54N

8595188137201

8595188137218

Technical parameters

Supply and measuring

Supply terminals:

Supply/measured voltage:

Level Umax:

Level Umin:

Burden:

Hysteresis:

Max. permanent overload:

Peak overload <1ms:

Time delay T1:

Time delay T2:

Output

Number of contacts:

Current rating:

Breaking capacity:

Inrush current:

Switching voltage:

Min. breaking capacity DC:

Indication of state:

Mechanical life:

Electrical life (AC1):

Other information

Operating temperature:

Storage temperature:

Electrical strength:

Operating position:

Mounting:

Protection degree:

Overvoltage cathegory:

Pollution degree:

Max. cable size (mm 2 ):

HRN-54 HRN-54N

L1, L2, L3 L1, L2, L3,N

L1, L2, L3 L1, N

3x400 V / 50 Hz 3x400V/230V / 50 Hz

105-125 % Un

75-95 % Un

max. 2 VA

5%

AC 3x460 V AC 3x265 V

AC 3x500 V AC 3x288 V max. 500 ms adjustable 0.1-10 s

!

It serves to monitor voltage, phase failure and sequence in switchboards, protection of devices in 3-phase mains

!

It is possible to set upper and lower level of monitoring voltage

!

Adjustable time delay eliminates short voltage peaks and failures in the main

!

Supply is done from monitored voltage

!

Faulty state is indicated by red LED and by opening of output relay contact

!

Output contact 1x changeover / SPDT 8 A /250 V AC1

!

In case supply voltage falls below 60 %Un (Uoff lower level) relay immediately opens without delay

!

HRN-54 –supply from all phases which means that relay is functional also in case when one phase is faulty

!

HRN-54N –supply L1-N, means that relay monitors also failure of neutral wire

!

1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting

Description

Supply indication

Adjusting of time delay T2

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)

8 A / AC1

2500 VA / AC1, 240 W / DC

10 A

250 V AC1 / 24 V DC

500 mW red LED

1x10 7

1x10 5

Output contact

Symbol

HRN-54

L1

-20 °C to + 55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)

-30 °C to + 70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)

4 kV (supply - output) any

DIN rail EN 60715

IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals

III.

2 solid wire max. 2x2.5 or 1x4, with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5

90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)

69 g 67 g

EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1

Function

3

~

U

L2 L3

HRN-54N

L1

N

3

~

U

L2 L3

Function description

Relay in 3-phase main monitors size of phase voltage. It is possible to set two independent voltage levels and thus it is possible to set two independent voltage levels and monitor e.g. undervoltage and overvoltage independently. In normal state when voltage is within set levels, output relay is closed and red LED shines. In case voltage exceeds or falls below the set levels, output relay opens and red LED shines ( LED indicates faulty state – fl ashes when timing).

In case supply voltage falls below 60 % Un (UOFF lower level)relay immediately opens without delay and faulty state is indicated by red LED.

In case timing is in progress and faulty state is indicated, timing is immediately stopped.

Umax

Umin

UOFF

L1

Umax

Umin

UOFF

L2

Umax

Umin

UOFF

L3

15-18 green LED red LED

16 18

15

16 18

15

L1 N

L2 L3

Connection

Hysteresis

16

15 18

HRN-54

L1

L2 L3

16

15 18

Supply/monitoring terminals

Adjusting upper value Umax

Adjusting bottom value Umin

Hysteresis

Output indication

HRN-54N

L1 N

L2 L3

16

15 18

66

Relay for monitoring phase sequence and failure HRN-56

Monitoring terminals:

Supply terminals:

Supply/measured voltage:

Level Umin:

Level Uoff :

Burden:

Hysteresis:

Max. permanent overload:

Peak overload <1s:

Time delay T1:

Time delay T2:

Output

Number of contacts:

Current rating:

Breaking capacity:

Inrush current:

Switching voltage:

Indication of state:

Mechanical life:

Electrical life (AC1):

Other information

Operating temperature:

Storage temperature:

Electrical strength:

Operating position:

Mounting:

Protection degree:

Technical parameters

Overvoltage cathegory:

Pollution degree:

Max. cable size (mm

2

):

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

Function description

!

Relay monitors phase sequence and failure (e.g. control of correct motor winding etc.)

!

Relay is designated for monitoring of 3-phase mains

!

Supply from all phases which means that relay is functional also in case of one phase failure

!

Supply and monitored supply Un:

1-MODULE

HRN-56/208 - 3x120V

HRN-56/208 - 3x208 V

HRN-56/240 - 3x240 V

HRN-56/400 - 3x400 V

3-MODULE

HRN-56/480 - 3x480 V

HRN-56/575 - 3x575 V

!

!

!

!

Fixed time delay T1 (500ms) and adjustable time delay T2 (0 -10s)

Faulty state is indicated by LED and by opening of output relay contact

Output contact 1x changeover/SPDT 8 A /250V AC1

1-MODULE, 3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting

EAN code

HRN-56 /120V

HRN-56 /208V

HRN-56 /240V

HRN-56 /400V

HRN-56 /480V

HRN-56 /575V

8595188130745

8595188130134

8595188130141

8595188130158

8595188130189

8595188130196

HRN-56

120 208 240 400 480 575

L1, L2, L3

L1, L2, L3

3 x 120V/50Hz 3 x 208V/50Hz 3 x 240V/50Hz 3 x 400V/50Hz 3 x 480V/50Hz 3 x 575V/50Hz adjustable 70 - 95 % Un

60 % Un

max. 2 VA

5%

AC 3 x 160V AC 3 x 276V AC 3 x 460V AC 3 x 550V AC 3 x 660V

AC 3 x 180V AC 3 x 300V AC 3 x 500V AC 3 x 600V AC 3 x 700V max. 500 ms adjustable 0 -10 s

Description

1-MODULE

Indication

Adjusting of time delay

L1

L2 L3

16

15 18

Supply terminal

Adjusting value Umin

Output contacts

1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)

8 A / AC1

2500 VA / AC1, 240 W / DC

10 A

250 V AC1 / 24 V DC red LED

1x10 7

1x10 5

3-MODULE front panel

Indication

Adjusting value Umin

Adjusting of time delay

-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)

-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)

4 kV (supply - output) any

DIN rail EN 60715

IP 40 from front panel / IP 40 from front panel /

IP 10 terminals IP 20 terminals

III.

2

max.1x 2.5, max.2x1.5

solid wire max. 2x2.5 or 1x4,with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5 with sleeve max. 1x1.5

90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝) 90 x 52 x 65 mm (3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝)

66 g 66 g 66 g 67 g 108 g 108 g

EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1

Symbol

3

~

L1

U

L3 L2

Function

16 18

15

Connection

L1

L2 L3

16

15 18

L1 L2 L3

16 16 15 15 18 18

Hysteresis

Umin

UOFF

L1

Relay in 3-phase main monitors correct phase sequence and phase failure. Green LED shines permanently and indicates energization. In case of phase failure red LED fl ashes and relay turns off . When changing to faulty state, time delay applies

– delay setting is done by potentiometer on the front panel of the device. In case of incorrect phase sequence, red LED shines permanently and relay is open. In case supply voltage falls below 60% Un (Uoff lower level) relay immediately opens with no delay and faulty state is indicate by red LED.

HRN-56: Thanks to supply from all phases, relay is functional also in case of one phase failure.

UOFF

L2

UOFF

L3

15-18 t1 t2 green LED red LED

67

Relay for complete monitoring 3-phase mains HRN-43, HRN-43N

EAN code

HRN-43 /230V

HRN-43 /400V **

HRN-43 /24V **

HRN-43N /230V

HRN-43N /400V

HRN-43N /24V

8594030337660

8595188121316

8594030338087

8594030338216

8595188120258

8594030338094

Technical parameters

Supply

Supply terminals:

Voltage range:

Burden:

Supply voltage tolerance:

Measuring circuit

Nominal voltage:

Terminals:

Upper level Umax:

Bottom level Umin:

Max. permanent overload:

Hysteresis:

Asymmetry:

Peak overload <1ms:

Time delay t1:

Time delay t2:

Accuracy

Set. accuracy (mechanical):

Repeat accuracy:

Temperature dependance:

Limit values tolerance:

Output

Number of contacts:

Current rating:

Breaking capacity:

Inrush current:

Switching voltage:

Min. breaking capacity DC:

Mechanical life:

Electrical life (AC1):

Other information

Operating temperature:

Storage temperature:

Electrical strength:

Operating position:

Mounting:

Protection degree:

Overvoltage cathegory:

Pollution degree:

Max. cable size (mm 2 ):

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

HRN-43 HRN-43N

A1 - A2

AC 230 V, AC 400 V, AC/DC 24 V / (AC 50-60Hz)

max. 4.5 VA

-15 %; +10 %

3x400V / 50Hz

L1. L2. L3

240–480V

3x400V / 230V / 50Hz

L1. L2. L3, N

138–276V

35 - 99 % Umax

3x480 V adjustable 5 % or 10 % of set value

5 - 20 %

600 < 1ms 350V < 1ms fi xed, max. 200 ms adjustable 0-10 s

!

Monitoring 3-phase mains:

- voltage in 2 levels (undervoltage and overvoltage) in range 138-276V or 280-480 V (3x400 V)

- phase asymmetry

- phase sequence

- phase failure

!

Function “MEMORY” - for return from the faulty into normal state press button „RESET“ located on the front panel

!

HRN-43 - for circuits 3x400 V (without neutral)

!

HRN-43N - for circuits 3x400/230 V (with neutral)

!

2 output relays, selectable function of 2nd relay (independent / parallel)

!

Fixed (t1) and adjustable (t2) delay to eliminate short voltage drops and peaks

!

Galvanically separated supply voltage AC 400 V, AC 230 V, AC/DC 24 V

!

Output contact: 2x changeover/ DPDT 16 A / 250 V AC1

!

3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting

Description

Supply voltage

Indication overvoltage/ undervoltage, failure

Sequence indication

Asymmetry indication

Selection of function MEMORY

Function of 2. relay

(1.-paralel, 2.-independent)

Hysteresis from faulty to normal state

Time pause t2

Umax adjusting

Asymmetry 5-20 % setting

Umin adjusting

Symbol

5 %

<1 %

< 0.1 % / °C

5 %

2x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)

16 A / AC1

4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC

30 A / < 3 s

250 V AC1 / 24 V DC

500 mW

3x10 7

0.7x10

5

L1

L2

L3

HRN-43

A1

3

~

U

A2

Connection

HRN-43N

16 18 26 28

15 25

L1

L2

L3

N

HRN-43N

A1

3

~

U

A2

HRN-43

16 18 26 28

15 25

-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)

-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)

4 kV (supply - output) any

DIN rail EN 60715

IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals

III.

2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x1.5 (AWG 12)

90 x 52 x 65 mm (3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝)

239 g (8.4 oz.)

EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1

L1

L2

L3

N

Un

A1 A2 N L1 L2 L3

Un

A1 A2 L1 L2 L3

16 15 18 28 25 26 16 15 18 28 25 26

68

Relay for complete monitoring 3-phase mains HRN-43, HRN-43N

Function

Overvoltage - undervoltage

L1

Umax

Umin

L2

Uma x

Umin

L3

Uma x

Umin

RESET t1 t2 t1

15-18

LED

25-28

Hysteresis t1 t2 t1

Hysteresis t2 t1

Legend:

L1, L2, L3 - 3-phase voltage

RESET - press of the button on frontal panel t1 - time delay, fi xed t2 - time delay, adjustable 0-10 sec

15-18 output relay 1

25-28 output relay 2

LED U - indication overvoltage / undervoltage

Selection of 2nd relay function:

In order to monitor 2 levels of voltage, it is possible to select if output relay will respond to each level individually (see the diagram) or both relays will switch in parallel way (see diagram “phase sequence”).

Selection via DIP switch.

MEMORY - ON (DIP-2)

Phase sequence

L1

L2

L3

RESET

15-18

(25-28)

LED t1

L3

L2 t1

L2

L3 t1

L3

L2 t1

L2

L3 t1

Legend:

L1, L2, L3 - 3-phase voltage

RESET - press of the button on frontal panel t1 - time delay, fi xed t2 - time delay, adjustable 0-10 sec

15-18 output relay 1

25-28 output relay 2

LED indication of phase sequence

Selection of 2nd relay function:

The function is not implied when monitoring phase sequence, the relays are switched in parallel way.

MEMORY - ON (DIP-2)

Asymmetry - phase failure

L1

100%

0%

L2

100%

0%

L3

100%

0%

Legend:

L1, L2, L3 - 3-phase voltage

RESET - press of the button on frontal panel t1 - time pause, fi xed t2 - time pause, adjustable 0-10 sec

- adjustable asymmetry 5-20%

15-18 output contact of relay 1

25-28 output contact of relay 2

LED - asymmetry indicator

100%

0%

RESET

Hysteresis t1 t2 t1 t2 t1 t2 t1 t2 t1 t2 t1

Selection of 2nd relay function:

The function is not implied when monitoring phase sequence, the relays are switched in parallel way.

DIP switch is ignored.

15-18

(25-28)

LED

MEMORY - ON (DIP-2)

Function description

Relay is designated to monitor 3-phase circuits. Type HRN-43N controls voltage towards neutral wire, type HRN-43 controls interphase voltage. Relay can monitor voltage in two levels (overvoltage/ undervoltage), phase assymetry , sequence and failure. Each faulty state is indicated by individual LED. By DIP switch (No.3) it is possible to defi ne function of the other relay – independent function (1x for overvoltage, 1x for undervoltage) or in parallel. Time delays t1(fi xed) – when changing from faulty to normal state or when de-energized and t2 (adjustable) when changing from normal to faulty state. These delays prevent incorrect conduct and oscillation of output device during short voltage peaks in the main or during gradual voltage decline into normal.

Voltage control

Set upper level Umax in range 138-276 V (or 240 - 480 V for HRN-43) and lower level Umin in range 35-99% Umax. In case any phase passes this range, after a delay which eliminated short voltage peaks, contact opens. Output contact again switches after returning back into monitored voltage range and exceeding fi xed hysteresis (which is adjustable in two values by DIP switch).

Phase sequence

Monitors correctness of phase sequence. In case of unwanted change output contact breaks. In case of energization of a device with incorrect phase sequence, contact stays opened.

Asymmetry

Rate of assymetry between individual phases is set in a range of 5-20%. In case set asymmetry is exceeded, output relay breaks and LED indicating asymmetry shines. Delays t1, t2 and hysteretic are applicable when returning to normal state.

69

Optical signaling of three-phase network MPS-1

!

!

!

!

!

!

!

Used for optical signaling of the voltage level in three phases

Each phase features LED signaling broken down by color into voltage levels:

- voltage in tolerance of +/-15% - green

- overvoltage - red

- undervoltage - yellow

- voltage < 50V - LED not illuminated

Four-wire connection - L1, L2, L3, N

Monitors phase voltages against neutral wire

Not dependent upon order of phases

Four-wire connection - L1, L2, L3, N

In 1-MODUL design, DIN rail mounting

EAN code

MPS-1 8595188145978

Technical parameters

Supply voltage:

Supply voltage tolerance:

Power consumption:

Indication:

LED not illuminated:

LED illuminated:

- yellow

- green

- red

Other information

Design:

Mounting:

Pracovní poloha:

Coverage:

Overvoltage category:

Contamination level:

Working temperature:

Storage temperature:

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

MPS-1

AC 3x400/230V, 50/60Hz

+20%, -75% max.1.0VA / 0,5W

0 ... 50V / 45 ... 0V

50 ... 207V / 195,5 ... 45V

207 ... 264,5V / 253 ... 195,5V

264,5 ... 276V / 276 ... 253V

1 module

DIN rail EN60715 any

Panel IP40, terminals IP10

III.

2

-20 ... +55°C

-30 ... +70°C

90x17.6x64mm

58 g

EN60947-1, EN60947-5-1

Connection

Description of device

Function

After connecting the supply voltage, the LED illuminates - the color corresponds to the voltage size of individual phases. If the phase voltage drops under 40V ( phase outage), the corresponding LED is not illuminated.

Description of function

Terminal L1

Terminal L2

L1 N

L2 L3

L1 N

L2 L3

Terminal N

Terminal L3

Indication L1

Indication L2

Indication L3

70

Current monitoring relay PRI-32

!

Current transformer is a part of the product. Inside this transformer there is a wire which senses the volume of fl owing current

!

This construction reduces thermal stress of product when compared with conventional solutions with inbuilt shunt, and increases current range up to 20 Amps, and galvanically separates monitored circuit

!

For heating bars in sliding rails, heating cables, indication of current fl ow, controlling of 1-phase motor consumption ...

!

Universal supply AC 24 - 240 V and DC 24 V

!

Supply is galvanic separated from measuring current

!

Current exceeding – current fl owing through monitored wire must not exceed 100 A

!

Output contact: 1x changeover/SPDT 8 A

!

Clamp terminals

!

1-phase, 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting

EAN code

PRI-32 8595188121965

Technical parameters

Supply circuit

Supply terminals:

Voltage range:

Burden:

Operating range:

Measuring circuit

Current range:

Current adjustment:

Accuracy

Setting accuracy (mechanical):

Repeat accuracy:

Temperature dependancy:

Limit values tolerance:

Overload capacity:

Output

Number of contacts:

Current rating:

Breaking capacity:

Output indication:

Other information

Operating temperature:

Storage temperature:

Electrical strength:

Operating position:

Mounting:

Protection degree:

Overvoltage cathegory:

Pollution degree:

Max. cable size (mm 2 ):

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

PRI-32

A1 - A2

AC 24 - 240 V, DC 24 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz) max. 1.5 VA

-15 %; +10 %

1 - 20 A (AC 50 Hz) potentiometer

5 %

<1 %

< 0.1 % / °C

5% max.100 A /10 s

1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)

8 A / AC1

2500 VA / AC1, 240 W / DC red LED

-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)

-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)

4 kV (supply - output) any

DIN rail EN 60715

IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals

III.

2 solid wire max. 2x2.5 or 1x4, with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5

90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)

68 g (2.4 oz.)

EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1

(AWG 12)

Description

Supply indication

Controlling cable outlet

(max. diameter 6mm)

Symbol

A1

A2

16 18

15

A1 A2

16

15 18

Connection

Un

A1 A2

16

15 18

Supply terminals

Output indication

Adjustment of access

current

Output contact

Function

Monitoring relay PRI-32 serves to monitor current level in single phase AC circuits. Due to its fl uent adjustment of release current, it is predestined for applications with necessity of current fl ow indication, and can be used as precedence relay. Output relay is off in normal state. In case the set current level is exceeded, it switches. Multivoltage supply is an advantage.

Imax

I

15-18

LED

Un

Hysteresis

71

Current monitoring relay PRI-51

EAN code

PRI-51 /0.5A

PRI-51 /1A

PRI-51 /2A

PRI-51 /5A

PRI-51 /8A

PRI-51 /16A

8595188142885

8595188124904

8595188124911

8595188124928

8595188124935

8595188124942

Technical parameters

Supply circuit

Supply terminals:

Voltage range:

Burden:

Supply voltage tolerance:

Measuring circuit

Load:

Current range:

PRI-51

A1 - A2

AC 24 - 240 V a DC 24 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz) max. 1.5 VA

-15 %; +10 %

PRI-51/0.5

AC0.05-0.5A

(AC50Hz)

PRI-51/1

AC0.1-1A

(AC 50Hz) between B1 - B2

PRI-51/2

AC0.2-2A

(AC 50Hz)

PRI-51/5

AC0.5-5A

(AC 50Hz)

PRI-51/8

AC0.8-8A

(AC 50Hz)

PRI-51/16

AC1.6-16A

(AC 50Hz)

!

It serves for monitoring of heating in rail-switches, heating cables, consumption of one-phase motors, indicates current fl ow

!

Flexible adjustment by potentiometer, choice of 6 ranges:

AC 0.05-0.5A; AC 0.1-1A; AC 0.2-2A; AC 0.5-5A; AC 0.8-8A; AC 1.6-16A

!

Adjustable delay 0.5 - 10 s to eliminate short current peaks

!

It is possible to use for current scanning from current transformer - up to 600 A!

!

Universal supply AC 24 - 240 V and DC 24 V

!

Supply is not galvanically separated from measured current, it must be in the same phase

!

Output contact: 1x changeover/ SPDT 8 A

!

1-phase, 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting, replacement for PRI-31

Description

Supply terminals

Adjusting current in % In

A1 A2

B1 B2

Measuring input (only AC)

Output Indication

Adjusting time pause

Recomended current transformers:

Max. permanent current:

Inrush overload <1ms:

Current adjustment:

Time delay:

Accuracy

Setting accuracy (mechanical):

Repeat accuracy:

Temperature dependancy:

Limit values tolerance:

Hysteresis (fault to OK):

Output

Number of contacts:

Current rating:

Breaking capacity:

Output indication:

Other information

Operating temperature:

Storage temperature:

Electrical strength:

Operating position:

Mounting:

Protection degree:

Overvoltage cathegory:

Pollution degree:

Max. cable size (mm 2 ):

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

Function

0.5A

applicable also for current transformer more information page 87

1 A 8 A 2 A 5 A

100 A potentiometer adjustable 0.5-10 s

5 %

<1 %

< 0.1 % / °C

5 % (10% for 0.05-0.5A range)

5 %

1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)

8 A / AC1

2500 VA / AC1, 240 W / DC green / red LED

16 A

-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)

-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)

4 kV (supply - output) any

DIN rail EN 60715

IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals

III.

2 solid wire max. 2x2.5 or 1x4,with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x1.5 (AWG 12)

90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)

58 g ( 2 oz.)

EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1

Symbol

A1 A2

B1 B2

16 18

Example of an order

15

15 18

Connection

L

N

16

Un

16

A1 A2

B1 B2

15 18

Example Connection: PRI-51 with current transformer for current range increase

Load

Hysteresis

A1 A2

B1 B2

16

Un

15 18

I s

Output contact

I p

Current transformer

Always specify all reference name of current relay according to required range, for example PRI-51/5.

Monitoring relay PRI-51 serves to monitor current level in one-phase AC circuits. Gradual setting of actuating current of monitoring relay enables many diff erent applications. Output relay is in normal state opened. After the set current level is reached, relay closes after the set delay (0.5-10s).

When returning from faulty to normal state there is a hystersis (5%). Multi-voltage of this relay is an advantage. It is possible to monitor load which doesn´t have the same supply as monitoring relay PRI-51.

Range of PRI-51 can be increased by an external current transformer.

72

Current monitoring relay PRI-52

!

Relay is designated for:

- distant device diagnostic (short circuit, take-off increasing)

- preferred (priority) relay – two appliances (boiler and fl oor heating) operating on one phase, but never run

together – prevention against current overload and circuit breaker tripping. Enables to save your main breaker expenses.

- current tranzit indicator – informs about heating activation, ceramic hob, ventilator….

- changing over of appliances according to inverter‘s (converter) output by photocell applications

!

!

NEW – hole for threaded conductor passes through the body of device

Part of device is current transformer, which is sensing size of current in threaded conductor

!

!

Possible to use also for sensing of current up to 600A from external current transformer

Slight setting (by potentiometer ) of tripping current – range AC 0.5….25A

!

!

Slight setting (by potentiometer) of delay – adjustable in range 0.5…..10s

Supply voltage AC 230V

!

!

Output contact 1x changeover /SPDT 8A (AC1)

1-phase version, 1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting, clamp terminals

Device describtion

EAN code

PRI-52 8595188136556

Technical parameters

Supply

Supply terminals:

Voltage range:

Tolerance of voltage range:

Burden (apparent):

Burden (loss):

Measuring circuit:

Current range:

Maximal permanent current:

Inrush overload <1s:

Current adjustment:

Time delay:

Accuracy

Setting accuracy (mechanical):

Repeat accuracy:

Temperature dependance:

Limit values tolerance:

Hysteresis:

Output

Number of contacts:

Current rating:

Switching power:

Output indication:

Other information

Operating temperature:

Storing temperature:

Electrical strengh:

Operating position:

Mounting:

Protection degree:

Overvoltage cathegory:

Pollution level:

Max. cable size (mm 2 ):

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

PRI-52

A1 - A2

AC 230 V / 50 - 60 Hz

-15 %; +10 % max. 5 VA max. 1.4 W

AC 0.5 ... 25A / 50 Hz

25A

100 A

potentiometer

adjustable 0.5 ... 10 s

Supply terminals

Supply voltage indication

Hole for threaded conductor

(max. Ø 5.8 mm/0.23

˝

)

Adjusting of time delay

A1 A2

5

0.5

10 15

20

25

In 0.5 - 25A

Output indication

Adjusting of current in A

10 %

<1 %

< 0.2 % / °C

10 %

0.25A

16

15 18

Output contact

1x changeover /SPDT (AgNi/Silver Alloy)

8 A / AC1

2500 VA / AC1, 240 W / DC

red LED

Symbol Connection

-20 °C to +55 °C ( -4 °F to 131 °F )

-30°C to +70 °C ( -22 °F to158°F )

4 kV (supply - output) any

DIN rail EN 60715

IP40 from front panel / IP10 terminals

III.

2 max. 2x2.5, max. 1x4/ with sleeve max. 1x2.5, max. 2x1.5 (AWG 12)

90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)

64 g (2.26 oz.)

EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1

A1

A2

16 18

15

Un

A1 A2

16

15 18

I

Un

A1 A2

I p

I s current transformer

16

15 18

Connection example: PRI-52 with current transformer for increasing of current range.

Functions

Imax

I

15-18

LED I > t hysteresis

Monitoring relay PRI-52 serves for monitoring of current level in 1-phase AC circuits. Slight setting of release current level designates this relay for many various applications. Output relay is in normal status switched off . When set current level is overrun, relay get closed after preset delay. By return from error to normal status is used hysteresis.

PRI-52 range is possible to increase with external current transformer.

Adventage of PRI-52 is that the hole for threaded conductor is located under the level of covering in the switchboard – thanks that, threaded conductor is not accessible for unwanted manipulation.

73

Three-phase relay PRI-53

6

EAN code

PRI-53/1

PRI-53/5

8595188142137

8595188142144

Technical parameters

Supply terminals:

Current monitoring terminals:

1st phase:

2nd phase:

3rd phase:

Supply voltage:

Tolerance of voltage range:

Operating AC frequency:

Burden: (max):

Rated current In:

Current level - I:

Overload capacity

- continuous:

- max.3s:

Diff erence:

Delay (until failure):

Output relay - contact:

AC contact capacity:

DC contact capacity:

Mechanical life:

Other information

Operating temperature:

Storing temperature:

Electrical strengh

(power supply – relay contact):

Overvoltage cathegory:

Pollution level:

Protection degree:

Max. cable size (mm 2 ):

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

PRI-53/1

A1, A2

PRI-53/5

I1, I2

I3, I4

I5, I6

24 - 240V AC/DC

± 10%

45 - 65 Hz

3VA / 1.2W

AC 1A AC 5A adjustable 40 - 120% In

!

!

!

!

!

!

!

!

!

!

It is intended for monitoring the current in three-phase devices (e.g. cranes, motors, etc.)

24-240 V AC/DC power supply galvanically separated from the circuit of the monitored current

Adjustable current level in % of In:

Fixed diff erence level

Adjustable delay level (when exceeding the preset limit)

Adjustable function:

- UNDER - monitors the drop in the strength of current below the preset value I

- OVER - exceeding the preset value I

2 types depending on the strength of rated current In (1A, 5A)

6-MODULE, DIN rail mounting

Output relay with 2 changeover contacts

Option of connecting via the current transformers to increase the value of the monitored current by up to 600 A

Connection

Example of connection: PRI - 53 with a current conversion transformer for increasing the current range.

N

L1

L2

L3

Un

A1 A2 I1 I2 I3 I4

LOAD

2A 10A

20A 50A fi x 1 % In adjustable 0.5 - 10s

2x schangeover / DPDT (AgNi) gilded

250V / 8 A, max. 2000VA

30V / 8A

3x10 6 at rated load

Device describtion

Supply voltage terminals

-20.. +55 °C

-30.. +70 °C

4 kV / 1 min.

III.

2

IP 40 from font panel / IP 20 terminal max 2 x 1.5mm

2 / 1 x 2.5mm

2

90 x 105 x 64 mm

208 g 208 g

EN 60255-6, EN 60255-27, EN 61000-6-2,

EN 61000-6-4

Supply voltage indication

Indication of exceeding the preset limit

Current level setting

UNDER / OVER function setting

16 15 18 28 25 26

A1 A2

PRI-53/1

I5 I6

16 15 18 28 25 26

I1 I2 I3 I4

Current monitoring terminals

I5 I6

Delay setting

Output contacts

Current monitoring

terminals

Functions

After the supply voltage is connected the green LED is on.

UNDER function:

If the strength of the monitored current in all phases exceeds the preset level I, the relay is triggered and the red

LED is off . If the strength of the monitored current drops in any phase below the level I, the relay is disconnected after the preset delay timing elapses and the red LED goes on. The red LED fl ashes during the delay.

If the strength of the monitored current returns above the level I + diff erence, the relay is triggered without delay and the red LED goes off .

OVER function:

If the strength of the monitored current is lower in all phases than the preset level I, the relay is disconnected and the red LED is off .

If the strength of the monitored current exceeds in any phase the level I, the relay is triggered after the preset delay timing elapses and the red LED goes on. The red LED fl ashes during the delay.

If the strength of the monitored current again drops below the level I - diff erence, the relay is disconnected without delay and the red LED goes off .

74

Current monitoring relay PRI-41, PRI-42

EAN code

PRI-41 /230V

PRI-41/24V

PRI-42 /230V

PRI-42 /24V

8595188140485

8595188140492

8595188140515

8595188140522

!

To monitor overloading / discharge ( machine, motor...), load sensing, diagnostics of remote device (interrunption, short circuit, current cunsumption increase...)

!

Monitors AC/DC 1-phase current in 3 ranges

!

Monitoring adjusted current in 2 independent levels

!

PRI-41: “HYSTERESIS” function and PRI-42: “WINDOW” function

!

function of 2nd relay (independent/parallel):

“MEMORY” function - manual reset.

“RESET” button on the frontal panel

!

Adjustable time delay for each level

!

Galvanically separated supply

!

Output contact: 1x changeover/ SPDT 16 A / 250 V AC1 for each current level

!

3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting

Technical parameters PRI-41 PRI-42

Description

Supply circuit

Supply terminals:

Voltage range:

Burden:

Operating range:

Measuring circuit

Ranges:

Terminals:

Input resistance:

Max. permanent current:

Inrush overload <1ms:

Time delay for Imax:

Time delay for Imin:

Accuracy

Measuring accuracy:

Repeat accuracy:

Temperature dependancy:

Limit values tolerance:

Hysteresis (fault to OK):

Output

Number of contacts:

Current rating:

Breaking capacity:

Inrush current:

Switching voltage:

Min. breaking capacity DC:

Output indication:

Mechanical life:

Electrical life (AC1):

Other information

Operating temperature:

Storage temperature:

Electrical strength:

Operating position:

Mounting:

Protection degree:

Overvoltage cathegory:

Pollution degree:

Max. cable size (mm 2 ):

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

A1 - A2

AC 230 V or AC / DC 24 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz) max. 4.5 VA

-15 %; +10 %

4 - 16 A (AC50Hz)

C - B1

5 mΩ

16 A

20 A

1.25 - 5 A (AC50Hz)

C - B2

11 mΩ

5 A

6.3 A adjustable 0-10 sec adjustable 0-10 sec

0.4 - 1.6 A (AC50Hz)

C - B3

50 mΩ

1.6 A

2 A

5 %

<1 %

< 0.1 % / °C

5 % selectable 5 % / 10 % changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)

16 A / AC1

4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC

30 A / < 3 s

250 V AC1 / 24 V DC

500 mW yellow LED

3x10

7

0.7x10

5

-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)

-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)

4 kV (supply - output) any

DIN rail EN 60715

IP 40 from front panel / IP20 terminals

III.

2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x1.5 (AWG 12)

90 x 52 x 65 mm (3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝)

239 g (8.4 oz.)

EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1

Meassured AC or DC

Supply indication

Indication Imax

Output indication

Indication Imin

Adjusting bottom level - Imin

Symbol

C

B1

B2

B3

Function

Un

Imax

I

Imin

15-18

25-28

15-18

25-28

RESET

LED > I

LED < I

LED

A1

A2

16 18 26 28

15 25

Hysteresis

Connection

Hysteresis

Un t1 - time delay for Imax

Adjusting upper level - Imax

1.25-5

4-16

MEMORY function

Function of 2nd relay

(1st-paralel, 2nd-independent)

Hysteresis from faulty to OK

I 0.4-1.6

normal state t2 - time delay for Imin

A1 A2 C B1 B2 B3

16 15 18 28 25 26

Hysteresis

MEMORY-ON (DIP2)

Relay is delivered in two versions - according to setting and level monitoring .

PRI-41 has function hysteresis, which means that you set only upper level (Imax) and lower level is set in % from upper level. Therefore when upper level is changed, lower level changes automatically.

PRI-42 has function “WINDOW”, which means that you set upper level (Imax) and lower level (Imin) individually in % of rated monitored range.

Both types have selectable function MEMORY. In case the relay gets to faulty state, this function leaves relay in this state until it is reseted by RESET button. DIP switch No. 3 can be used to choose if output relay should switch for each level separatelly, or in parallel in case any current level is exceeded. DIP switch No. 4 serves to set hysteresis which applies when changing from faulty to normal state. Relay is protected against re-poling of DC current, or wrong AC/DC current (this fault is indicated by LED <I a LED >I common fl ashing).

75

Current transformator SR - for Monitoring current relay PRI

!

!

!

!

!

!

!

Accessory to monitoring relay PRI series, for extension of max. controlled current max. cable 35 mm (1 ˝)

Max. cable size:

- solid conductor: max. 6 mm 2

- wire max. 4 mm

2

Bus-bar to max. dimension 40x10 mm ( 2 ˝ x 0.4 ˝)

Frenquency: 50 - 60 Hz

Constant overload capacity: 1.2 x In

Output current: 0 - 5 A

1-phase, DIN rail or panel mounting

EAN code

SR051

SR101

SR151

SR200

SR250

SR300

SR400

SR600

8595188117425

8595188117432

8595188117449

8595188117456

8595188117463

8595188117470

8595188117487

8595188117494

Technical parameters

Max. wire diameter:

Max. bus-bar profi le:

Primary current (A):

Accuracy class:

0.5

1

3

Operating temperature:

Storage temperature:

SR051

-

50

22

SR101

22

-

100

Rated capacity (VA):

-

1.25

1.5

2

2.5

3.5

-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)

-30 °C to +70 °C ( -22 °F to +158 °F)

3

4

5

SR151

22

-

150

SR200

23

SR250

23

30x10

200

Rated capacity (VA):

30x10

250

4

7

6

9

8.5

11

-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)

-30 °C to +70 °C ( -22 °F to +158 °F)

SR300

35

40x10

300

SR400

35

40x10

400

Rated capacity (VA):

4

8

12

8

12

15

-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)

-30 °C to +70 °C ( -22 °F to +158 °F)

12

15

15

SR600

35

40x10

600

76

Level switch HRH-5

EAN code

HRH-5 /UNI 8595188136396

Technical parameters

Functions:

Supply terminals:

Voltage range:

Input:

Toleration of voltage range:

Measuring circuit

Sensitivity ( input resistance):

Voltage n electrodes:

Current in probes:

Time response:

Max. capacity of probe cable:

Time delay (t):

Time delay after switching on (t1):

Accuracy

Accuracy in setting (mechanical):

Output

Number of contacts:

Current rating:

Switching voltage:

Switched voltage:

Min. switched output DC:

Mechanical life (AC1):

Electrical life:

Other information

Operational temperature:

Storing temperature:

Electrical strenght:

Operational position:

Mounting:

Protection degree:

Overvltage category:

Pollution degree:

Profi le of connecting wires (mm 2 ):

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

Recommended measuring probes:

Symbol

C

D

H

A1

A2

HRH-5

2

A1 - A2

24... 240 V AC/ DC (AC 50 - 60 Hz) max. 2 VA

-15 %; +10 % adjustable in range 5 kΩ -100 kΩ max. AC 3.5 V

AC <0.1 mA max. 400 ms

800 nF (sensitivity 5kΩ), 100 nF (sensitivity 100 kΩ) adjustable, 0.5 -10 sec

1.5 sec

± 5 %

1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy )

8 A / AC1

2500 VA , 240 W

250 V AC1 / 24 V DC

500 mW

1x10 7

1x10 5

-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)

-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)

3.75 kV (supply - sensors) any

DIN rail EN 60715

IP 40 from font panel / IP 10 terminals

III.

2

AWG 10 (2.5 mm2)

90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)

72 g (2.5 oz.)

EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1 pg. 83

16 18

15

!

Relay is designed for monitoring levels in wells, basins, reservoirs, tanks....

!

In one device you can choose the following confi gurations:

- one-level switch of conductive liquids (by connecting H and D)

- two-level switch of conductive liquids

!

One-state device monitors one level, two-state device monitors two levels (switches on one level and switches off on another level)

!

Choice of function PUMP UP, PUMP DOWN

!

Adjustable time delay on the output (0.5 - 10s)

!

Sensitivity adjustable by a potentiometer (5-100kΩ)

!

Measuring frequency 10Hz prevents polarization of liquid and raising oxidation of measuring probes

!

Galvanically separated supply voltage UNI 24.. 240 VAC/DC

!

Output contact 1xchangeover/SPDT 8A/250V AC1

!

In 1-module type, mounting onto a DIN rail

Device description

Indication of supply voltage

Choice of function

Supply voltage terminals

Terminals for conection of probes H, D

Output indication

Choice of function

Output contacts

Connection

Monitoring of two levels

Un

A1 A2

H D max min

Tank with

monitored level

16 C

15 18

Terminal for connection of probe C

Monioring of one level max

Adjustment of delay on output

Un

A1 A2

H D

16 C

Tank with monitored level

15 18

Function

Function PUMP UP Function PUMP DOWN

Un max level min

Un max level min t t t

15-18 red LED

15-18 red LED t

Relay is designated for monitoring of levels of conductive liquids with possibility of functions: PUMP UP or PUMP DOWN. To prevent polarization and liquid electrolysis of liquid, and undesirable oxidation of measuring probes, alternating current is used. For measuring use three measuring probes: H- upper level,

D- lower level, C - common probe. In case you use a tank made of a conductive material, you can use it as probe C. In case you require monitoring of one level only, it is neccessary to connect inputs H and

D and connect them to one probe - in this case sensitivity is lowered by half (2.5... 50kΩ). Probe C can be connected with a protective wire of supply system (PE). To prevent undesirable switching out output contacts by various infl uences (sediment on probes, humidity...) it is possible to set sensitivity of the device according to conductivity of monitored liguid (corresponding to “resistance” of liquid) range 5 up to 100kΩ.

To reduce infuences of undesirable switching of output contacts by liquid gorgle in tanks, it is possible to set delay of output reaction 0.5 - 10s.

77

Level switch HRH-1

EAN code

HRH-1 /230V

HRH-1 /24V

8594030337783

8594030338209

Technical parameters

Function:

Supply terminals:

Voltage range:

Burden:

Operating range:

Supply voltage tolerance:

Measuring circuit

Hysteresis (input - opening):

Voltage on electrode:

Current in probes:

Time reaction:

Max. cable capacity:

Time delay tD:

Time delay tH:

Accuracy

Setting accuracy (mech.):

Output

Number of contacts:

Current rating:

Breaking capacity:

Inrush current:

Switching voltage:

Min. breaking capacity DC:

Mechanical life:

Electrical life (AC1):

Other information

Operating temperature:

Storage temperature:

Electrical strength:

Operating position:

Mounting:

Protection degree:

Overvoltage cathegory:

Pollution degree:

Max. cable size (mm 2

):

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

Measuring sensors:

Measuring probes

HRH-1

3

A1 - A2

AC 230V, AC/DC 24V (galvanicaly separated) or AC 110V(AC 50-60Hz) max. 4.5 VA

-15 %; +10 %

!

!

!

!

Used to check the level in wells, reservoirs, tanks, pools, tankers, containers, etc.

Within the framework of a single device, the following confi gurations can be selected (see functions graph):

- two separate level switches

- two probes in one tank

- fi lling tank from well

Single-state monitors one level (full or empty tank), double-state monitors two levels (switches on upon one level and switches off upon the second)

DIP switch on front panel is used to choose function (see functions graph):

- pumping in

- pumping out

!

!

!

!

!

!

Option of setting time delay for reacting to the output upon a change in level, any type of delay by DIP switch

Sensitivity adjustable by potentiometer (probe resistance based on fl uid)

The measuring frequency 500 Hz prevents fl uid polarization and oxidation increase of measured probes

Galvanically separated supply AC 230 V, AC/DC 24 V or AC 110 V

Output contact 2x switches 16 A / 250 V AC1

In 3-MODULE design, fi xing to DIN rail

Symbol

Connection

H

S

C

D

A1

A2

16 18 28 26

15 25

Un

A1 A2 C D H S in an adjustable range 5 kΩ- 100 kΩ max. AC 5 V

AC <1 mA max. 400 ms

4 nF adjustable 0.5 -10 sec adjustable 0.5 -10 sec

± 5 %

Description

Terminal for connection of conductor common for both probes

Supply voltage terminals

16 15 18 28 25 26

Terminals for connecting probe

Terminals for connecting shield

2x changeover/ DPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)

16 A / AC1

4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC

30 A / < 3 s

250 V AC1 / 24 V DC

500 mW

3x10 7

0.7x10

5

Supply voltage indication

H relay indication

(OUT2)

D relay indication

(OUT1)

A1 A2 C D H S

DIP

Delay setting relay H

Delay setting relay D

16 15 18 28 25 2

6

Sensitivity setting of probe according to resistance of measured fl uid

-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)

-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)

4 kV (supply - output) any

DIN rail EN 60715

IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals

III.

2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with cavern max. 1x1.5

90 x 52 x 65 mm (3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝)

240 g (8 oz.)

EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1 pg. 83

Output contact of D relay - OUT1

Output contact of H relay - OUT2

Description and importance of DIP switches

There can be any measuring probe (any conductive contact, it is recommended to use brass or stainless steel).

The probe wire does not need to be shielded, but it is recommended. When using a shielded wire, the shielding is connected to terminal S.

2 separate tanks change of function of relay D relay D - delayed close relay H - delayed close

78

Level switch HRH-1

Functions

Two separate level switches

Un sonda D

LED D

OUT1- relay D tD tD probe H

LED H

OUT2 - relay H tH

When the tank is empty relay D open, relay H is closed tH

Un probe D

LED D

OUT1- relay D tD probe H

LED H

OUT2 - relay H tH

When the tank is empty both relays are switched tH tD

Two probes in single tank

Un probe D probe H

LED D

OUT1- relay D

LED H

OUT2 - relay H tD tD

Un probe D probe H

LED D

OUT1- relay D

LED H

OUT2 - relay H tD tD tH tH tH tH

The relay, which is used to control the level liquids conductive (water, chemical solutions, food, etc.).

In this principle, it goes on about the measurement of liquids by measuring probes. As the measuring used signal is 5V AC/ 500Hz. Using an AC signal prevents the the increasing oxidation of probes and unwanted polarization and electrolysis liquid. During depending on the DIP settings confi gurations, switches can control two independent levels or use a combined function for one level (see diagram of functions).

The relay is equipped with regulation of the sensitivity to to liquid resistance. It‘s also possible to eliminate some of the unwanted switching in the sensitivity settings according to specifi c conditions

(for example, pollution probe sediments, humidity, etc.). It‘s also possible for each probe to set the delay in the range of 0.5-10s, and using the DIP switch type delay (when you turn the relay on and off , depending on application).

Example of usage:

For controlling two independent tanks

Un

For controlling the level combination of upper and bottom probe

Un

A1 A2 C D H S

A1 A2 C D H S

container with the monitored level container with the monitored level container with the monitored level

16 15 18 28 25 26

16 15 18 28 25 26

Pump control or other output device Pump control or other output device

Output relays for pump control or other output devices,

Selecting contacts is depending on the selected function

Note:

As a common probe, it could be used with an advantage such as metal pipes, tanks, etc.

Due to the isolation of probes from a supply voltage, and the measured voltage which is up to 5V, it is possible to connect probes using standard communication cables.

79

EAN code

HRH-6 /AC

HRH-6 /DC

HRH-6S

8595188136990

8595188137409

8595188137416

Technical parameters

Function:

Voltage range:

Burden:

Supply tolerance:

Measuring circuit

Sensitivityan adjustable range*:

Voltage on probes:

Probe cable maximum capacity:

Time delay:

Output

Number of contacts:

Current rating:

Switching voltage:

Peak current:

Switching voltage:

Min. switching capacity DC:

Mechanical life (AC1):

Electrical life:

Other information

Operating temperature:

Storage temperature:

El. strength (supply – probes):

Operating position:

Protection degree:

Overvoltage cathegory:

Pollution degree:

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

Recommended measuring probe:

HRH-6 / DC HRH-6 / AC

2

12..24V DC 230V AC/50-60Hz max. 1.8 W max.3.8 VA

+/- 20% -20 %; +10 %

!

Function 1 is monitoring minimal and maximal level depth, for example in fi re engine cars, tanks etc.

!

Function 2 is monitoring level depth in water collectors, basins, pools ec.

!

Selection of particular function is made by jumper on the front panel

!

Level depth is indicated on the panel of device by LED

!

Device monitors 5 levels by using six probes (one probe is common)

!

Common probe can be replaced by a metal (conductive) tank

!

Level indicationby six LED‘s on the front panel of the device

!

It is possible to connect another indication module (e.g. in fi re-engine cabin)

!

Adjustable sensitivity according to liquid conductvity

!

Adjustable time delay - elimination of level movement, e.g. while a tank is being fi lled up

!

Measuring frequency 10 Hz to prevent polarization of liquid

!

Supply voltage 12.... 24 V DC (to be used in fi re-engines) or galvanically separated 230 VAC for general use

!

Contact relay 10A for signalization of full/empty tank (according to a chosen function)

!

Choice of functions PUMP UP/OFF/PUMP DOWN by a switch located on the front panel of the device

!

Protection degree IP65

Description of function:

Connection of HRH-6 in a block

SENS. DELAY

+ +

- -

Sensitivity setup Delay setup min. 10...20kΩ max. 100...150kΩ max. 3V AC

500nF (for min. sensitivity), 50nF (for maximum sensitivity) adjustable 1...10s

6xLED (1x red, 1x yellow, 4x green)

1x NO-SPST (AgNi/ Silver Alloy )

10A / AC1

2500 VA / AC1, 200 W / DC

16 A / < 3s

250V AC1 / 24V DC

500 mW

3x10

7

0.7x10

5

Basic unit

Function switch

Jumper

- function selection

Cable for connecting probes

HRH-6/DC

-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)

-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)

x 3.75 kV any

IP 65 x III.

2

110x135x72 mm (4.3˝ x 5.3˝ x 2.8˝)

384 g (13.55 oz.) 284 g (13.55 oz.)

EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1 pg.83

Cable for connecting auxiliary signalling

Supply cable / relay contact

HRH-6/S

LED6

- level L5 indication

LED5

- level L4 indication

LED4

- level L3 indication

LED3

- level L2 indication

LED2

- level L1 indication

LED1 - supply voltage indication

Auxiliary signalling

* Note: product is in a state of prototype, may be a subject of alternations .

Connection

HRH-6/DC HRH-6/AC

L2

L1

C

L5

L4

L3

+Un 18

15

L2

L1

C

L5

L4

L3

L

18

15

Basic unit connecting

LED6

- level L5 indication

LED5

- level L4 indication

LED4

- level L3 indication

LED3

- level L2 indication

LED2

- level L1 indication

LED1 - supply voltage indication

- Un

N

80

Level switch HRH-6

Level switch HRH-6

HRH-6 block connecting

L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 C

PD

SW

PU

PU SW PD

N

L

LED4

LED5

LED6

+ 6V

LED1

LED2

LED3

- Un

L3

L4

L5

C

L1

L2

+ Un

15

18

HRH-6/AC

LED4

LED5

LED6

+ 6V

LED1

LED2

LED3

HRH-6/S

15

18

AC 230V *

L

N

*By HRH-6/DC, incoming supply is connected on terminals +Un and - Un.

Functions

J1

J1

Un

L1

LED6

LED5

LED4

LED3

LED2

LED1

L5

L4

L3

L2

15-18

15-18

15-18

15-18

NAPOUŠTĚNÍ /

PUMP UP

VYPOUŠTĚNÍ /

PUMP DOWN

NAPOUŠTĚNÍ /

PUMP UP

VYPOUŠTĚNÍ /

PUMP DOWN

This device monitors level of a conuctive liquid in a tank by using six single probes or one 6-fold probe. In case you use a tank made of a conductive material, it is possible to use it as a common probe C.

This common probe is connected to a pole of supply (for fi re-engines it means its body) in case of supply voltage 12...24VDC.

In case of supply voltage 230VAC, the circuits are galvanically separated from the main.

The device is controlled by a three-position switch PUMP UP/OFF/ PUMP DOWN. After switching into a position PUMP UP or PUMP DOWN, red LED1 shines and then also LED2...LED6 according to liquid level. Output relay has 2 selectable functions.

Funtion setting is done by a jumper on basic board of HRH-6.

Function 1: ( for use in fi re-engines) - jumper is applied. In case of function PUMP UP and level reaching L5, the relay controlling e.g. acustic signalization, permanently closes and indicated full tank. In case of PUMP DOWN function and level dropunder level L3, relay priodically switches and under L2 it switches permanently (indicates almost empty tank) .

Function 2: (for keeping liquid level) - jumper is not applied. In case of PUMP UP, sensor is switched until liquid reaches level L5. Then relay opens and switches again in case the lliguid level falls under level

L1. In case of PUMP DOWN - relay is switched until liquid falls under level L1. Then relay opens and switches again on level L5.

To eliminate LED fl ashing while level gurgle it is possible to delay reaction of probes (set delay 1..10s). According to conductivity of liquid it is possible to set sensitivity of probes (corresponding to

“resistance” of liquid).

81

Level set HRH-4

EAN code

HRH-4 /230V

HRH-4 /24V

8595188117517

8595188117500

Technical parameters

Function:

Voltage range:

Burden:

Operating range:

Measuring circuit

Sensitivity ( input resistance):

Voltage n electrodes:

Current on probes:

Time response:

Max. capacity of probe cable:

Time delay (t):

Time delay (t1):

Accuracy

Setting accuracy (mech):

Output

Number of contacts:

Rated thermal current:

Loading in AC3:

Mechanical life:

Other information

Operation temperature:

Storage temperature:

Electrical strength (supply-output):

Operating position:

Protection degree:

Pollution degree:

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

Function

Function PUMP UP

Un max level min

Function PUMP DOWN

15-18 red LED

Un max level min

15-18 red LED

82

!

In an easy way it automates operations of pumps depending on level

!

Control of level in wells, tanks, reservoirs...

!

It is delivered as a connected set – easy installation

!

Possibility to monitor level of any type of conductive liquid

!

It serves for an automatic operation in 1-phased and 3-phased pumps

!

Set of level switch HRH-5 and a contactor VS425

!

Function choice – pumping up or down

!

Unit requires incoming over-current protection

!

Protection degree of the set is IP55

!

There is a possibility of 4 types of probes in a various design (they are not a part of this set, it is possible to deliver)

!

Unit is placed in a plastic box with dimensions 160x135x83mm

HRH-4

2

AC/DC 230 V or AC/DC 24 V (AC 50 - 60 Hz)

7 VA

-15 %; +10 % adjustable in range 5 kΩ -100 kΩ max. AC 3.5 V

AC <0.1 mA max. 400 ms

800 nF (sensitivity 5kΩ), 100 nF (sensitivity 100 kΩ) adjustable, 0.5 -10 sec

1.5 sec

± 5 %

4x switching

25 A

5.5 kW / 400 V

3x10

6

-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)

-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)

4 kV, galvanically insulated any

IP 55

2

160 x 135 x 83 mm ( 6.3˝ x 5.3˝ x 3.3˝)

834 g (29.4 oz.)

EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1 t t t t

Connection

HRH-4/230V

A1 A2

H D

HRH-5

16 C

15 18 protection element

VS425-40

230V AC/DC

M

230 V control lamp

Function description

1) PUMP UP - in case the level falls under a lower limit ( sensor D), a relay switches and a pump pumps a liquid up until it reaches an upper limit ( probe H), then a relay opens and a pump stops pumping. When a level reaches a lower limit again, all process is repeated.

2)

After the device is energized, relay automatically closes and a pump pumps liquid to upper limit.

PUMP DOWN - in case a level reaches over an upper limit, a relay closes and a pump pumps liquid down.

In case a level reaches a lower limit, a relay opens and a pump stops pumping.

When energized, a relay is in an open state and a pump operates only after an upper limit is exceeded.

3) In case you combine inputs H and D and connect them to one probe, the device will keep only one level

(upper and lower limit will become one).

In function PUMP UP relay closes in case the level falls under a probe level. A pump pumps liquid up and in case the level reaches a probe level, a relay opens and a pump stops.

The level is kept in a small range around the probe.

In function PUMP DOWN relays closes in case a level reaches a probe level. A pump pumps down until the level reaches a probe, then relay opens and pump stops.

Level switches accessories - Level sensors SHR

!

!

!

!

!

!

!

!

!

!

SHR-1-M: brass sensor

SHR-1-N: stainless steel sensor

Sensor to control fl ooding

Electrode with diametr 4 mm / 0.2” is placed in plastic cover

Panel or to holder mounting

Conductor is connected to terminal board, shrink bushing for feeder place insulation is a part of device

Max. wire profi le: 2.5 mm 2 (AWG10)

Installation: after connecting a wire to the sensor, run the shrink bushing over the wire onto the sensor.

Heat the sensor and by shrinking the connection of sensor and wire will be hermetical

Weight: 9.7 g (0.3 oz.)

Operating temperature: -25 °C to +60 °C (-13 °F to 140 °F)

Total sensor lenght: 65.5mm /2.58 ”

SHR-1-M SHR-1-N

EAN code

SHR-1-M

SHR-1-N

8595188110105

8595188111379

EAN code

SHR-2 wire to SHR-2

8595188111263

8595188129770

!

!

!

!

!

!

!

!

Level probe SHR-2

Detection sensor is electrode, which in connection with switchable device is used for level detection for example in wells,tanks,...

To be ued in electric conductive fl uids and mechanically polluted fl uids with temperature: +1 °C to +80 °C (33.8 °F to 176°F) stainless steel one-pole electrode reside in PVC cover, intended for tank wall mounting or mounting by socket

To ensure corret function of the sensor, it is necessary to have the electrode without dirt which could disable the connection of the electrode and fl uid and thus lead to malfunction

Max. wire profi le: 2.5 mm 2 (AWG10)

Recomended wire ÖLFLON FEP 1x1.0 BK

Installation:

- conductor wire is connected by feazing of two brass screws to stainless steel electrode

- conductor is caulked by bushing Pg7 with protection degree IP68

Weight: 48.6 g / 1.7 oz.

Dimensions: max. diameter 21 mm/ 0.8”, lenght 96 mm / 3.8”

SHR-2 in open state

!

!

!

!

!

!

!

!

!

!

!

!

!

Level probe SHR-3

Stainless probe to be used into demanding industrial environments, designated for screwing into tank wall or cover

The probe is installed in horisontal, vertical or in sidelong position on tank side or in tank cover. Installation is done by soldering or by fi xing nut. It is necessary to use 24 mm (1” ) screw. It is necessary to use an adequate torque with regards to a seal and operational overpressure in a tank

Sensor has connecting wire - lenght 3 m, which is connected to sensor to scan electrode and sensor bushing connecting wire is double-wire PVC AWG 18 (0.75 mm 2 ) , connection of wires: brown - scan electrode, blue - sensor bushing

Connection M18x1.5 screw

Protection degree IP 67

Sensor weight without cable: 100 g (3.3 oz.)

Operating surroundings: place without the danger of detonation , temperature on screw: max. 95°C / 203 °F

Pressure immunity: on 25 °C / 77 °F 4 MPa, on 95°C / 203 °F 1.5 MPa

Weight: 239 g (8.4 oz.)

Material: bushing and sean electrode: stainless steel W.Nr. 1.4301, insulation insert of electrode: PTFE

Internal material: self - extinguishing epoxide resin

Operating temperature: -25 °C to +60 °C (-13 °F to 140 °F)

Total sensor lenght: 65.5mm /2.58 ”

Dimensions

EAN code

SHR-3 8595188111270

83

Power factor monitoring relay COS-1

EAN code

COS-1 /230V

COS-1 /110V

COS-1 /400V

COS-1 /24V

8595188120906

8595188120265

8595188120272

8594030338131

Technical parameters

Supply

Supply terminals:

Voltage range:

Burden:

Operating range:

Measuring

Voltage set:

Terminals:

Upper level cos-φ:

Bottom level cos-φ:

Max. permanent voltage:

Current range:

Current overloading:

Hysteresis:

Time delay t1:

Time delay t2:

Accuracy

Accuracy setting (mechanical):

Accuracy of repetition:

Temperature dependance:

Limit values tolerance:

Output

Number of contacts:

Current rating:

Breaking capacity:

Inrush current:

Switching voltage:

Min. breaking capacity DC:

Output indication:

Mechanical life:

Electrical life (AC1):

Other information

Operating temperature:

Storage temperature:

Electrical strength:

Operating position:

Mounting:

Protection degree:

Overvoltage cathegory:

Pollution degree:

Max. cable size (mm 2 ):

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

A1 - A2

AC 230 V, AC 400 V or AC/DC 24 V (AC/50-60Hz) max. 4.5 VA

-15 %; +10 %

3x400 V / 50 Hz

L1, L2, L3, B1 adjustable 0.1 - 0.99

adjustable 0.1 - 0.99

(input L1, L2, L3) AC 3x460 V

0.1 - 16 A

20 A (<3 sec.) adjustable 5% or 10% adjustable 0.5 - 30 s adjustable 0 - 10 s

5 %

<1 %

< 0.1 % / °C

5 %

2x changeover/ DPDT (AgNi / Silver Alloy)

16 A / AC1

4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC

20 A / < 3 s

250 V AC1 / 24 V DC

500 mW yellow LED

3x10

7

0.7x10

5

-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)

-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)

4 kV (supply - output) any

DIN rail EN 60715

IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals

III.

2 max.1x 2.5, max.2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x1.5 (AWG 12)

90 x 52 x 65 mm (3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝)

240 g (8 oz.)

EN 60255-6, EN 61010-1

!

Relay monitors phase shift between current and voltage - cos-φ in 3-phase and also 1-phase mains for monitoring overload/unloading of motors

!

Supply set 3x400 V

!

Function “MEMORY” - manual reset - button on front panel

!

It is possible to connect current transformer in front of the device. This enables increase of current range

!

2 output relays, independent for each level

!

Adjustable delay to eliminate short peak overloading

!

Adjustable range and bottom level cos-φ, of power factor between 0.1- 0.99

!

Adjustable delay to eliminate starting of motor

!

Selectable hysteresis 5 or 10%

!

Galvanically separated supply AC 230 V, AC 400 V or AC/DC 24 V

!

Output contact: 2x changeover/DPDT 16 A / 250 V AC1

!

3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting

Symbol Description

A1 16 18 26 28

B1

L1

L2

L3

Supply voltage

Connection

Function

L1-L2-L3

MAX

COS

φ

MIN

RESET

15-18

25-28

LED

φ

LED

φ

LED

A2 t1

φ

Upper level - max exceeding

Output indication

Bottom level- min exceeding

Adjusting bottom level - Cos φ MIN

P

Un

S

A1 A2 B1 L1 L2 L3 inner shunt

16 15 18 28 25 26

15 25 t2 t1

Un

A1 A2 B1 L1 L2 L3 inner shunt

16 15 18 28 25 26 t2 t1

Sellection of function MEMORY

2nd relay function

(1-parallel , 2- independent)

Hysteresis from faulty to normal state

Time delay t1 for motor starting

Upper level - MAX

Time delay t2 for peak elimination t2

Un

A1 A2 B1 L1 L2 L3 inner shunt

16 15 18 28 25 26 t1

MEMORY ON (DIP-2)

After the device is switched on, the yellow LED fl ashes for time t1 and both relays are switched (state OK). This delay serves to eliminate a faulty state e.g. motor start-up. If the upper limit is exceeded

(cosφ - max) red LED shines > cosφ . After a time delay t2 the output relay opens (15-18). Equally, if it falls under bottom limit (cosφ - min) red LED shines < cosφ and after a time delay t2 the output relay opens (25-28). In case the load is disconnected (no current), red LED shines >cosφ (cosφ = 1).

84

Frequency monitoring relay HRF-10

3

!

The relay serves to monitor frequency of AC voltage, e.g. in photovoltaic power stations, generators

The monitored frequency 50/60/400 Hz is selected by a switch

!

Supply from monitored voltage

!

Two adjustable levels of frequency (Fmin, Fmax) in the range of 80 - 120% Fn

!

Adjustable diff erence level

!

Adjustable delay level

!

Switchable ranges of rated frequency Fn

!

3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting

EAN code

HRF - 10

Technical parameters

Supply and monitoring terminals:

Supply voltage:

Rated frequency Fn:

Burden: (max):

Overload capacity:

- continuous:

- max.10s:

Frequency Fmax:

Frequency Fmin:

Diff erence:

Delay (until failure):

Opening level (Uopen):

Output relay - contact:

AC contact capacity:

DC contact capacity:

Mechanical life :

Other information

Operational temperature:

Storing temperature:

Electrical strenght:

(napájení - kontakt relé):

Protection degree:

Overvltage category:

Pollution degree:

Profi le of connecting wires (mm 2 ):

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

Rated frequency setting

HRF-10

L, N

161 - 346V

50 / 60 / 400 Hz

1.7VA / 1.1W

Device description

346V

416V adjustable 80 - 120 %Fn adjustable 80 - 120 % Fn adjustable 0.5 - 5 % Fn adjustable 0.5 - 10 s

161V

1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNi) gilded

250V / 8 A, max. 2000VA

30V / 8A

3x10

6 at rated load

-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)

-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)

4 kV / 1 min.

III.

2

IP 40 from font panel / IP 20 terminals max. 2 x 1.5mm

2

/ 1 x 2.5mm

2

(AWG 12)

90 x 52 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝)

125 g (4.4 oz.)

EN 60255-6, EN 60255-27, EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4

Supply voltage indication

Indication F > Fmax

Indication F <Fmin

Output contacts

Functions

HRF-10

N L

16 15 18 28 25 26

Supply/monitored voltage terminals

Delay setting

Diff erence setting

Fmax setting

Fn setting

Fmin setting

Fn setting = 50Hz

Connection

L

N

Fn setting = 60Hz

N L

Fn setting = 400Hz

16 15 18 28 25 26

After the supply (monitored) voltage is connected the green LED is on.

If the value of the monitored frequency falls within the range between the two set levels Fmin - Fmax no red LED is on. The relay UNDER is triggered (contacts 15-16-18) and the relay OVER is disconnected

(contacts 25-26-28).

If the monitored frequency exceeds the set level Fmax, the relay OVER is triggered after the set delay timing elapses and the red LED OVER goes on. The red LED fl ashes during the timing.

If the monitored frequency drops below Fmax - diff erence, the relay is activated without delay and the red LED OVER goes off .

If the monitored frequency drops below the set level Fmin, the relay UNDER is disconnected after the set delay timing elapses and the red LED UNDER goes on. The red LED fl ashes during the timing. If the monitored frequency exceeds the level Fmin + the diff erence, the relay is triggered without delay and the red LED UNDER goes off .

If the monitored voltage is lower than the opening level Uopen both the relays are disconnected and both the red LED (UNDER and OVER) start fl ashing slowly - indicating insuffi cient supply voltage.

85

Analog

TER

Thermostats and hygrostats

s i n g l e t h e r m o s t a t s

TER-3A

-30 to +10 °C

(-22 °F to 50 °F) external NTC.

TER-3B

0 °C to +40 °C

(32 °F to 104 °F) external NTC.

TER-3C

+30 °C to +70 °C

(86 °F to 158 °F) external NTC.

TER-3D

0 °C to +60 °C

(32 °F to 140 °F) external NTC.

TER-3H

-15 °C to +45 °C

(5 °F to 113 °F) external NTC.

TER-3E

0 °C to +60 °C

(32 °F to 140 °F) external NTC.

TER-3F

0 °C to +60 °C

(32 °F to 140 °F) in-built NTC.

TER-3G

0 °C to +60 °C

(32 °F to 140 °F) external PT100.

TER-4

Wide and accurate range of setting -40 °C to +110 °C

(-40 °F to 230 °F) in ten ranges in one device, fi ne temperature setting.

2 inputs for NTC senzor, 2 outputs 16 A changeover/ SPDT, additional function

(memory, hysteresis, indication of faulty sensor).

Supply: AC 230 V or AC/DC 24 V (galv. separated ).

TER-7

Monitoring heating of motor winding in range given by resistance of in-built

PTC thermistor(1.8-3.3 kΩ), additional function (memory, reset), output contact

2x8A changeover/ SPDT,

supply: AC/ DC 24-240 V.

Thermo

ATR

Analog room thermostat with temperature range +5 to +40

0

°C

(+41 °F to +104 °F) night decline, fl ush mounted in to wiring box.

ATF

Analog fl oor thermostat with temperature range +5 to +50 °C

(+41 °F to +122 °F)

„temporary temperature change “ in range

±10 °C/ 50 °F.

ATC

Combined thermostat with room and fl oor sensor,

temperature range

+5 to +50 °C

(+41 °F to +122 °F).

TEV

Digital

TER

Thermo

TEV-1

Thermostat with „dead zone“, independent adjustable range

-20 to+20 °C ( -4 °F to +68 °F), protection against freezing, water-

-proof type IP65.

TEV-2

Thermostat for regulation of heating (cooling), adjustable range

-20 to+20 °C ( -4 °F to +68 °F), externí sensor NTC, external sensor NTC, output contact 16A changeover/SPDT.

TER-9 Digital multifunction thermostat

2 temperature inputs, 2 outputs 8A changeover/ SPDT, 6 functions, in-built time switch clock, LCD with back light, galvanically sep.supply voltage AC 230 V or AC/DC 24V, 2 MODUL.

Temperature range: -40 °C to +110 °C / -40 °C to 230 °F

62x34x153

IP65

Hygro-thermostat

Hygrostat

TEV-3

Thermostat for regulation of heating (cooling), adjustable range

+5 to +35 ° C (41°F to 149 °F), external sensor

NTC, output contact 16 A, control potentiometer and indication on panel.

62x34x153

IP65

RHV-1

Hygro-thermostat for humidity monitoring and regulation in range 0.. 90 % RH

TEV-4

Single exteriors thermostat for monitoring and regulation of temperature in demanding enviroments (humid and contaminated, agressive and defective, industrial workshops, washing rooms, green-houses, cellars and cooling boxes…)

Temperature range:

-30 °C to +60 °C /

-30 °C to 140 °F

RHT-1

Hygro-thermostat for temperature monitoring and regulation in range 0 to + 60 °C (32 °F to 140 °F) and relative humidity monitoring and regulation in range 50...90%

DTR

Digital room thermostat with temperature range +5 to +50 °C

(+41 °F to +122 °F) with in-built

(internal) sensor.

Intelligent regulation.

DTF

Digital fl oor thermostat with temperature range +5 ..+50 °C with external sensor,

16 A potential-free contact.

DTC

Digital combined thermostat with room and fl oor sensor with temperature range

+5 to +50 °C

(+41 °F to +122 °F), pre-programmed programs

ATV-1

Energy-saving digital thermostat for radiators, with temperature range

+8..+28°C.

Accessories to thermostats:

TC, TZ , PT-100

- external temperature sensors for thermostats in lengths 3m, 6m,12m

-TC/TZ: thermistor NTC 12 kΩ/ 25 °C

PT: element PT-100 (only TER-3G)

LKM-45

Wiring box for thermostat

mounting on a surface.

86

Thermostats and hygrostats

Type

Sensor

Supply

TER-4

TER-7

TER-9

TEV-1

TEV-2

TEV-3

TEV-4

ATR

ATF

ATC

DTR

DTF

TER-3A

TER-3B

TER-3C

TER-3D

TER-3E

TER-3F

TER-3G

TER-3H

DTC

RHT-1

RHV-1

ATV-1

1M-DIN

1M-DIN

1M-DIN

1M-DIN

1M-DIN

1M-DIN

1M-DIN

1M-DIN

3M-DIN

1M-DIN

2M-DIN

IP65 box

IP65 box

IP65 box

IP65 box

ELEGANT

#

ELEGANT

#

ELEGANT

#

ELEGANT

ELEGANT

ELEGANT

IP65

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

1M-DIN #

#

#

# #

#

#

#

# # #

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#(2x)

#

#(2x)

#

#

#

#

#

# #

#

NTC

NTC

NTC

NTC

NTC

NTC

# PT100

NTC

NTC

PTC

NTC

INTC

NTC

NTC

NTC

NTC

NTC

NTC

NTC

NTC

NTC built -in built -in

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

#

-30 °C to +10 °C

(-22 °F to 50 °F)

0 °C to +40 °C

(32 °F to 104 °F)

+30 °C to +70 °C

(86 °F to 158 °F)

0 °C to +60 °C

(32 °F to 140 °F)

0.5 - 5 °C

(32.9 °F to 41 °F)

0.5 - 5 °C

(32.9 °F to 41 °F)

0.5 - 5 °C

(32.9 °F to 41 °F)

0.5 - 5 °C

(32.9 °F to 41 °F)

0 °C to +60 °C

(32 °F to 140 °F)

1 °C (34 °F )

-15 °C to +45 °C

(5 °F to 113 °F)

1 °C/ 34 °F

0 °C to +60 °C

(32 °F to 140 °F)

0.5 - 5 °C

(32.9 °F to 41 °F)

-15 °C to +45 °C

(5 °F to 113 °F)

0.5 - 5 °C

(32.9 °F to 41 °F)

#

#

-40 °C to +110 °C

(-40 °F to 230 °F)

0.5 - 2.5 °C

(32.9 °F to 37 °F)

Resistance x

1.8-3.3 kΩ

-40 °C to +110 °C

(-40 °F to 230 °F)

0.5 - 5 °C

(32.9 °F to 41 °F) single thermostat into a switchboard with external sensor for temperature in cooling and against freezing single thermostat into a switchboards with external sensor for sensing room and operational temperature

88

88 single thermostat into a switchboards with external sensor for sensing temperature in devices (overheating...)

88 single thermostat into a switchboard with external sensor as TER-3D but with fi xed hysteresis single thermostat into a switchboard with in-built sensor, monitors operational temperature in a switchboard

88 as TER-3D but with input for sensor PT100

89 as TER-3A but with a diff erent temperature range - for cooling and heating

88

89 two-state thermostat (2 inputs, 2 outputs), two independent or dependent thermostats, accurate setting, wide temperature range

90 thermistor relay for protection of motor overheating, input designated for sensor PTC in-built in motor winding

91 multifunction( 6thermo functions) digital thermostat with in-built time switch clock, 2 inputs/2 outputs

92

-20 to +20 °C

( -4 °F to +68 °F)

-20 to +20 °C

( -4 °F to +68 °F)

+5 to +35 °C

(41°F to 149 °F)

-30 °C to +65 °C

(-22 °F to 149 °F)

1.5 °C (35 °F )

1.5 °C(35 °F )

1.5 °C(35 °F )

0.5 / 1.5 / 4 0 C

32.9/ 35/39 °F

+5 to +40 °C

( +41 °F to +104 °F)

1 °C (34 °F )

+5 to +50 °C

( +41 °F to +122 °F)

1 °C (34 °F )

+5 to +50 °C

( +41 °F to +122 °F)

1 °C (34 °F )

+5 to +50 °C

0.5 -1°C

( +41 °F to +122 °F)

(32.9 °F to 34 °F)

+5 to +50 °C

0.5 -1 °C

( +41 °F to +122 °F)

(32.9 °F to 34 °F)

+5 to +50 °C

0.5 -1 °C

( +41 °F to +122 °F)

(32.9 °F to 34 °F) thermostat with “dead zone” , control of heating and protection against freezing, box for outdoor use with single thermostat for regulation of heating, short sensor is a part of this device, protection degree IP65 as TEV-2 but potentiometer and indication are placed on front panel single exteriors thermostat for monitoring and regulation of temperature in demanding enviroments

99 room analog thermostat line THERMO for mounting into a wiring box fl oor analog thermostat line THERMO for mounting into a wiring box room and fl oor (combined) analog thermostat line THERMO

for mounting into a wiring box room digital thermostat line THERMO for mounting into a wiring box fl oor digital thermostat line THERMO for mounting into a wiring box room and fl oor ( combined) digital thermostat line

THERMO for mounting into a wiring box

0 to +60 °C

(32 °F to 140 °F)

H - 4 %

T- 2.5 °C

-30 °C to +60 °C

(-22 °F to 140 °F)

2%, 3%, 4%

H - 4 %

T- 2.5 °C(36.5 °F) hygro-thermostat for temperature monitoring and regulation in range 0 °C to +60 °C (32 °F to 140 °F) and relative humidity in range 50.. 90%

0 ... 30 % RH

30 ... 60 % RH

60 ... 90 % RH hygro-thermostat for humidity monitoring and regulation in range 0.. 90 % RH

98

97

97

94

94

94

95

95

95

100

101 valve

# # built -in

+8..+28 °C thermostatic direction valves, temperature regulation

+8..+28°C

96

87

Thermostats line TER-3 (A, B, C, D, G, H)

EAN code

TER-3A

TER-3B

TER-3C

TER-3D

TER-3G

TER-3H

8595188138390

8595188138406

8595188138413

8595188138420

8595188138451

8595188138468

Technical parameters:

Function:

Supply terminals:

Voltage range:

Burden:

Operating range:

Measuring circuit

Measuring terminals:

Temperature range:

(according to product type sensitivity)

TER-3

single level

A1-A2

AC/DC 24 - 240V (galvanically unseparated) (AC 50-60Hz)

2 VA

- 15 %; + 10 %

T1 - T1

TER - 3A -30 °C to +10 °C (-22 °F to 50 °F)

TER - 3B 0 °C to +40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)

TER - 3C +30 °C to +70 °C (86 °F to 158 °F)

TER - 3D 0 °C to +60 °C (32 °F to 140 °F)

TER - 3G 0 °C to +60 °C (32 °F to 140 °F)

TER - 3H -15 °C to +45 °C (5 °F to 113 °F) ajustable in range 0.5 to 5°C/ 32.9 to 41 °F external, termistor NTC , except for TER-3G (PT100) fl ashing red LED

Hysteresis:

Sensor:

Sensor fault indication:

Accuracy

Setting accuracy (mech.):

Switching diff erence:

Temperature dependance:

Output

Number of contacts:

Current rating:

Breaking capacity:

Switching voltage:

Min. breaking capacity DC:

Output indication:

Mechanical life:

Electrical life (AC1):

Other information

Operating temperature:

Storage temperature:

Electrical strength:

Operating position:

Mounting:

Protection degree:

Overvoltage cathegory:

Pollution degree:

Max. cable size (mm

2

):

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

5 %

0.5 °C / 32.9 °F

< 0.1 % / °C (< 0.1 % / °F)

1x NO (AgSnO

2

)

16A / AC1, 10A / 24V DC

4000 VA / AC1, 300 W / DC

250 V AC1 / 24 V DC

500 mW red LED

3x10 7

0.7x10

5

-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)

-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)

2.5 kV (supply - output) any

DIN rail EN 60715

IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals

III.

2 solid wire max. 2x 2.5 or 1x4 (AWG 12)

with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x 1.5 (AWG 12)

90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)

73 g (2.6 oz.)

EN 60730-2-9, EN 61010-1

!

Single thermostat for temperature monitoring and regulation in range -30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F) in six ranges

!

It can be used for monitoring temperature e.g. in switchboards, heating systems, cooling systems, liquids, radiators, motors, devices, open spaces, etc.

!

Function of short-circuit or sensor disconnection monitoring

!

Possibility to set function “heating”/”cooling” ( setting is done by DIP switch)

!

Adjustable hysteresis (sensitivity) , switching by potentiometer in range 0.5 to 5°C/ 32.9 to 41 °F

!

Choice of external temperature sensors with double insulation in standard lengths 3, 6 and 12 m (9.8´,19.7´ and 29.5´)

!

It is possible to place sensor directly on terminal block – for temperature monitoring in a switchboard or in its surroundings

!

Multivoltage supply AC/DC 24 -240 V, not galvanically separated

!

Output contact 1x NO - SPST 16 A /250 V AC1

!

Red LED indicates status of output, green LED indicates energization of the device

!

1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting

Symbol

Function

TEMPERATURE

Un

HEATING

15-18

LED

COOLING

15-18

LED

TEST

15-18

LED

15-18

LED

T1

T1

Function description

A1

A2

18

15

]

]

]

]

Hysteresis

COOL

RUN

COOL

RUN

COOL

RUN

HEAT

TEST

HEAT

TEST

HEAT

TEST short-circuit or sensor disconnection

Connection

sensor

Un

A1 A2

T1 T1

15 18

It is a single but practical thermostat with separated sensor for monitoring temperature. Device is placed in a switchboard and external sensor senses temperature of required space, object, or liquid. Supply is not galvanically separated from sensor. Sensor is double insulated. Maximal length of delivered sensor is 12m/ 29.5´. device has in-built indication of sensor damage, which means that in case of short-circuit or disconnection red LED fl ashes. Thanks to adjustable hysteresis, it is advantageous to regulate width of

.

When installing it is necessary to keep in mind that hysteresis is increased by temperature gradient between sensor’s jacket and thermistor.

Description

Supply voltage indication

Heating / cooling selection

Temperature adjusting

Hysteresis adjusting

A1 A2

T1 T1

Supply terminals

Sensor terminals

Output indication

Function TEST

Example of an order

Please specify a type of thermostat in your order (TER-3A, TER-3B .. or TER-3H) types diff er in temperature range and supply voltage.

15 18

Output contact

88

Thermostats line TER-3 ( E, F )

EAN code

TER-3E

TER-3F

8595188138437

8595188138444

Technical parameters:

Function:

Supply terminals:

Voltage range:

Burden:

Operating range:

Measuring circuit

Measuring terminals:

Temperature range:

Hysteresis:

Sensor:

S ensor fault indic. (short-circuit / disconnection):

Accuracy

Setting accuracy (mech.):

Switching diff erence:

Temperature dependance:

Output

Number of contacts:

Current rating:

Breaking capacity:

Switching voltage:

Min. breaking capacity DC:

Output indication:

Mechanical life:

Electrical life (AC1):

Other information

Operating temperature:

Storage temperature:

Electrical strength:

Operating position:

Mounting:

Protection degree:

Overvoltage cathegory:

Pollution degree:

Max. cable size (mm 2 ):

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

TER-3E TER-3F

single level

A1-A2

AC /DC 24 - 240 V (AC 50-60Hz)

2 VA

- 15 %; +10 %

T1 - T1

X

0 to +60 °C /(32 °F to 140 °F) fi xed 1 °C/ 34 °F thermistor NTC in-built flashing red LED

5%

0.5 °C

< 0.1 % / °C

1x NO- SPST (AgSnO

2

)

16A / AC1,10 A / 24 V DC

4000 VA / AC1, 300 W / DC

250 V AC1 / 24 V DC

500mW red LED

3x10 7

0.7x10

5

-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)

-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)

2.5 kV (supply - output) any

DIN rail EN 60715

IP 40 from front panel / IP 10 terminals

III.

2 solid wire max. 2x 2.5 or 1x4

with sleeve max. 1x2.5 or 2x 1.5

AWG 12

90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)

73 g (2.58 oz.) 74 g(2.61 oz.)

EN 60730-2-9, EN 61010-1

!

Single thermostat for temperature monitoring and regulation in range 0 to +60 °C /(32 °F to 140 °F)

!

It can be used for temperature monitoring e.g. in switchboards, heating systems, iquids, radiators, motors, devices, open spaces, etc

!

Fixed hysteresis at 1 °C / 32 °F

!

TER-3E - choice of external temperature sensors with double insulation in standard lengths 3, 6 and 12 m (9.8´,19.7´ and 29.5´)

!

TER-3F - sensor is a part of device, serves for monitoring temperature in a switchboard

!

Supply voltage AC /DC 24 - 240 V

!

Output contact 1x NO- SPST 16 A / 250 V AC1

!

Output status is indicated by red LED

!

1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting

Symbol Connection

external sensor

Un

A1 A2

T1 T1

15 18

Un

A1 A2

15 18

Description

Supply voltage indication

Supply voltage terminals

External sensor

A1 A2

T1 T1 terminal

Output indication

Temperature adjusting

Supply voltage indication

Temperature adjusting

A1 A2

Supply voltage terminals

Output indication

Function

T1

T1

TER-3E, TER-3F

A1

A2

15 18

TEMPERATURE

18

15

Output contacts

TER-3E

15 18

HYSTERESIS=1K

TER-3F

Sensor

Output contacts

Example of an order

Please specify a type of thermostat in your order (TER-3E , TER-3F).

Function description

It is a single thermostat for temperature monitoring with separated sensor (except for TER-3F). Device is located in a switchboard and external sensor senses temperature of required space, object or liquid. Supply is not galvanically separated from sensor but sensor is double insulated. Maximal length of sensor cable is 12 m (29.5´). Temperature sensing is decreased by set hysteresis. When installing it is necessary to keep in mind that hysteresis is increased by temperature gradient between sensor’s jacket and thermistor.

89

2-stage thermostat TER-4

EAN code

TER-4 /230V: 8594030337806

TER-4 /24V: 8594030338148

Technical parameters:

!

Two-state thermostat for temperature monitoring and regulation in a wide range -40 °C to +110 °C (-40 °F to 230 °F) with a switch for temperature ranges shift and fi ne temperature setting ( high accuracy of setting)

!

It can be used for temperature monitoring in e.g. switchboards, heating systems, cooling systems, open spaces, objects, liquids, radiators, etc.

!

2 thermo inputs for sensor NTC 12 kΩ/25 °C (77 °F)

!

Possibility to choose if both thermostats should work independently or dependently (by DIP switch)

!

Function of short-circuit or sensor disconnection monitoring

!

Possibility to set functions “heating ” /“cooling ” (setting is done by DIP switch)

!

Adjustable hysteresis (sensitivity)of switching 0.5 or 2.5 °C (32.9 or 37 °F) (DIP switch)

!

Choice of external thermo sensors with double insulation in standard lengths 3, 6 and 12 m (9.8´,19.7´ and 29.5´)

!

It is possible to place the sensor directly on terminal block – to monitor temperature in a switchboard or in its surroundings

!

Galvanically separated supply AC 230 V or AC/DC 24 V galvanically unseparated

!

2 independent output with changeover contacts/ SPDT 16 A /250 V AC1

!

Output status indicated by red LED, faulty status of sensor by yellow LED

!

3-MODULE, DIN rail mounting

Description

TER-4

Function:

Supply terminals:

Voltage range:

Burden:

Supply voltage tolerance:

Measuring circuit

Measuring terminals:

Temperatue ranges:

(set via switch individually for each level) double thermostat

A1-A2

AC 230 V (AC 50-60 Hz) galvanically separated, AC/DC 24V

max. 4.5 VA

-40 to -25 °C/ -40 to 77 °F

-25 to -10 °C/ 77 to 50 °F

-10 to +5 °C/ 50 to 41 °F

+ 5 to+20 °C/ 41 to 70 °F

+20 to+35 °C/ 70 to 95 °F

- 15 %; + 10 %

T1-T1 a T2-T2

+35 to +50 °C/ 95 to 122 °F

+50 to +65 °C/122 to 149 °F

+65 to +80 °C/149 to 176 °F

+80 to +95 °C/176 to 203 °F

+95 to +110 °C/203 to 230°F

0-15 °C, in selected range adjustable, 0.5 or 2.5 °C / 32.9 or 37°C (DIP switch) adjustable, 0.5 or 2.5 °C / 32.9 or 37°C (DIP switch) termistor NTC 12 kΩ/ 25 °C (77 °F) yellow LED

Function: dependent /independent

Supply voltage indication

Output contact-relay 1

Sensor failure

Output contact-relay 2

Adjusting temperature range

Symbol

Function

Connection

Function of thermostat:

HEATING/COOLING

(inverts output)

Adjusting hysteresis for T1

Adjusting hysteresis for T2

Temperature adjusting T1

Temperature adjusting T2

Temperature adjusting fi ne

Fine temperature setting:

Hysteresis for T1:

Hysteresis for T2:

Sensor:

Sensor failure indication:

Accuracy

Setting accuracy (mech.):

Repeat accuracy:

Temperature dependance:

Output

Number of contacts:

Current rating:

Breaking capacity:

Inrush current:

Switching voltage:

Min. breaking capacity DC:

Output indication:

Mechanical life:

Electrical life (AC1):

Other information

Operating temperature:

Storage temperature:

Electrical strength:

Operating position:

Mounting:

Protection degree:

Overvoltage cathegory:

Pollution degree:

Max. cable size (mm

2

):

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

5 %

0.5 °C / 32.9 °F

< 0.1 % / °C (< 0.1 % / °F)

2x changeover/ DPDT (AgNI / Silver Alloy)16A / AC1

4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC

30 A /< 3 s

250 V AC1 / 24 V DC

500mW

red LED

3x10

7

0.7x10

5

- 20.. +55 °C

- 30.. +70 °C

4 kV (supply - output) any

DIN rail EN 60715

IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals

III.

2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x1.5 (AWG 12)

90 x 52 x 65 mm (3.5˝ x 2˝ x 2.6˝)

238 g (8.4 oz.)

EN 60730-2-9, EN 61010-1

T1

T1

T2

T2

Un

T1

15-18 head

15-18 cool

Chart information:

A1

A2

Un –supply voltage

16

18

26 28

15 25

Un

T2

25-28

T1

15-18 no blocking

15-18 blocking

Un

A1 A2 T1 T1 T2 T2

16 15 18 28 25 26

Independent function Dependent function

T1 –set temperature of thermostat 1

T2 –set temperature of thermostat 2

H1 –set hysteresis of thermostat 1

H2 –set hysteresis of thermostat 2

15-18 output contact of thermostat 1

25-28 output contact of thermostat 2

H1

H1

Blocking function:

H2

H1

When DIP switch 4 is in position ON, condition for thermostat switching is switching output 15-18 at both individual thermostats ( series function). Thus it is possible to use e.g. fi rst thermostat as operational and the other as an emergency one.

Output 25-28 functions normally , according to T2.

H2

H1

This device includes 2 thermostats in one. Thermostat has 2 thermo inputs, 2 outputs and individual temperature setting. It off ers two possibilities of use. Firstly it can be used as two individual thermostats

(e.g. for monitoring two temperature levels of one device or as a control of individual devices), secondly it is possible to set depending function of both thermostats, when thermostat 2 blocks thermostat

No.1 Advantage of this thermostats is a wide temperature range - 40.. +110 °C (in one device) with very good mechanical accuracy of setting. It is due to 10-state switch for thermo ranges and its scale by 15 °C(59 °F) . VIt is possible to use fi ne tuning by potentiometer by 0-15 °C(32-59 °F) with accuracy ±1 °C/ 34 °F . Device has in-built control of sensor fault ( yellow LED). It is possible to set hysteresis

0.5 or 2.5 °C (32.9 or 37 °F).

It is possible to operate the thermostat only with one sensor. In that case it is necessary to connect a resistor 10 kΩ to the other input. This is a part of delivery.

90

Thermostat for monitoring temperature of motor winding TER-7

EAN code

TER-7: 8595188137164

Technical parameters:

Function:

Supply terminals:

Voltage range:

Burden:

Operating range:

Measuring circuit

Measuring terminals:

Cold sensor resistance:

Upper level:

Botton level:

Sensor:

Sensor failure indication:

Accuracy

Accuracy in repetition:

Switching diff erence:

Temperature dependance:

Output

Number of contacts:

Current rating:

Breaking capacity:

Inrush current:

Min. breaking capacity DC:

Mechanical life:

Electrical life (resistive):

Other information

Operating temperature:

Storage temperature:

Electrical strength:

Operating position:

Mounting:

Protection degree:

Overvoltage cathegory:

Pollution degree:

Max. cable size (mm

2

):

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

Function

TER-7

monitoring temperature of motor winding

A1-A2

AC/ DC 24 - 240 V (AC 50-60Hz) max. 2 VA

-15 %; +10 %

!

It monitors temperature in range of PTC thermistor

!

Fixed levels of switching

!

PTC sensor is used for sensing, It is in-built in motor winding by its manufacturer

!

MEMORY function - active by DIP switch

!

RESET of faulty state: a) button on the front panel b) by external contact (remote by two wires)

!

Function of short-circuit or sensor disconnection monitoring, red LED fl ashing indicates faulty sensor

!

Output contact: 2x changeover/DPDT 8 A /250 V AC1

!

Red LED shines and indicates exceeded temperature

!

Terminals of sensor are galvanically separated, they can be shorted out by terminal PE without damaging the device

!

Multivoltage supply AC/DC 24-240 V

!

1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting

Description

Supply terminals

Output contacts

Supply voltage indication

A1 A2

25 26 28

Faulty states indication

MEMORY function

Function TEST

Ta-Tb

50 Ω - 1.5 kΩ

3.3 kΩ

1.8 kΩ

PTC temperature of motor winding blinking red LED

RESET button

< 5%

± 5 %

< 0.1 % / °C

15 16 18

Output contacts

Ta R Tb

2x changeover/DPDT (AgNI / Silver Alloy)8 A / AC1

2000 VA / AC1, 192 W / DC

10 A /< 3 s

250 V AC1 / 24 V DC

500mW

3x10

7

0.7x10

5

Symbol Connection

Terminals for sensor and reset

A1 16 18 26 28

A1 A2

-20 °C to +55 °C (-4 °F to 131 °F)

-30 °C to +70 °C ( -22 °F to +158 °F)

4 kV (supply - output) any

DIN rail EN 60715

IP 40 from front panel / IP 20 terminals

III.

2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5 with sleeve max. 1x2.5 AWG (12)

90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)

83 g (2.9 oz.)

EN 60730-2-9, EN 61010-1

Ta

Tb

R

PTC

A2 15 25

25 26 28

15 16 18

Ta R Tb

PTC

Note

Sensors could be in series in abide with conditions in technical specifi cation - switching limit.

Warning!: In case of supply from the main, neutral wire must be connected to terminal A2.

∞ Ω

Ω

3.3

Ω

1.8

Ω

Ω

Ω

red LED

memory

PTC / TK

The device controls temperature of motor winding with PTC thermistor which is mostly placed in motor winding or very close to it. Resistance of PTC thermistor run to max 1.5 kΩ in cold stage.

By temperature increase the resistance goes strongly up and by overrun the limit of 3.3 kΩ the contact of output relay switch off - mostly contactor controlling a motor. By temperature decrease and thereby decrease of thermistor resistance under 1.8 kΩ the output contact of relay again switches on. The relay has function “Control of sensor fault“. This controls interruption or disconnection of sensor.When switch is in position “TK” monitoring of faulty sensor is not functional - it is possibel to connect bimetal sensor with only 2 states: ON or OFF. The device can work with bi-metal sensor in this position.

Other safety unit is function “Memory”. By temperature overrun (and output switches off ) the output is hold in faulty stage until service hit.

This bring the relay to normal stage (with RESET button) on front panel or by external contact (remote).

91

TER-9

EAN code

TER-9/230V: 8595188124478

TER-9/24V: 8595188129190

Technical parameters:

Supply

Number of function:

Supply terminals:

Voltage range:

Burden:

Operating range:

Measuring circuit

Measuring terminals:

Temperature range:

Hysteresis (sensitivity):

Diference temperature:

Sensor:

Sensor failure indication:

Accuracy

Measuring accuracy:

Repeat accuracy:

Temperature dependance:

Output

Number of contacts:

Current rating:

Max. breaking capacity:

Switching voltage:

Min. breaking capacity DC:

Output indication:

Mechanical life:

Electrical life (AC1):

Time circuit

Power back-up:

Accuracy:

Min. switching interval:

Data stored for:

Program circuit

Number of memory places:

Program:

Data readout:

Other information

Operating temperature:

Storage temperature:

Electrical strength:

Operating position:

Mounting:

Protection degree:

Overvoltage cathegory:

Pollution degree:

Max. cable size (mm 2 ):

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

92

15 16 18 25 26 28

INNOVATION!

TER-9

6

A1 - A2

AC 230 V (AC 50-60 Hz) galvanically separated,

AC/DC 24V galvanically unseparated max. 4 VA

-15 %; +10 %

CR 2032 (3V)

T1-T1 and T2-T2

-40.. +110 °C in an adjustable range 0.5.. 5 °C

adjustable 1.. 50 °C termistor NTC 12 kΩ při 25 °C displayed on the LCD

!

Digital thermostat with 6 functions and built-in time switch clock with day, week and year program.

!

You can also limit temperature functions and courses this way in real time.

Complex control of home and water heating, solar heating, etc.

!

Two thermostats in one, two temperature inputs, two outputs with dry contact

!

Maximum universal and variable thermostat including all ordinary thermostat functions

!

Functions: two independent thermostats, dependent thermostat, diff erential thermostat, two level thermostat, zone-based thermostat, dead zone thermostat

!

Program setting of output functions, calibration of sensors according to reference temperature (off set)

!

!

!

The thermostat is subject to the digital clock programs

Wide operating range of temperature settings, the possibility of measuring in

0

C and

0

F

Clear display of set and measured data on a backlit LCD

!

Power supply: AC 230V or 24V AC/DC (based on type of device)

!

The time switch clock has a battery backup, which retains data in case of a power outage (reserve backup time - up to 3 years)

!

Easy replacement of the backup battery through the plug-in module, no disassembling is required

!

Output contact 1x changeover/SPDT 8 A / 250 V AC1 for each output

!

2-MODULE, DIN rail mounting

Symbol

Connection

Un

T1

T1

T2

T2

A1

°C

A2

16 18 26 28

15 25

Description of visual elements on the display

A1 A2 T1 T1 T2 T2

15 16 18 25 26 28

5 %

< 0.5 °C

< 0.1 % / °C

1x changeover for each input/SPDT, (AgNi)

8 A / AC1

2000 VA / AC1, 240 W / DC

250 V AC1 / 30 V DC symbol ON/OFF

Displaying the day

Status indication (1st channel)

Status indication (2nd channel)

Display of date / temperature

1 and 2 of setting menu

Time display

Control button PRG+

Reset

TER-9

Auto + t Prog Man

Operation mode indication

Displays 12/24 hour mode

Indication of the switching program

Control button MAN2 / ESC

1x10 7

1x10 5

Control button MAN1 / -

Control button OK up to 3 year max. ±1 s per day, at 23°C

1 min min. 10 years

Device description

Supply voltage terminal (A1)(A2)

Sensor-Terminal 1

Sensor-Terminal 2

100 daily, weekly, yearly

LCD display, with back light

Backlight display

-10 °C to +55 °C (+14 °F to 131 °F)

-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)

4 kV (power supply - output) any

DIN rail EN 60715

IP 20 terminals, IP 40 from front panel

III.

2 solid wire max.1x 2.5 or 2x1.5/ with sleeve max. 1x2.5 (AWG 12)

90 x 35.6 x 64 mm

(230V) 127 g (24V) 120 g

EN 61812-1. EN 61010-1. EN 60730-2-9; EN 60730-1; EN 60730-2-7

Lead-sealing point

Plug-in module for replacement of the backup battery

Output - Channel 1(15-16-18)

Auto

TER-9

RESET

MAN 2

PRG +

MAN

_

ESC

OK

15 16 18 25 26 28

Control buttons

Output - Channel 2 (26-25-28)

Multifunction digital thermostat TER-9

2 independent single-stage thermostats

Heating functions

T1 dy1

Ts1 dy2

15-18

Heating functions dy1 dy2

H1

H1

T2 dy1

Ts2 dy2

25-28 dy1 dy2

H2

H2

Depending functions of 2 thermostats

Legend:

Ts1 - real (measured) temperature 1

Ts2 - real (measured) temperature 2

T1 - adjusted temperature T1

T2 - adjusted temperature T2

H1 - adjusted hysteresis for T1

H2 - adjusted hysteresis for T2 dy1 - set switching delay of the output dy2 - set delay on output breaking

15-18 output contact (for T1)

25-28 output contact (for T2)

T2

Ts2 dy1

25-28

T1

15-18

15-18

Ts1 dy1 dy2 dy1 dy2 dy2 dy1 dy2

H2

H2

H2 dy1 dy2 dy1 dy1 dy2

H1

Legend:

Ts1 - real (measured) temperature 1

Ts2 - real (measured) temperature 2

T1 - adjusted temperature T1

T2 - adjusted temperature T2

H1 - adjusted hysteresis for T1

H2 - adjusted hysteresis for T2 dy1- set switching delay of the output dy2 - set delay on output breaking

25-28 output contact (for T2)

15-18 output contact (intersection T1 and T2)

Diff erential thermostat

Ts1

D

Ts2

D-H1

D dy1

15-18

25-18 dy1 dy2

2-stage thermostat

T1

D

Ts

T dy1

15-18 dy2

25-28 dy1 dy1dy2

D-H2 dy2

D dy1

Legend:

Ts1 - real (measured) temperature T1

Ts2 - real (measured) temperature T2

D - adjusted diff erence dy1- set switching delay of the output dy2 - set delay on output breaking

15-18 output contact (for T1)

25-28 output contact (for T2) dy2 dy1 dy2

H1

H1

H1

H2

H2

H2 dy1

Legend:

Ts - real (measured) temperature

T1 - adjusted temperature

D - adjusted diff erence

H1 - adjusted hysteresis for T1

H2 - T=T1-D dy1- set switching delay of the output dy2 - set delay on output breaking

15-18 output contact

25-28 output contact

15-18

25-28

Thermostat with “WINDOW”

Ts

T1

D dy1 dy1 dy2 dy2 dy1 dy2 dy1 dy1 dy2 dy1 dy2 dy2

H1

H1

H1

H2

H2

H2

Legend:

Ts - real (measured) temperature

T1 - adjusted temperature

T2 - adjusted temperature T=T1-D

H1 - adjusted hysteresis for T1

H2 - adjusted hysteresis for T2 dy1- set switching delay of the output dy2 - set delay on output breaking

15-18 output contact

25-28 output contact

Thermostat with dead zone

D

T1

15-18

25-28

Ts dy1 dy2 dy1 dy2 dy1

H1

H1

H1

H2

H2

H2

Legend:

Ts - real (measured) temperature

T1 - adjusted temperature

T2- T=T1-D

H1 - adjusted hysteresis for T1

H2 - adjusted hysteresis for T2 dy1- set switching delay of the output dy2 - set delay on output breaking

15-18 output contact (heating)

25-28 output contact (cooling)

Classic function of thermostat, output contact switched until adjusted temperature is reached. Hysteresis eliminates frequent switching - output oscillation.

Output 15-18 is closed, if temperature of both thermostats is bellow an adjusted level.

When any thermostat reaches adjusted level, the contact 15-18 opens.

Serial inner connection of thermostats (logic function AND).

Switching of output corresponds with input, which has lower temperatures when diff ference is exceeded.

Diff erencial thermostat is used for keeping two identical temperature e.g. in heating systems (boiler and reservoir), solar systems (collector - reservoir, exchanger), water heating (water heater, water distribution)etc.

Typical example of use for two-stage thermostat is e.g in boiler-room, where there are two biolers from which one is main and the other one is auxiliary. The main boiler is managed according to set temperature and auxiliary boiler is switched in case temperature falls under set diff erence. Thus it helps to the main boiler in case outside temperature dramatically falls.

In the range of set diff erence (D) output 15-18 functions as normal thermostat to input

1 (type 1). In case temperature falls under set diff erence, second output switches too.

Output is closed (heating) only if temperature is within adjusted range. If temperature is out of range, the contact opens. T is set as T1-D.

The function is used for protection of gutters against freezing.

In case of thermostat with a „dead zone“ , it is possible to set temperature T1 and a diff erence (respectively a width of dead zone D). If temperature is higher than T1, output contact of cooling switches ON; if the temperature gets bellow T1, the contact switches

OFF.

If the temperature gets bellow temperature T, the contact of heating switches ON and it switches OFF when temperature T is exceeded. This function can be used for example for automatic air warming and cooling in ventilation so the sit is always within the range

T1 and T.

93

Room and fl oor analog thermostat Thermo

Ø 65mm

!

ATR - Analog Thermo Room:

!

Room thermostat with temperature range +5 to +40 °C ( +41 °F to +104 °F) with a built-in sensor

ATF - Analog Thermo Floor:

Floor thermostat with temperature range +5 to +50 °C ( +41 °F to +122 °F) with external sensor

Function „temporary temperature change“ in range ±10 °C (decreasing / increasing temperature)

!

ATC - Analog Thermo Combined:

Room and fl oor thermostat, sensors are connected in series and block each other

Function „temporary temperature change“ , fi x -5 °C /+23 °F (night decline)

Temperature range +5 to +50 °C ( +41 °F to +122 °F) for both sensors, adjustable separately

It is possible to use it without external sensor

EAN code - DEVICE:

ATR : 8595188125000

ATF : 8595188130165

ATC : 8595188130172

EAN code - COMPLET:

ATR, white frame Elegant: 8595188136228

ATF, white frame Elegant, termosensor TC-3m : 8595188135870

ATC, white frame Elegant, termosensor TC-3m: 8595188135887

To devices is neccessary to order additionally - frame in design ELEGANT and external sensor (except ATR)

!

ATR, ATF, ATC

Night decline is activated by a pushbutton on device or external contact (only ATR)

Night decline setting is done by an auxiliary button 2(under main button, only ATR/ATF)

Ofset setting (calibration ±10 °C/ 50 °F) with „known“ thermometer.

External sensor (TC-3, 3m / 9.84’) is a part of delivery (only ATF/ATC), it is possible to extend its length up to 100 m/ 328’

Design ELEGANT*, wide range of colors, possibility to combine more frames together

Technical parameters:

ATR ATF ATC

Description

Supply

Power supply and tolerance:

Consumption, frequency:

Measuring

Temperature range:

Accuracy:

Hysteresis:

Temperature sensor:

Night decline:

Off set/calibration:

Setting

Room temperature setting:

Floor temperature setting:

Off set setting:

Night decline setting:

Night decline switching:

Display

Power supply indication:

Output ON indication:

Night decline indication:

Indication of faulty fl oor sensor:

AC 230 V ±10 %,

6.5 VA/ 50-60 Hz

+5 to +40 °C ( +41 °F to +104 °F) +5 to +50 °C ( +41 °F to +122 °F)

±2 °C/ 36 °F

±1 °C/ 34 °F

room fl oor room + fl oor

adj. ± 7 °C/45 °F adj. ±10 °C/50 °F fi x - 5 °C/ 41 °F

adj. ± 7 °C/45 °F adj. ± 10 °C/50 °F

main knob auxiliary button 1

auxiliary button 2 x

internal / external internal pushbutton green LED 1 red LED 1

red / orange LED 2 red LED 2

Auxiliary button 1*

Main knob

Main switch

Supplyvolatge and output indication

Wiring box

Supply cable

* Auxiliary button 1 and 2 are accessible after removal of the main knob

Connection

ATR

Auxiliary button 2*

Indication of night decline

Night decline push-button

Standart jumper L-15

(remove when potential-free contact is used)

Indication- exceeded temp./ext. sensor:

Output

Type:

Max. loadability:

Contact separation:

Mechanical life:

Electrical life (AC1):

Other information

Operating temperature:

Storage temperature:

Electrical strength:

Mounting:

Protection degree:

Max. cable size (mm

2

):

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

x LED 1 fl ashing potential-free contact NO, material of contact - AgNi

16A/250 V, 4000 VA for AC1 galvanic

3x10 7

0.7x10

5

-10 °C to +55 °C (+14 °F to +131 °F)

-20 °C to +70 °C (-4 °F to +158 °F)

4kV wiring box with min. depth 30mm /1.18 ˝ , Ø min.65 mm / 2.6 ˝

IP30 in standard conditions solid wire 1x 2.5 / 1.5 with sleeve (AWG 12)

84 x 89 x 56.4 mm ( 3.3 ˝ x 3.5 ˝ x 2.22˝ )

110 g (3.9 oz.)

EN 60730-2-9, EN 61010-1

ATF

ATC

L 15 18

N

If potential-free contact is used

Design

Complete off er of switching devices line ELEGANT can be found in an individual catalogue ELEGANT Home switches, which can be sent to you upon request.

L

N

Accessories:

See page 102

94

Digital room and fl oor thermostat Thermo

Ø 65mm

!

DTR - Digital Thermo Room:

Room thermostat with temperature range +5 to +50 °C (+41 °F to+122 °F ) with a built-in sensor

!

DTF - Digital Thermo Floor:

Floor thermostat with temperature range +5 to +50 °C (+41 °F to+122 °F ) with external sensor

!

DTC - Digital Thermo Combined:

Combined thermostat with room and fl oor sensors and temperature range +5 to +50 °C (+41 °F to+122 °F )

Choice of temperature display from internal or external sensors

By program it is possible to choose,which sensor is active and if it should function in serial or in parallel

Adjusting

Min. temperature cycle:

Min. time cycle:

Number of programs:

Number of events:

Off set/calibration:

Display

LCD display:

Displaynig date:

Output indication:

Output

Type:

Max.loadability:

Contact separation:

Mechanical life:

Elektrical life:

Other information

Operating position:

Storing position:

Electical strenght:

Mounting:

Protection degree:

Max. cable size (mm 2 ):

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

!

DTF, DTC

EAN code - DEVICE:

DTR : 8595188125017

DTF : 8595188135924

DTC : 8595188135931

EAN code - COMPLET:

DTR, white frame Elegant: 8595188136235

DTF, white frame Elegant, termosensor TC-3m : 8595188135863

DTC, white frame Elegant, termosensor TC-3m: 8595188135856

To devices is neccessary to order additionally - frame in design ELEGANT and external sensor (except DTR)

External sensor (TC-3,3m)is a part of delivery (only ATF/ATC), it is possible to extend its length up to 100 m(328’)

Monitoring of disconnection or short-circuit of external sensor, fault is displayed

Technical parameters

DTR DTF DTC

Other Funktions DTR, DTF, DTC

Supply

Power supply and tolerance:

Consumption, frequency:

Backup:

Measuring

Temperature range:

Accuracy:

Hysteresis:

Temperature sensor:

AC 230V ±15%,

1.5 VA, 50-60 Hz rechargable accumulator LIR2032 (40mAh) charging time from 0 to 100%: 3 hours backup time when capacity is 100% 72 hours

+5 to +50 °C ( +41 to +122 °C )

± 0.5 °C / 0.5 °C (± 32.9 °C / 32.9 °C) adjustable 0.5 °C or 1 °C /32.9 or 33.8

°C

room (internal) and

room (internal) fl oor (external) fl oor (external)

- programs are pre-set according to most frequently used functions =„Plug and Play “

- pushbutton lock to prevent unwanted manipulation with thermostat

- choice of display current/set temperature

- „freezing protection“ in case temperature drops below +50 °C (+122 °F) thermostat always switches heating on

- choice of function heating or cooling

- easy and intuitive control by four push-buttons

- automatic shift summer/winter time

- holiday mode -it is possible to set temperature and time from 1 hour to 99 days without any

intervention into program settings or turning heating off (suitable in case of planned absence

holiday...)

- modern desing in Elegant line of wall switch buttons, combinations with many colors and

multiframes are possible

Description of visual elements on the display

0.5 °C (32.9

°F)

10 min.

4; pre- set program 1

2- 6 in a program adjustable ±0.5 °C (32.9

°F)

26x24 mm, with backlight (ON or OFF pernamently) current time, set/ current temperature, day in a week, output status red LED and symbol on LCD potential- free contact NO - SPST, material of contact - AgNi (Silver Allow)

16A/250V, 4000VA by AC1 galvanic, electrical strength 4kV

3x10 7

0.7x10

5

-10 °C to +55 °C ( +14 °F to +131°F)

-20 °C to +70 °C ( -4 °F to +158°F)

4kV

IP30 in standard conditions wiring box with min. depth 30mm /1.18 ˝ , Ø min.65 mm / 2.6 ˝ solid wire 1x 2.5 / 1.5 with sleeve (AWG 12)

84 x 89 x 54.3 mm ( 3.3 ˝ x 3.5 ˝ x 2.14 ˝ )

120 g (0.26oz.)

EN 60730-2-9, EN 61812-1, EN 61010-1

Program mode

Operational mode

Time setting

Manual mode

(permanent/temporary)

External sensor

Description

Connection

DTR

16 A/ 4000VA

250 VμAC1

Output indication

Display

Controlling buttons

Reset

Wiring box

Supply cable

DTF

DTC

Day of the week

AM/PM

Holliday mode

Temperature display

15 18 L

16 A/ 4000VA

250 VμAC1

N

N

Program events

Design

L

N

L

N

Complete off er of switching devices line ELEGANT can be found in an individual catalogue ELEGANT Home switches, which can be sent to you upon request.

Accuracy:

See page 102

95

Energy-saving digital radiator thermostat ATV-1

NEW!

!

This energy-saving digital radiator thermostat is a programmable regulation device for various heaters,

but mainly radiators

!

It can be used to regulate temperature in closed rooms, thus helping to lower heat energy consumption;

Functions:

Manual mode - measuring and checking a manually set temperature

Automatic mode - control between two temperatures based on a set time program:

- comfort temperature (factory setting 21°C)

- energy-saving temperature (factory setting 16°C)

!

!

Intervals of heating and energy-saving operation can be set using a freely adjustable time program.

8 individually programmable switching times per day:

!

!

- 4 heating intervals

- 4 energy-saving intervals

The device features very quiet operation and long battery life (up 5 years)

Quick and easy installation

EAN code

ATV-1

USB programming adapte

8595188160889

8595188160995

Technical parameters:

Operating voltage:

Temperature range:

Color:

Dimensions (L x W x H):

Design:

ATV-1

3 V / DC (2 AA batteries 1.5 V / DC AA)

+ 8.. +28 °C

White

76.5 x 53.5 x 63 mm

Thermostatic direction valves, electronic

Examples of daily heating program:

BATHROOM

21 °C

21 °C

saving saving saving saving saving

8:00 - 9:00 10:30 - 12:00 16:00 - 17:00 20:00 - 21:30

LIVING ROOM

21 °C

21 °C

saving saving

9:00 - 10:00

Setting for ATV-1:

- manual

- via USB programming adapter PROGmatic

Using the programming port, in seconds your settings will be transferred into the thermostat.

17:00 - 20:30

saving

Other functions

1. Time function - the desired temperature can be set for a certain adjustable time interval

2. Vacation function - while you‘re gone, you can set and maintain the desired temperature

3. Open window function - when the temperature drops, the heating valve automatically closes in order to save energy

4. Child safety block - blocking against undesired interference with the thermostat

5. Freeze protection - if the temperature drops below 6 °C, the valve opens until the temperature again exceeds 8 °C. This keeps heaters from freezing.

Description of device

1

2

3

02

Mo Di

61

Mi

:

21

Do Fr

8

Sa

4

So

AUTO

MANU

4

5

1. Display

2. Increase temperature

3.Button MENU

4. Button - timer function

5. Decrease temperature

6. OK button - confi rm settings

6

Adapters

Type of valve

Heimeier, Junkers Landys+Gyr, MNG,

Honeywell, Braukmann thread size M 30x1,5

Danfoss RAV

(the valve plunger must be fi tted with the enclosed pin)

Danfoss RA

Type of adapter

No adapter necessary

+ enclosed pin; only for RAV

Package content

Package content

Danfoss RAVL

Thermostat

Adapters

Instruction manual

96

Thermostats TEV-2, TEV-3

TEV-2 TEV-3

EAN code

TEV-2: 8595188129251

TEV-3: 8595188129268

Technical parameters

Function:

Supply terminals:

Voltage range:

Input:

Tolerance of voltage range:

Measuring circuit

Measuring terminals:

Temperature ranges:

Hysteresis (sensitivity):

Sensor:

Faulty sensor indication:

Accuracy

Accuracy of settings (mechanical):

Dependance on temperature:

Output

Number of contacts:

Current rating:

Max. breaking capacity:

Peak current:

Switched voltage:

Min.switching output DC:

Output indication:

Mechanical life:

Electrical life (AC1):

Other information

Operation temperature:

Operation position:

Protection degree:

Overvoltage cathegory:

Polution level:

Max. cable size (mm 2 ):

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

TEV-2

one-level thermostat

L - N

230V AC / 50 - 60 Hz max. 2.5 VA

±15%

TEV-3

T- T

-20 to +20 °C / -4 °F to +68 °F +5 to+35 °C/ +41 °F to +95 °F

3 °C (± 1.5 °C) / 37,4 °F (± 34.7 °F) thermistor NTC 12 kΩ red LED flashing

5 %

< 0.1 % / °C

1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNI / Silver Alloy)

16 A / AC1

4000 VA / AC1, 384W / DC

30 A/ < 3 s

250 V AC1 / 24V DC

500 mW red LED

3x10 7

0.7x10

5

-30 to +50 °C (-22 °F to 122°F) any

IP 65

III.

2 solid wire 2.5/ with sleeve 1.5 (AWG 12)

110 x 135 x 66 mm (4.33˝x 5.3˝x 2.3˝)

266 g (9.38 oz.) 277 g(9.77 oz.)

EN 60730-2-9, EN 61010-1

!

Single thermostat with possibility of temperature management in adjustable range (it is possible to modify this range or make a special one on request)

!

Used to regulate heating (or cooling) in demanding environments (outside , humidity, dustiness, etc.)

!

Thermostat is placed in water-proof box with IP65, which enables installation outside, with in-built sensor TC-0

!

TEV-2 - control and indication elements are placed under transparent cover

!

TEV-3 - control and indication elements are placed directly on the cover (for easy orientation and frequent change of temperature)

!

Thermostat status is indicated by LED (2 colours)

!

Function of monitoring sensor disconnection and short-circuit

!

Output changeover /SPDT contact 16A(AC-1)

T

T

Symbol

PG11

L

N

V1 V2

L

Connection

Function heating

Description TEV-2 (without cover)

PG11

Opening for incoming cables

Description TEV-3 (cover)

PG9

SENSOR NTC

Function cooling

SENSOR NTC

Device status indication

Temperature setting

Terminal for sensor

Terminals for connection of supply voltage and output contact

Sensor

Device status indication

Function TEV-2,TEV-3

Hysteresis

Sensor failure

Temperature setting

V1

LED red

LED green

TEV-2 and TEV-3 are universal single thermostats for universal use. In case ambient temperature is higher than set temperature relay is open (function HEATING), for cooling function (opposite function) is possible to use NC contact of relay (V2).

PG11 PG11

Opening for incoming cables

PG9

Sensor

97

Thermostat TEV-1

EAN code

TEV-1: 8595188129121

Technical parameters

Function:

Supply terminals:

Voltage range:

Input:

Tolerance of voltage range:

Measuring circuit

Measuring terminals:

Temperature ranges:

thermostat 1

thermostat 2

Hysteresis (sensitivity):

Sensor:

Faulty sensor indication:

Accuracy

Accuracy of settings (mechanical):

Dependance on temperature:

Output

Number of contacts:

Current rating:

Max. breaking capacity::

Peak current:

Switched voltage:

Min.switching output DC:

Output indication:

Mechanical life:

Electrical life:

Other information

Operation temperature:

Operation position:

Protection degree:

Overvoltage cathegory:

Pollution level:

Max. cable size (mm 2 ):

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

!

Two-level thermostat with function “WINDOW” meaning that output is switched in case the measured temperature is within set range ( adjustable in range -20.. +20 °C/ -4 °F to +68 °F)

!

Used as protection against freezing ( water-shoots, pavements, drives, pipes, etc.) heating is on when temperature falls under set upper level (e.g.+5 °C/ +41 °F) and off in case it falls under lower level (e.g.-10 °C /-50 °F , when heating is not able eff ectively operate)

!

Thermostat is placed in water-proof box with IP65, which allows installation outside, with in-built sensor TC-0

!

Thermostat status is indicated by LED (3colors) under transparent cover

!

Function monitoring short-circuit and sensor disconnection (break)

TEV-1

two-level thermostat

L - N

230V AC / 50 - 60 Hz max. 2.5 VA

±15 %

T - T

-20.. +20 °C (-4 °F to +68 °F)

-20.. +20 °C (-4 °F to +68 °F)

3

°C

(± 1.5

°C

) thermistor NTC 12 kΩ/ 25 °C (77 °F ) red LED flashing

5 %

< 0.1 % / °C

1x changeover/ SPDT (AgNI / Silver Alloy)

16 A / AC1

4000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC

30 A / < 3 s

250 V AC1 / 24 V DC

500 mW

LED

3x10 7

0.7x10

5

-30 °C to +50 °C (-22 °F to 140 °F) any

IP 65

III.

2 solid wire 2.5/ with sleeve 1.5 (AWG 12)

110 x 135 x 66 mm (4.33 ˝x 5.3 ˝x 6.6 ˝)

238 g (8.4 oz.)

EN 60730-2-9, EN 61010-1

!

Output changeover contact 16A/ SPDT (AC-1)

Symbol Connection

Function heating

T

T

Function

L

N

Description

V1 V2

L

V1

LED red

LED green

LED orange

Un

T1

T2

V1 L V2 N N

SENSOR NTC

T1

T1

Function cooling

Hysteresis

Sensor failure

SENSOR NTC

Device status indication

Bottom temperature setting

Upper temperature

Terminal for sensor connection

Terminals for connection of supply voltage and output contact

Description of function

TEV-1 is a double thermostat designated for system of protection of roof water- shoots against freezing. The device is placed in a waterproof box (IP65), sensor with double insulation,which is a part of the device, senses ambientrature. The device operates as zonal thermostat with independent setting of upper and bottom operational temperature. In case the ambient temperature is higher than T1 (upper temperature), thermostat switches heating of watershoots off (icing melts down). In case the ambient temperature is lower than T2 (bottom temperature), thermostat also switches heating off (to big freezing heating cannot manage to melt the ice).

PG11 PG11

Opening for incoming cables

PG9

Sensor

98

Thermostat TEV-4

153x62x34

IP65

EAN code

TEV-4: 8595188140577

Technical parameters:

Supply

Supply terminals:

Voltage range:

Tolerance of voltage range:

Input (apparent/loss):

Function

Function - :

Function - :

Temperature setting

- range 1:

- range 2:

- range 3:

Slight temperature setting:

Hysteresis:

Hysteresis setting:

Output

Output contact:

Current rating:

Max. breaking capacity:

Peak current:

Switched voltage:

Min.switching output:

Mechanical life:

Electrical life:

Other information

Operation temperature:

Storing temperature:

Electrical strengh:

Operation position:

Protection degree:

Overvoltage cathegory:

Pollution level:

Max. cable size (mm 2 ):

Suggested power-supply cable:

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

Function

Actual temperature level

Setup temperature level

!

Single point thermostat for monitoring and regulation of temperature in demanding enviroments (humid and contaminated, agressive and defective, industrial workshops, washing rooms, green-houses, cellars and cooling boxes…)

!

External version in IP65, box for mounting on the wall

!

Built-in thermo-sensor is integrated in the device

!

Two fuctions adjustable by jumper: heating and cooling

!

3 adjustable (by jumper) ranges of temperature, and fi ne adjustment through potentiometer

!

3 adjustable (by jumper) levels of hysteresis

!

Supply voltage 230 V AC

!

Potentialless NO- SPST contact 12A AC1 switching

TEV-4

L - N

AC 230V / 50 - 60Hz

- 15% .. +10% max. 6VA / 0.7W

setting by jumper J3 cooling heating

by jumper J2

-30 °C to 0 °C (-22 °F to 32 °F)

0 °C to +30 °C (32 °F to 86 °F)

+ 30 °C to +60 °C (86 °F to 140 °F) potentiometer

0.5 / 1.5 / 4 °C (32.9 °F/ 34.7 °F/ 39.2 °F) by jumper J1

1 x NO- SPST (AgSnO

2

)

12 A / AC1

3000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC

30 A / < 3 s

250 V AC / 24 V DC

500 mW

3 x 10 7

0.7 x 10 5

-30 °C to +65 °C (-22 °F to 149 °F)

-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)

4kV (supply-output)

sensor-side down

IP65

III.

2 max.1x2.5, max. 2x1.5/ with sleeve max.1x2.5 (AWG 12)

CYKY 3x2.5 (CYKY4x1.5)

153 x 62 x 34 mm ( 6˝ x 2.4˝ x 1˝)

148 g (5.2 oz.)

EN 60730-2-9, 61010-1

Description (proportion is accordant to real size)

Cable gommet M16x1.5

for cable max. Ø 10mm/ 0.4˝

Hole for mounting on the wall

Ø 4.3mm/ 0.2˝

Connection

L

N jumper for L potential

TEV-4

0.5

1.5

4

L

15

J1

Hysteresis

(°C)

18

L

N

J2

Adjustable range

setting (°C)

J3

Function

cooling

heating

-30 .. 0

0 .. 30

30 .. 60

Slight setup fi nish in the frame of range

N

L potentialless

NO contacts

Hole for mounting on the wall

Ø 4.3mm/ 0.2˝

Temperature sensor

L

15

18

L

N

L

15

18

L

N adjustable hysteresis

3- wire connection 4- wire connection

L - N

Function heat

15 - 18

Function cool

15 - 18

Device is standardly supplied with jumper L-15 (3-wire connection).

For the correct function of device is neccesary sensor-side down device mounting.

99

Hygro-thermostat RHT-1

EAN code

RHT-1: 8595188137263

Technical parameters

Function:

Supply terminals:

Input:

Voltage range:

Tolerance of voltage range:

Measuring circuit

Temperature range:

Humidity range:

Temperature hysterisis:

Humidity hysterisis:

Sensor: internal

Indication of sensor´s fault:

Accuracy

Setting accuracy (mechanical):

Long-term stability of humidity:

Output

Number of contacts:

Current rating:

Switched output:

Switched voltage:

Output indication:

Mechanical life:

Electrical life:

Other information

Operational temperature:

Storing temperature:

Electrical strengh:

Operational position:

Mounting:

Protection degree:

Overvoltage category:

Pollution degree:

Terminal wire capacity (mm

2

):

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

Symbol

T

RH

A1

A2

15

18

RHT-1

hygro-thermostat

A1 - A2

1VA

24-240V AC / DC (AC 50 - 60 Hz)

-15%; +10%

!

Hygro-thermostat for temperature monitoring and regulation in range 0 °C to +60 °C (32 °F to 140 °F)

and relative humidity monitoring and regulation in range 50...90%

!

Possibility of setting of up to 8 conditions for contact switching and function permanently ON/OFF

!

Sensor is a part of the device - designated for measuring in switchboards

!

Function of sensor control (damage, disturbances...)

!

Fixed setting of temperature hysteresis at 2.5 °C / 36.5 °F and humidity at 4%

!

Output state is indicated by red LED

!

Supply voltage AC/DC 24-240 V

!

Output contact 1x NO/ SPDT 16A/250 V AC1

!

1-MODULE, DIN rail mounting

Device description:

15 18

TOP

Output contacts

Ventilative upper oppenings

Output indication

Indication of supply voltage

Function setting

Temperature setting

0 °C to +60 °C (32 °F to 140 °F)

50.. 90%

2.5 °C / 36.5 °F

4%

internal red LED fl ashing

Humidity setting

5% typical < 0.8% / year

Ventilative lower opennings

1x NO/SPDT (AgSnO

2

)

16A / AC1, 10A / 24V DC

4000 VA / AC1, 300W / DC

250V AC1 / 24V DC red LED shines

3x10 7

0.7x10

5

-20 °C to +60 °C (-4 °F to 140 °F)

-30 °C to +70 °C ( -22 °F to +158 °F )

2.5 kV (supply-output) vertical, with correct orientation

DIN rail EN 60715

IP40 from front panel, IP10 on terminals

III.

2 max. 2x2:5, max. 1x4 with sleeve max. 1x2.5, max. 2x1.5 (AWG 12)

90 x 17.6 x 64 mm (3.5˝ x 0.7˝ x 2.5˝)

69 g (2.4 oz. )

EN 60730-2-9, EN 61010-1

Connection

15 18

Funcions:

Choice of function

G

H

E

F

C

D

A

B

ON

OFF

A2 A1

Supply voltage terminals

T > Tset

T < Tset

T > Tset

T < Tset

T < Tset

T > Tset

T < Tset

T > Tset

Relay switched under the following conditions or or or or a a a a relay permanently ON relay permanently OFF

RH > RHset

RH > RHset

RH < RHset

RH < RHset

RH < RHset

RH < RHset

RH > RHset

RH > RHset

-

A2 A1

Un

+

Description of functon:

This device is designated for monitoring of parameters of environment (meaning temperature and relative humidity) in switchboards. It enables setting of eight conditions of constact closing and therefore it is usable for various types of load (e.g. fans, heating, air-conditioning, dehydrating units...). While installing it is neccessary to take into account the fact that hysterisis rises by persistence of measured values between sensor and ambient environment. The device is equipped by sensor fault detection. In case of sensor fault, exceeding allowed limits (for temperature -30°C/ -22 °F and +80°C/ 176 °F; for humidity 5% and 95%) or in case of faulty internal communcation higher than 50% ( due to e.g. high ambient disturbances) contact opens and sensor fault is indicated. Sensor fault doesn´t have infl uence on function permanently ON or pemanently OFF.

Note: In case the conditions for switching are not applied, relay is open.

100

Hygrostat RHV-1

153x62x34

IP65

!

Single hygrostat is used for regulation of humidity in harsh environments (washdown, greenhouse, refrigeration)

!

External version in IP65, box for mounting on the wall

!

Built-in hygro-sensor is integrated in the device

!

Two functions adjustable by jumper: moisting and drying

!

3 adjustable (by jumper) levels of hysteresis

!

Supply voltage 230V AC

!

NO contact closure 12A/AC1

EAN code

RHV-1: 8595188140584

Technical parameters:

Supply

Supply terminals:

Voltage range:

Input voltage range:

Input (apparent/loss):

Setting function

Function -  :

Function -  :

Set. the scale of relative humidity:

- range 1:

- range 2:

- range 3:

Slight setting of relative humidity:

Hysteresis

Hysteresis setting:

Output

Output contact:

Current rating:

Switching output:

Peak current:

Switched voltage:

Min.switching output:

Mechanical life:

Electrical life:

Other information

Operation temperature:

Storing temperature:

Electrical strengh:

Operation position:

Protection degree:

Overvoltage cathegory:

Pollution level:

Max. cable size (mm 2 ):

Suggested power-supply cable:

Dimensions:

Weight:

Standards:

Function

Actual humidity level

Setup relative humidity level

RHV-1

Description (proportion is accordant to real size)

L - N

AC 230V / 50 - 60Hz

- 15% .. +10% max. 6VA /0.7W

Setting function Jumper J3 moistening drying

Humidity setting Jumper J2

0 ... 30 % RH

30 ... 60 % RH

60 ... 90 % RH

Relative Humidity Setting Potentiometer

2, 3, 4 % from setup rate

Jumper J1

1 x NO-SPST (AgSnO

2

)

12 A / AC1

3000 VA / AC1, 384 W / DC

30 A / < 3 s

250 V AC / 24 V DC

500 mW

3 x 10

7

0.7 x 10 5

Cable gommet M16x1.5

for cable max. Ø 10mm/ 0.4˝

-30 °C to +60 °C (-22 °F to 140 °F)

-30 °C to +70 °C (-22 °F to 158 °F)

4kV (supply-output) sensor-side down

IP65

III.

2 max.1x2.5, max. 2x1.5/ with sleeve max.1x2.5( AWG 12)

CYKY 3x2.5 (CYKY4x1.5)

153 x 62 x 34 mm (6˝ x 2.4˝ x 1.3˝)

148 g (5.2 oz.)

EN 60730-2-9, 61010-1

Hole for mounting on the wall

Ø 4.3mm/ 0.2˝

Connection

L

N jumper for L potential

RHV-1

L

15

L

N

2

3

4

J1

Hysteresis

(% from value)

18

J2

Adjustable range

setting (%RH)

J3

Function

 drying

 moistening

0 .. 30

30 .. 60

60 .. 90

Slight setup fi nish in the frame of range

N

L potentialless

NO- SPST contacts

L

15

18

L

N

L

15

18

Adjustable hysteresis

3- wire connection

Hole for mounting on the wall Ø 4.3mm/ 0.2˝

Humidity sensor

4- wire connection

L

N

L - N

Function moistens

15 - 18

Function drying

15 - 18

Device is supplied with a standard jumper.

For the device to operate correctly, it must be mounted with the sensor side down.

101

Temperature sensors TC, TZ, PT100 - Accessories to Thermostats

TC TZ PT100

EAN code

TC-0

TC-3

TC-6

TC-12

TZ-0

TZ-3

TZ-6

TZ-12

PT100-3

PT100-6

PT100-12

8595188110075

8595188110617

8595188110082

8595188110099

8595188140591

8595188110600

8595188110594

8595188110587

8595188136136

8595188136143

8595188136150

!

!

!

Thermister temperature sensors are made of Negative Temperature Co-effi cient (NTC) embedded in a PVC or metal sleeve with a thermally-conductive sealer

Sensor TC - lead-in cable to sensor TC is made of wire CYSY 2Dx0.5 mm/ 0.02”

Sensor TZ - cable VO3SS-F 2Dx0.5mm /0.02” with silicone insulation for use in high

temperature applications

- silicone insulation for use in high temperature applications

Sensor PT100 - shielded silicon 2x0.22 mm

2

(AWG 21), shielding connected with a case

!

Weight of sensors TC: Weight of sensors TZ: Weight of sensors PT100:

- TC-0 - 5 g (0.2 oz.)

- TC-3 - 108 g (3.8 oz.)

- TC-6 - 213 g (7.5 oz.)

- TC-12 - 466 g (16.4 oz.)

- TZ-0 - 4.5 g (0.16 oz.)

- TZ-3 - 106 g (3.74 oz.)

- TZ-6 - 216 g (7.6 oz.)

- TZ-12 - 418g (14.7 oz.)

- PT100-3 - 68 g (2.4 oz.)

- PT100-6 - 149 g (5.3 oz.)

- PT100-12 - 249 g (8.8 oz.)

Technical parameters

Range:

Scanning element:

In air/ in water:

In air/ in water:

Cable material:

Terminal material:

Protection degree:

TC TZ PT100

0 °C to +70 °C (32 °F to 158 °F)

NTC 12K 5 %

(τ65) 92 s / 23 s

(τ95) 306 s / 56 s

High temperature PVC

High temperature PVC

IP 67

-40 °C to +125 °C (-40 °F to 257 °F)

NTC 12K 5 %

(τ65) 62 s / 8 s

(τ95) 216 s / 23 s

Silicone

Nickel plated copper

IP 67

-30 °C to +200 °C (-22 °F to 392 °F)

PT 100

(τ0.5) - / 7 s

(τ0.9) - / 19 s

Silicone

Copper

IP 67

τ65 (95): time, which sensor needs to heat up on 65 (95) % of ambient temperature of environment, in which is located

Resistive values of sensors in dependance on temperature

Temperature ( 0 C/

20 / 68

30 / 86

40 / 104

50 / 122

60 / 140

70 / 158

0 F ) Sensor NTC (kΩ)

14.7

9.8

6.6

4.6

3.2

2.3

Sensor PT100 (Ω)

107.8

111.7

115.5

119.4

123.2

127.1

Tolerance of sensor NTC 12 kΩ is ± 5% by 25

0

C/ 77

0

F .

Long-term resistence stability by sensor PT100 is 0.05% (10 000 hours)

TC: Temperature sensors for range 0 °C to +70 °C (32 °F to 158 °F)

TC-0 Temperature sensor can be connected directly to terminal block (sensor length 110 mm/4.33")

TC-3 Temperature sensor 3 m (9.8´)

TC-6 Temperature sensor 6 m (19.7´)

TC-12 Temperature sensor 12 m (39.4´)

PT-100: Temperature sensor for range -30 °C to +200 °C (-22 °F to 392 °F)

PT100-3 -Temperature sensor 3 m (9.8´), double isolation silicone

PT100-6 -Temperature sensor 6 m (19.7´), double isolation silicone

PT100-12 -Temperature sensor 12 m (39.4´), double isolation silicone

Sensor drawing

TC

8.2 mm

0.3˝

TZ

6.2 mm

0.2˝

20 mm/ 0.8˝

22.65 mm/ 0.9˝

TZ: Temperature sensors for range -40 °C to +125 °C (-40 °F to 257 °F)

Diagramm of sensor warm up via air

TZ-0 Temperature sensor can be connected directly to terminal block (lenght of sensor 110mm/ 4.33˝)

TZ-3 Temperature sensor 3 m (9.8´)

TZ-6 Temperature sensor 6 m (19.7´)

TZ-12 Temperature sensor 12 m (39.4´)

70

60

50

40

PT100

4.6 mm

0.2˝

24 mm / 0.9˝

PVC

Silikon

30

20

10

0

00:00 02:53 05:46

PVC -reaction

to water temperature from 22.5

0 C to 58 0 C

(from 72.5

0

F to 136.4

0

F)

08:38 s [min]

11:31 14:24 17:17

Silicone - reaction to water temperature from 22.5 0 C to 63.5 0 C

(from 72.5 0 F to 144.5 0 F)

Sensor photo

TC TZ

Installation box LKM-45

Recommended installation box for wall mounting of THERMO thermostats

PT100

Type LKM- 45, dimensions: 98x98x45 mm, color: white

EAN code: 8595188130806

102

Installation contactors VS

Installation contactors

VS120

Number of contacts: 1x20 A

Confi guration of switching and breaking contacts:

10, 01

VS220

Number of contacts: 2x20 A

Confi guration of switching and breaking contacts:

20, 11, 02

VS420

Number of contacts: 4x20 A

Confi guration of switching and breaking contacts:

40, 31

VS425

Number of contacts: 4x25 A

Confi guration of switching and breaking contacts:

40, 31, 22, 04

VS440

Number of contacts: 4x40 A

Confi guration of switching and breaking contacts:

40, 31, 22, 04

VS463

Number of contacts: 4x63 A

Konfi gurace spínacích a rozpínacích kontaktů:

40, 31, 22

Installation contactors with manual control VSM

VSM220

Number of contacts: 2x20 A

Confi guration of switching and breaking contacts:

20, 11, 02

VSM425

Number of contacts: 4x25 A

Confi guration of switching and breaking contacts:

40, 31, 22, 04

Accessories

Auxiliary contacts

VSK

VSK-11

auxiliary contacts:

1x switching,

1x breaking.

VSK-20

auxiliary contacts:

2x switching

Installation spacer

IKV

Module spacer

Contactror‘s loadability and dimensions

x

4

3

2

1 y

103

Installation contactors VS120, VS220, VS420, VS425, VS440, VS463

!

!

!

!

For switching electric circuits, especially for resistave loads and three-phase induction motors number of contacts VS120: 1 number of contacts VS220: 2 number of contacts VS420, VS425, VS440, VS463: 4

It is produced in confi guration of switching and breaking contacts:

VS120: 10, 01

VS220: 20, 11, 02

VS420: 40, 31

VS425: 40, 31, 22, 04

VS440: 40, 31, 22, 04

VS463: 40, 31, 22

Protection IP 20 - on request we deliver covers that ensure protection IP 40 for all terminals

DIN rail or panel mounting

EAN code

see page 108

Technical parameters

VS120

VS220 VS420 VS425

VS440

Rated insulation voltage (Ui):

Rated thermo-current l th

(in AC):

Switched operation

AC-1 for 400 V, 3 phase:

AC-1 for 230 V:

AC-3 for 400 V, 3 phase:

AC-3 for 230 V:

AC-7a for 400 V, 3 phase:

AC-7a for 230 V:

AC-7b for 400 V, 3 phase:

AC-7b for 230 V:

AC-15 for 400 V, 1 phase:

AC-15 for 230 V, 1 phase:

DC1 U e

= 24 V:

DC1 U e

= 110 V:

DC1 U e

= 220 V:

Loadability of modular contactors see page143

The max. number of switching for max. load:

Electrical life in 230 / 400 V

AC-1- resistive load :

AC-3-power load:

AC-5a - high-intensity discharge lamp:

AC-5b - incandescent lamps :

AC-7a - resistive household devices:

AC-7b - inductive household devices:

Minimal load:

Short circuit protection with the fuse char. aM:

Coordination Type according EN 60 947-4-1:

Electrical strenght:

Contacts - max. cable size:

Solid conductor:

Stranded conductor:

Maximal torque:

Coil - max. cable size:

Solid conductor:

Stranded conductor:

Max. torque:

Operating

Coil control voltage:

230 V

20 A x

4 kW, 1 phase x

1.3 kW only NO, 1 phase x

4 kW, 1 phase x

1.3 kW only NO, 1 phase

4 A

6 A

20 A

6 A

0.6 A

600 switch/hr.

0.2x10

6

0.3x10

6

0.1x10

6 by 30 μF

0.1x10

6 by 2 kW

0.2x10

6

0.3x10

6

≥ 17 V, ≥ 50 mA

20 A

2

4 kV

AWG 7 (10 mm

2

)

6 mm

2

1.2 Nm

AWG 10 (2.5 mm²)

2.5 mm

2

0.6 Nm

230 V

20 A x

4 kW, 1 phase x

1.3 kW only NO, 1 phase x

4 kW, 1 phase x

1.3 kW only NO, 1 phase

4 A

6 A

20 A

6 A

0.6 A

600switch/hr.

0.2x10

6

0.3x10

6

0.1x10

6 by 30 μF

0.1x10

6 by 2 kW

0.2x10

6

0.3x10

6

≥ 17 V, ≥ 50 mA

20 A

2

4 kV

AWG 7 (10 mm 2 )

6 mm 2

1.2 Nm

AWG 10 (2.5 mm²)

2.5 mm 2

0.6 Nm

415 V

20 A

13 kW

7.5 kW, 3 phase

2,2 kW

1.1 kW, 3 phase

13 kW

7.5 kW, 3 phase

2,2 kW

1.1 kW, 3 phase

4 A

6 A

20 A

2 A

0.5 A

600 switch/hr.

0.2x10

6

0.3x10

6

0.3x10

6

by 36 μF

0.1x10

6 by 2 kW

0.2x10

6

0.3x10

6

≥ 17 V, ≥ 50 mA

20 A

2

4 kV

AWG 10 (2.5 mm²)

2.5 mm 2

1.2 Nm

AWG 10 (2.5 mm²)

2.5 mm 2

0.6 Nm

440 V

25 A

16 kW

9 kW, 3 phase

4 kW

2.2 kW, 3 phase

16 kW

9 kW, 3 phase

4 kW

2.2 kW, 3 phase

4 A

6 A

25 A

6 A

0.6 A

600 switch/hr.

0.2x10

6

0.5x10

6

0.1x10

6 by 36 μF

0.1x10

6 by 2 kW

0.2x10

6

0.3x10

6

≥ 17 V, ≥ 50 mA

25 A

2

4 kV

AWG 7 (10 mm

2

)

6 mm

2

1.2 Nm

AWG 10 (2.5 mm²)

2.5 mm

2

0.6 Nm

440 V

40 A

26 kW

16 kW, 3 phase

11 kW

5.5 kW, 3 phase

26 kW

16 kW, 3 phase

11 kW

5.5 kW, 3 phase

4 A

6 A

40 A

4 A

1.2 A

600 switch/hr.

0.1x10

6

0.15x10

6

0.1x10

6

by 220 μF

0.1x10

6

by 4 kW

0.1x10

6

0.15x10

6

≥ 17 V, ≥ 50 mA

63 A

2

4 kV

AWG 3 (25 mm 2 )

16 mm 2

3.5 Nm

AWG 10 (2.5 mm²)

2.5 mm 2

0.6 Nm

Coil permanent supply +/- 10 %:

Coil gear supply +/- 10 %:

Mounting side-by-side:

Weight:

Dimensions:

Standards:

AC/DC 24 V, 48 V,

110 V, 230 V

2.1 VA/2.1 W

2.1 VA/2.1 W max. 2 contactors**

120 g (4.2 oz.)

17.5x85x60 mm

(0.7˝x 3.35˝x 2.4˝)

AC/DC 24 V, 48 V,

110 V, 230 V

2.1 VA/2.1 W

2.1 VA/2.1 W max. 2 contactors**

130 g(4.6 oz.)

17.5x85x60 mm

(0.7˝x 3.35˝x 2.4˝)

AC 24 V, 48 V

110 V, 230 V

5 VA/1.5 W

30 VA/25 W max. 2 contactors**

170 g(6 oz.)

35x62.5x57 mm

(1.4˝x 2.7˝x 2.24˝)

AC/DC 24 V, 48 V,

110 V, 230 V

2.6 VA/2.6 W *

2.6 VA/2.6 W * max. 2 contactors**

213 g(7.5 oz.)

35x85x60 mm

(1.4˝x 3.35˝x 2.4˝)

IEC 60947-4-1, IEC 60947-5-1, IEC 61095, EN 60947-4-1, EN 60947-5-1, EN 61095, VDE 0660

AC/DC 24 V, 48 V,

110 V, 230 V

5 VA/5 W

5 VA/5 W max. 2 contactors**

400 g(14 oz.)

53.3x84x60 mm

(2.1˝x 3.31˝x 2.4˝)

* 3.8 VA/3,8 W for -04 version of contacts

** Note: In case several contactors are mounted close to each other, you need to use a installation spacer between every other contactor. We off er installation spacer of type IKV.

VS463

440 V

63 A

40 kW

24 kW, 3 phase

15 kW

8.5 kW, 3 phase

40 kW

24 kW, 3 phase

15 kW

8.5 kW, 3 phase

4 A

6 A

63 A

4 A

1.2 A

600 switch/hr.

0.1x10

6

0.15x10

6

0.1x10

6

by 330 μF

0.1x10

6

by 5 kW

0.1x10

6

0.15x10

6

≥ 24 V, ≥ 100 mA

80 A

2

4 kV

AWG 3 (25 mm 2 )

16 mm 2

3.5 Nm

AWG 10 (2.5 mm²)

2.5 mm 2

0.6 Nm

AC/DC 24 V, 48 V,

110 V, 230 V

5 VA/5 W

5 VA/5 W max. 2 contactors**

400 g (14 oz.)

53.3x84x60 mm

(2.1˝x 3.31˝x 2.4˝)

104

Connection

VS120

VS120-10

1 A1 +

2 A2

-

VS120-01

R1

R2

A1 +

A2

-

Photo VS120

Photo VS220

VS220

VS420

VS220-20

1 3

2 4

VS420-40

1 3

2 4

A1

A2

5

6

+

-

7 13

8 14

VS220-11

1 R3

2 R4

A1

A2

A1 +

A2

-

VS420-31

1 3

2 4

VS220-02

R1 R3

R2 R4

5 21

6 22

A1

A2

A1

A2

+

-

Photo

VS420

VS425

VS425-40

1 13 3 23 5 33 7 43 A1

+

VS425-31

1 13 3 23 5 33 R7 41 A1

+

VS440

VS463

2 14 4 24 6 34 8 44

VS425-22

1 13 R3 21 R5 31 7 43

2 14 R4 22 R6 32 8 44

VS440-40

1 3 5 7

13

2 4

VS440-22

1 R3

6

R5

8 14

7

2 R4

VS463-40

1 3 5

R6 8

7 (13)

A2

A1

A2

A1

A2

A1

A2

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

A1 +

2 4 6 8 (14) A2

-

Auxiliary contacts for VS425, VS440. VS463 and VSM220, VSM425

Datas of auxiliary contacts for VSK-11 and VSK-20

Ambient temperature:

Rated insulation voltage (Ui):

Electrical strength:

Rated current 230 V (AC 15):

Rated current 400 V (AC 15):

Max. switching frequence:

The max. number of switching for max. load:

Minimal load:

Short circuit protection with the fuse char. aM:

Solid/ Stranded conductor (max):

Maximal torque:

Weight:

Dimensions:

-5

0

C to +55

0

C (23

0

F to 131

0

F )

500 V

4 kV

6 A

4 A

6 A

600 sep./hod.

≥ 12 V, ≥ 10 mA

6 A

2.5 mm² (AWG 10)/ 2.5 mm² (AWG 10)

0.8 Nm

10 g (0.35 oz.)

10x85x60 mm (0.4˝x 3.35˝x 2.4˝)

2

2 14 4 24 6 34 R8 42

VS425-04

R1 11 R3 21 R5 31 R7 41

R2 12 R4 22 R6 32 R8 42

VS440-31

1 3 5 R3

2 4

VS440-04

R1 R3

6 R4

R5 R7

R2 R4

VS463-31

1 3 5

R6 R8

R3

4 6 R4

A1

+

A2

-

A2

-

A1

+

A2

-

A1

+

A2

A1

A2

-

+

-

Photo

VS425

Photo

VS440

Photo

VS463

VS463-22

1 R3 R5

2 R4 R6

Connection of auxiliary contact VSK-11 and VSK-20

EAN code

see paga 108

VSK-11 VSK-20

31 43

32 44

7

8

2 3 33

2 4 3 4

A1

+

A2

-

105

Installation contactors with manual control VSM220, VSM425

!

!

!

!

!

!

Special version of installation contactors with not only basic functions but also with manual control

For switching accumulative appliances for heating and service water warming

Description of individual positions of manual control

AUTO: common function as with installation contactors without manual control

1 - shifting from AUTO to 1: operational contacts are closed and back contacts are open until there is another impulse to a contactor coil

0 - contacts are open (operational contact) or closed (stand-by contact) regardless voltage

Optical indicator: ON-OFF

It is produced in confi guration of making and breaking contacts:

VSM220: 20. 11, 02

VSM425: 40. 31, 22, 04

It is possible to connect auxiliary contacts VSK to contactors VSM220, VSM425

EAN code

see page 122

Technical parameters:

VSM220

VSM425

Rated insulation voltage (Ui):

Rated thermo-current l th

(in AC):

Switched operation

AC-1 for 400 V:

AC-1 for 230 V:

AC-3 for 400 V:

AC-3 for 230 V:

AC-7a for 400 V:

AC-7a for 230 V:

AC-7b for 400 V:

AC-7b for 230 V:

AC-15 for 400 V:

AC-15 for 230 V:

DC1 U e

= 24 V:

DC1 U e

= 110 V:

DC1 U e

= 220 V:

Loadability of modular contactors see page 147

The max. number of switching for max. load:

Electrical life in 230 / 400 V

AC-1- resistive load :

AC-3-power load:

AC-5a - high-intensity discharge lamp:

AC-5b - incandescent lamps :

AC-7a - resistive household devices:

AC-7b - inductive household devices:

Minimal load:

Short circuit protection with the fuse char. aM:

Coordination Type according EN 60 947-4-1:

Electrical strenght:

Contacts - max. cable size:

Solid conductor:

Stranded conductor:

Maximal torque:

Coil - max. cable size:

Solid conductor:

Stranded conductor:

Max. torque:

Operating

Coil control voltage:

230 V

20 A

X

4 kW, 1 phase

X

1,3 kW only NO, 1 phase

X

4 kW, 1 phase

X

1.3 kW only NO, 1 phase

4 A

6 A

20 A

6 A

0.6 A

600 switch/hr.

0.2x10

6

0.3x10

6

0.1x10

6

by 30 μF

0.1 10

6 by 1.5 kW

0.2x10

6

0.3x10

6

≥ 17 V, ≥ 50 mA

20 A

2

4 kV

AWG 7 (10 mm 2 )

6 mm 2

1.2 Nm

AWG 10 (2.5 mm²)

2.5 mm 2

0.6 Nm

440 V

25 A

16 kW, 3 phase

9 kW, 3 phase

4 kW, 3 phase

2.2 kW, 3 phase

16 kW, 3 phase

9 kW, 3 phase

4 kW, 3 phase

2.2 kW, 3 phase

4 A

6 A

25 A

6 A

0.6 A

600 switch/hr.

0.2x10

6

0.5x10

6

0.1x10

6

by 36 μF

0.1x10

6

by1.5 kW

0.2x10

6

0.5x10

6

≥ 17 V, ≥ 50 mA

25 A

2

4 kV

AWG 7 (10 mm 2 )

6 mm 2

1.2 Nm

AWG 10 (2.5 mm²)

2.5 mm 2

0.6 Nm

Coil permanent supply +/- 10 %:

Coil gear supply +/- 10 %:

Mounting side-by-side:

Weight:

Dimensions:

Standards:

AC 12 V, 24 V, 42 V,

48 V, 110 V, 127 V, 230 V

2.8 VA/1.2 W

12 VA /10 W max. 2 contactors*

140 g (4.9 oz.)

17,5x85x60 mm

(0.7˝x 3.35˝x 2.4˝)

AC 12 V, 24 V, 42 V,

48 V, 110 V, 127 V, 230 V

5.5 VA/1.6 W

33 VA/25 W max. 2 contactors*

260 g (9.17 oz.)

35x85x60 mm

(1.4˝x 3.35˝x 2.4˝)

IEC 60947-4-1, IEC 60947-5-1, IEC 61095, EN 60947-4-1, EN 61095, VDE 0660

*Note: In case several contactors are mounted close to each other, you need to use a installation spacer between every

other contactor. We off er installation spacer of type IKV.

Connection VSM220

VSM220-20

1

2

2 14

3

4

VSM220-02

R1 R3

R2 R4

Connection VSM425

VSM425-40

1 13 3 23

VS425-31

1 13 3 23

2 14

4 24

4 24

VSM425-22

A1

A2

A1

A2

5 33

6 34

5 33 R7 41

6 34 R8 42

1 13 R3 21 R5 31

2 14 R4 22 R6 32

7 43

8 44

7 43

8 44

VSM425-04

R1 11 R3 21 R5 31 R7 41

R2 12 R4 22 R6 32 R8 42

VSM220 - only AC supply voltage

VSM220-11

A1

A2

VSM425 - only AC supply voltage

A1

A2

A1

A2

A1

A2

A1

A2

1 R3

2 R4

Auxiliary contacts VSK-11 and VSK-20

Datas of auxiliary contacts for VSK-11 and VSK-20 see page 108

106

Loadability of installation contactors

TYPE OF LIGHT

Incandescent lamps

Flourescent lamps

Flourescent lamps lead-lag circuit

Flourescent lamps parallel correction

Flourescent lamps with electronic ballast units (EVG)

High-pressure mercury-vapour lamps uncorrected

High-pressure mercuryvapour lamps parallel correction

Halogen metal vapour lamps uncorrected

Halogen metal-vapour lamps parallel correction

High-pressure sodiumvapour lamps uncorrected

High-pressure sodiumvapour lamps parallel correction

Low-pressure sodiumvapour lamps uncorrected

Low-pressure sodiumvapour lamps parallel correction

OPERATION (W)

35

70

150

250

400

1000

2000

35

70

150

250

400

1000

2000

80

125

250

400

700

1000

80

125

250

400

700

1000

50

1 x 18

1 x 36

1 x 58

2 x 18

2 x 36

2 x 58

50

24

36

58

36

58

18

1000

18

24

36

58

18

24

60

100

200

500

400

1000

18

35

55

90

135

150

250

400

1000

150

250

180

18

35

55

90

135

180

0.25

0.45

0.75

1.5

2.5

5.8

11.5

0.53

1

1.8

3

3.5

9.5

16.5

0.41

0.65

1.22

1.95

3.45

4.8

0.8

1.15

2.15

3.25

5.4

7.5

0.28

0.09

0.16

0.25

0.17

0.32

0.49

0.61

0.22

0.35

0.12

0.15

0.2

0.32

4.35

0.37

0.35

0.43

0.67

0.11

0.14

0.26

0.43

0.87

2.17

2.4

6.3

0.35

1.5

1.5

2.4

3.5

1.8

3

4.7

10.3

0.83

1.5

3.3

0.35

0.31

0.42

0.63

0.94

1.16

I (A)

VS120

-

-

-

-

5

2

1

-

3

1

5

3

18

10

-

-

1

4

3

1

1

4

2

1

10

7

4

7

7

14

25

15

14

12

2 x 17

2 x 10

7

7

7

4

1

22

22

17

14

2 x 30

2 x 24

33

20

10

3

7

4

3

22

7

-

-

-

-

1

5

3

2

-

-

1

1

3

6

1

VS220

-

5

3

-

-

-

1

-

5

2

3

3

1

-

18

10

5

-

1

1

4

4

3

1

1

4

2

14

10

7

12

7

7

4

25

15

14

7

7

7

22

17

14

2 x 30

2 x 24

2 x 17

2 x 10

3

1

22

33

20

10

3

3

6

7

7

4

-

22

-

-

-

2

1

-

-

1

1

1

VS420

-

-

-

-

5

2

1

3

1

-

5

3

18

10

-

1

-

4

3

1

1

4

2

1

10

7

4

7

7

14

25

15

14

12

2 x 17

2 x 10

7

7

7

4

1

22

22

17

14

2 x 30

2 x 24

33

20

10

3

7

4

3

22

7

-

-

1

-

-

5

3

2

-

-

1

1

3

6

1

VSM220 VSM425

-

-

-

-

5

2

1

-

3

1

5

3

18

10

-

-

1

4

3

1

1

4

2

1

10

7

4

7

7

14

25

15

14

12

2 x 17

2 x 10

7

7

7

4

1

22

22

17

14

2 x 30

2 x 24

33

20

10

3

7

4

3

22

7

-

-

-

-

1

5

3

2

-

-

1

1

3

6

1

-

-

1

1

6

3

1

3

1

-

7

4

22

12

-

1

-

5

4

2

1

5

3

2

13

9

5

10

9

18

35

20

19

17

2 x 24

2 x 14

8

8

8

5

1

24

24

20

17

2 x 40

2 x 31

33

20

10

3

9

5

4

27

9

-

-

1

1

1

6

4

2

-

-

1

1

4

7

1

Number of lights on one contactor’s contact

VS425 VS440 VS463

-

-

1

1

6

3

1

3

1

-

7

4

22

12

-

1

-

5

4

2

1

5

3

2

13

9

5

10

9

18

35

20

19

17

2 x 24

2 x 14

8

8

8

5

1

24

24

20

17

2 x 40

2 x 31

33

20

10

3

9

5

4

27

9

-

-

1

1

1

6

4

2

-

-

1

1

4

7

1

2

1

6

6

36

18

11

6

2

1

43

23

12

7

9

5

4

27

22

12

3

31

7

4

29

20

10

100

52

50

50

26

25

38

2 x 65

2 x 40

48

48

48

31

65

40

20

8

4

90

90

65

45

2 x 100

2 x 78

23

14

10

71

23

4

2

3

11

6

17

10

6

4

5

11

8

10

44

11

3

2

9

8

50

25

15

9

3

1

60

32

18

10

13

7

5

41

33

18

10

6

4

47

42

29

15

38

36

55

140

75

72

70

2 x 95

2 x 60

73

73

73

47

85

50

25

10

5

140

140

95

70

2 x 150

2 x 118

30

19

13

90

30

6

3

3

16

10

22

13

8

7

8

16

12

13

66

16

107

EAN codes

EAN codes for VS

VS120

VS120-01 24V AC/DC

VS120-01 230V AC/DC

VS120-10 24V AC/DC

VS120-10 230V AC/DC

8595188129848

8595188123105

8595188129367

8595188123112

VS440

VVS440-04 24V AC/DC

VS440-04 110V AC/DC

VS440-22 24V AC/DC

VS440-22 230V AC/DC

VS440-31 24V AC/DC

VS440-31 230V AC/DC

VS440-40 24V AC/DC

VS440-40 110V AC/DC

VS440-40 230V AC/DC

8595188129299

8595188129305

8595188129787

8595188121477

8595188129572

8595188121460

8595188129565

8595188138567

8595188121453

EAN codes for VSM

VS220

VS220-02 24V AC/DC

VS220-02 110V AC/DC

VS220-02 230V AC/DC

VS220-11 24V AC/DC

VS220-11 48V AC/DC

VS220-11 110V AC/DC

VS220-11 230V AC/DC

VS220-20 24V AC/DC

VS220-20 48V AC/DC

VS220-20 110V AC/DC

VS220-20 230V AC/DC

VS463

VS463-22 24V AC/DC

VS463-22 230V AC/DC

VS463-31 24V AC/DC

VS463-31 110V AC/DC

VS463-31 230V AC/DC

VS463-40 24V AC/DC

VS463-40 110V AC/DC

VS463-40 230V AC/DC

8595188129381

8595188138628

8595188121422

8595188129374

8595188129398

8595188130790

8595188121408

8595188125253

8595188129411

8595188129428

8595188121392

8595188129794

8595188121514

8595188129596

8595188137904

8595188121507

8595188129589

8595188140652

8595188121491

VSM220

VSM220-02 24V AC

VSM220-02 230V AC

VSM220-11 24V AC

VSM220-11 230V AC

VSM220-20 12V AC

VSM220-20 24V AC

VSM220-20 230V AC

8595188129817

8595188128100

8595188129800

8595188128094

8595188138369

8595188128117

8595188128087

VSM425

VSM425-04 24V AC

VSM425-04 230V AC

VSM425-22 24V AC

VSM425-22 230V AC

VSM425-31 24V AC

VSM425-31 42V AC

VSM425-31 230V AC

VSM425-40 12V AC

VSM425-40 24V AC

VSM425-40 230V AC

8595188129831

8595188128155

8595188129336

8595188128148

8595188129824

8595188160247

8595188128131

8595188143820

8595188128162

8595188128124

VS420

VS420-31 24V AC

VS420-31 110V AC

VS420-31 230V AC

VS420-40 12V AC

VS420-40 24V AC

VS420-40 48V AC

VS420-40 230V AC

8595188129442

8595188129466

8595188121446

8595188129459

8595188129435

8595188138581

8595188121439

VS425

VS425-04 24V AC/DC

VS425-04 48V AC/DC

VS425-04 110V AC/DC

VS425-04 230V AC/DC

VS425-13 230V AC/DC

VS425-22 24V AC/DC

VS425-22 230V AC/DC

VS425-31 24V AC/DC

VS425-31 48V AC/DC

VS425-31 110V AC/DC

VS425-31 230V AC/DC

VS425-40 24V AC/DC

VS425-40 48V AC/DC

VS425-40 230V AC/DC

VS425-40 400V AC/DC

8595188129527

8595188129558

8595188143820

8595188121682

8595188129473

8595188129541

8595188121675

8595188129497

8595188137898

8595188129534

8595188121668

8595188129480

8595188136174

8595188121651

8595188129503

VSK-11

VSK-20

8595188121613

8595188121606

108

Technical information

Main regulations for correct use of products

Product loadability

110

111-112

Electro-magnectic compatibility of products

EMC chart

Overview of tested types of light sources and the loads

Complementary information

113

114

115

Products packing

Dimensions

Examples of usage

Use of the products in domestic installations

Use of the product in the industry

Support of project designing

Production technology

116

117-121

122-129

131

132

133

134-135

109

Main instructions for correct use of ELKO EP products

To ensure correct and perfect function of a device and its safe operation, it is necessary to ensure and observe several main regulations:

1.) Device supply

- it is necessary to ensure continuous supply of the device without drops and voltage peaks. It is mainly important for device (e.g. dimmers) where there is synchronization managed by sine wave of the main and fault in the main ca cause unreliable function of the device

- it is necessary to observe correct connection of terminals, and in case of DC supply voltage also polarity.

- it is necessary to observe allowed tolerance of the size of supply voltage which is given by technical parameters of individual devices

2.) Protection of the device

- it is necessary to ensure protection of the device by adequate elements of overvoltage protection – by fuses, by surge arrestors

3.) Elimination of disturbances on input circuits

- it is recommended to eliminate disturbances on control inputs of devices by suitable elements (R-C elements) and thus minimize creation of inductive voltage on incoming wires

- pay attention when connecting control inputs and while keep in mind max. current and min. voltage at rest, which can cause spontaneous switching of device (e.g. connected glow lamps)

4.) Opereting conditions

- to assure the granted life and correct functions of device, there is not recommended to leave the device in extreme conditions that could negative way infl uence the correct device functions - permanent temperature infl uence over 70°C, aggressive exhalations, chemicals, high relative humadity over 95%, high electromagnetic fi eld or microwave radiation

- for error-free function it is necessary to avoid device placement close to electromagnetic interference source

- all mentioned products fulfi ll the EMC requirements in accordance to EU Directive 89/336/EEC. Notwithstanding it is necessary to pay attention by device connecting to circuit with electrical appliances that produce electromagnetic interference (contactors, motors), and pay attention to close power cables. It is recommended that device connecting cables

(supply and control inputs) are possibly short and go separately from power cables. In case the device is connected to circuit with contactors or motors it is necessary to protect the device with appropriate extern protection components - RC members, varistors or surge voltage protector.

- when you use AL wires, it is necessary to follow requirements of ČSN standard 370606: 1959 and ČSN 370606 amendment 2: 1992

5.) Device handling and using

- input terminals do not fi ll-in with high power (for serial terminals max 0.5 N/m), do not give excessive pressure to carrier terminal parts to avoid demage of inner device construction

- protect the device before falls and excessive vibrations that could demage relays contacts

- do not overload input relay´s contacts, especially when using loads with other category then AC1

- when at switching of big loads the relay contacts get sealed it is necessary to use inserted contactor or power relay tuned to required load for given application

Description of used protection elements in device

All time and monitoring relays from our assortment are equiped with protective elements (varistors) against possible overvoltage in supply main. Limit voltage of used varistors is 275 V. At short-time overvoltage in supply main varistor decrease its leak resistor and accumulate arosen overvoltage. When this overvoltage behave as short-time peak, varistor is able to react and protect the device against negative infl uences. As other protection elements there are used transils and zener diodes that eliminate overvoltage impulses in supply and input circuits of device (e.g. when switching inductive loads). In case of switching inductive loads it is recommended to separate a supply of power element (motors, contactors etc.) from supply of measuring and control device inputs.

On the charts bellow you can see oscilographic running of disconnecting of loads (contactors) and reaction of protective elements to arosen voltage pikes.

Process of disconnection of contactor with coil on Process of disconnection of contactor with coil on Process of disconnection of contactor with coil and limited

230V/AC without R-C member 230V/AC and R-C member 390 Ohm-330 nF varistor on 230V/AC

Osciloscope configuration

U=200 V/d t=5ms/d

Osciloscope configuration

U=200 V/d t=10ms/d

Osciloscope configuration

U=200 V/d t=5ms/d

110

Product loadability

PRODUCT

SOU-2 RHV-1; SOU-3;

TEV-4

CRM-4; CRM-42; MR-41;

MR-42; SHT-1; SHT-1/2; SHT-3;

SHT-3/2; SHT-4; SMR-B; SOU-1;

RHT-1; TER-3A; TER-3B; TER-3C;

TER-3D; TER-3E; TER-3F; TER-3G;

TER-3H ; VS116K; VS116U;

VS316/24V; VS316/230V

CRM-82TO; CRM-83J;

CRM-93H; PRM-2H;

PRM-92H; TER-7; VS308K;

VS308U; CRM-61; HRH-5;

HRN-54; HRN-54N; HRN-55;

HRN-55N; HRN-56;

HRN-57; HRN-57N;

PRI-32; PRI-51; PRI-52;

PRI-53; HRF-10; TER-9

HRH-6

CONTACT

Material of contact AgSnO

2 contact 8A

Material of contact AgSnO

2 contact 12A

TYPE OF LOAD

Material of contact AgSnO

2 contact 16A

Material of contact AgNi contact 8A

Material of contact AgNi contact 10A

ATC; ATF; ATR; DTC; DTF; DTR;

COS-1; CRM-2H; CRM-2HE;

CRM-2T; CRM-81J; CRM-91H;

CRM-91HE; HRH-1; HRN-33;

HRN-34; HRN-35; HRN-37;

HRN-41; HRN-42; HRN-43;

HRN-43N; HRN-63; HRN-64;

HRN-67; PDR-2; PRI-41; PRI-42;

PRM-91H; SJR-2; TER-4; TEV-1;

TEV-2; TEV-3

Material of contact AgNi contact 16A

AC1

cos φ ≥ 0.95

M

AC2

M

AC3

250V / 8A

250V / 5A

250V /4A

250V / 12A

250V / 3.7A

250V /2.2A

250V / 16A

250V / 5A

250V / 3A

250V / 8A

250V / 3A

250V /2A

250V / 10A

250V / 3A

250V /2A

250V / 16A

250V / 5A

250V / 3A

AC5a uncompensated

X

X

230V / 2.2A (510VA)

230V / 2.2A (510VA) till max output C=14UF

230V / 3A (690VA)

230V / 3A (690VA) till max output C=14UF

230V / 1.5A (345VA)

X

230V / 2A (460VA)

X

230V / 3A (690VA)

X

AC5a compensated

HAL.230V

AC5b

250W 1 120W 1000W 300W 500W 800W

250V /4A X X X X X

AC6a

250V /1A

250V / 2.2A

250V / 3A

250V /1A 250V / 2A 250V / 3A

AC7b

250V /1A

250V / 7.5A

X

250V /1A 250V / 6A 250V / 10A

AC12

X

250V / 4.5A

X

X 250V / 3.8A

250V / 6A

AC13

250V /4A 250V / 4.5A

250V / 6A

250V /3A

250V / 3.8A

250V / 6A

AC14

AC15

K

250V /3A 250V / 4.5A

250V / 6A

250V /3A

250V / 3.8A

250V / 6A

30V / 8A 24V / 12A 24V / 10A 24V / 8A 24V / 10A 24V / 16A

DC1

M

30V / 3A

24V / 4.5A

24V / 3A

24V / 3A 24V / 3.8A

24V / 6A

DC3

M

30V / 2A

24V / 3A 24V / 2A

24V / 2A 24V / 2.5A

24V / 4A

DC5

30V / 8A

24V / 12A 24V / 6A

24V / 8A 24V / 10A 24V / 16A

DC12

30V / 2A 24V / 1.5A

24V / 2A

24V / 2A 24V / 1.3A

24V / 2A

DC13

X 24V / 1.5A

X

X

24V / 1.3A

24V / 2A

DC14

111

Product loadability

Problematic choice of suitable relay contact for a particular load switched with a product is described below.

Mostly we experience problems with incorrect choice of load (meaning incorrect relay for a particular load) which results in permanent switching of contact (sealing) or damage on relay contact – which then results in malfunction.

What load can you use?

Detailed types of load according to standard EN 60947 are described in charts below – categories of use.

Typical use

EN

Category of use

AC current, cosφ = P/S (-)

AC-1

AC-2

AC-3

Non-inductive or slightly inductive load, resistance furnace

Includes all appliances supplied by AC current with power factor (cos .) 0.95.

Examples of usage: resistance furnace, industrial loads

Motors with slip-ring armature, switching off

Motors with short-circuit armature, motor switching when in operation

This category applies to switching off motors with short-circuit armature while in operation. While switching, contactor switches current which is 5 up to 7 times rated current of motor.

60947-4

60947

60947-4

AC-4

AC-5a

AC-5b

AC-6a

AC-6b

AC-7a

AC-7b

AC-8a

AC-8b

AC-12

AC-13

AC-14

AC-15

AC-20

AC-21

AC-22

AC-23

AC-53a

Electro-motors with short-circuit armature: start up, braking by backset, changeover

Switching of electrical gas-fi lled lights, fl uorescent lights

El. bulb switching

Enables low contact loading due to resistance of cold fi ber is many times smaller that the one of hot fi ber.

Switching of transformers

Switching of capacitors

Switching low inductive loads of home appliances and similar applications

Load of motors for home appliances

Switching of hermetically sealed motors of cooling compressors with manual reset switches against overload

Hermetically sealed cooling compressors have to be placed in one box without external shaft or shaft padding and motor must operate with cooling liquid

Switching of hermetically sealed motors of cooling compressors with manual reset switches against overload

Hermetically sealed cooling compressors have to be placed in one box without external shaft or shaft padding and motor must operate with cooling liquid

Switching of semiconductor loads with separation transformers

Switching of semiconductor loads with separation transformers

Switching of low electro-magnetic loads (max.72 VA)

Management of alternating electro-magnetic loads

This category applies to switching inductive loads with input for closed electro-magnetic circuit higher than 72 VA

Use: switching coils of contactors

Connecting and disconnecting in unloaded states

Switching resistive loads, including low loading

Switching of mixed resistive and inductive loads, including low overloading

Switching of motor loads or other high inductive loads

Switching of motors with short-circuit armature with semiconductor contactors

Note: Category AC 15 replaces formerly used category AC 11

60947

60947-4

60947-4

60947-4

60947-4

60947

60947

60947

60947

60947-5

60947-5-1

60947-5-1

60947-5

60947-3

60947-3

60947-3

60947-3

60947

DC current, t = L/R (s)

DC-1

DC-3

DC-5

DC-6

DC-12

DC-13

DC-14

DC-20a(b)

DC-21a(b)

DC-22a(b)

DC-23

Non-inductive or low inductive load, resistive furnaces

Shunt motors: start-up, braking by backset, reversion, resistive braking

Series motor:

start-up, braking by backset, reversion, resistive braking

Non-inductive or low inductive loads, resistive furnaces – el. bulbs

Management of resistive loads and fi xed loads with insulation by opto-electric element

Switching of electromagnets

Switching of electromagnetic loads in circuits with limiting resistor

Switching and breaking without load(a: frequent switching ,b: occasional switching)

Switching ohmic loads including limiting overloading (a: frequent switching ,b: occasional switching)

Switching of compound ohmic and inductive loads including limited overloads ( e.g. shunt motors)

(a: frequent switching, b: random switching)

Switching of highly inductive loads (e.g. series motors)

60947-4

60947-4-1

60947-4-1

60947-4-1

60947-5-1

60947-5-1

60947-5-1

60947-3

60947-3

60947-3

60947-3

How can you distinguish for which load is our product (relay) designated?

Our company record this information on a products and also in our catalogue, instruction manual and other promotional and technical material (website etc.).

It is important to realize that it is not always possible to point out load because of lack of information about the device (user cannot measure cos) or it is not possible because of inconstancy of parameters of switched device.

Manufacturer of relays records always guaranteed parameters in ideal conditions which are done by a norm (temperature, pressure, humidity, etc.) and reality can be in a lot of cases diff erent.

Category of use (classifi cation) of a particular relay is done by material of output contacts.

Basic types of materials which are used for production of contacts for high-performance relay are: a)AgCd – suitable for switching ohmic loads. Before of harmfulness of Cd, this type of contact is remitted. b)AgNi –designated for switching resistive loads , good quality switching and conducting (contact doesn’t oxidate) small currents/voltages ,it is not designated for surge currents and loads with inductive component c)AgSn or AgSnO –suitable for switching loads with inductive component , not suitable for switching small currents/voltages, it is more resistive to surge currents, suitable for DC voltage switching, less suitable for switching loads of ohmic type d)Wf (wolfram)-special contact designated for switching surge currents with inductive component e)with gold (AgNi/Au)- Used for “improving” contacts for low currents/ voltages , prevents oxidation.

112

Electromagnetic compatibility of ELKO EP, s.r.o. products

Electromagnetic compatability (EMC) is a new scientifi c fi eld which was founded in the 60s last century. It had been known only to a small number of specialists working in a military and cosmic research.

Electromagnetic compatability EMC is defi ned as an ability of a device, system or a machine to show the correct operation even in an environment in which there are other sources of electromagnetic signals (natural or artifi cial), and also an ability not to infl uence negatively the environment by its own “electromagnetic action” and not to radiate signals that would disturb other devices. It is an indicator of good quality and reliability. Breach of such EMC requirements may cause several damages with catastrophical consequences.

When testing EMC of a device (technical and biological), basic is represented by so called “ fundamental chain of

EMC” shown in the picture. This chain shows a system problematic of EMC and we inspect all three components.

SOURCE OF

ELECTROMAGNETIC

DISTURBANCES

ENVIRONMENT OF DISTRIBUTION,

ELECTROMAGNETIC STRUCTURE

DISTURBED OBJECT,

DISTURBING RECEIVER motors, switches, relays, power distributions, semi-conducting arc furnances, welding machines, oscillators, PC, digital systems, electrostatic discharge...

air space, energy cables, supply convection, convection, grounding, screening, signaling conductors, data condutors...

digital devices, PC, measuring devices, automatization device, telecommunication system, data transmission system, wireless set, televisor...

Test SURGE

For guarantee the immunity of our devices against to electromagnetic disturbance we are doing EMC tests and according results we are still innovating our product to be accoding the EMC norms with reserve.

The most important test is immunity against gust of high-energy voltage and current impulse (SURGE), what is made according the norm IEC 61000-4-5.

By this our products are controlled in case of short time pulse, what is apllicated as to input as to output circuits of divices, to switching inputs, sensing inputs, etc. Our produts pass all criterias and are fully competitive to foreign products.

Test SURGE is used in practice mainly for 1-phase devices with take-off current to 16 A. It makes use of voltage impulse 1,2/50 ms no load and current impulse 8/20 ms for short time. Size of used voltage impulse is 0.5 kV, 1 kV, 2 kV and 4 kV, size of used current impulse is 2kA on 4kV with choise of changing polarity. For testing by impulses is as coup mode specify capacitive coupling.

Test BURST

Other very important test is test immunity against quick short-lived eff ect (couple of impulses- BURST), which dissimulated infl uence if industry disturbance. Test is made according to the norm IEC 61000-4-4.

Disturbance signal is injected to supply circuits and communication cabling. Coupling is made by 1-phase capacitive circuit or coupling capacitive ribband to supply, signalling or data convection of tested device. Size of testing impulses is 0.5 kV, 1 kV, 2 kV and 4 kV in possitive and negative polarity. Repeat frequence is 2.5 kHz, or 5 kHz. Period of testing 0 - 6 minut by steps for 0.1s.

Test POWERFAIL

For right function of products in industry is important POWERFAIL test - simulation of decreasing and failure of supply voltage. It is made according to the IEC 61000-4-11.

Short-time supply decreasing are random decreasing of supply voltage, which are more than 10 - 15 % of its nominal size and have short time existing 0.5 - 50 periodes of basic frequency 50 Hz.

Short breaks of voltage are short time decreasing over 100 %. Mentioned changes of supply circuit voltage are made in practise by disturbance in mains (high voltage, low voltage ) and breaks on load of the main.

Test of EMC EMISSIONS

Electronic devices must be designed not to be a source of oversize electric or electromagnetic disturbances in its surroundings. Test is executed according to standard EN 55022.

Emissions are measured by wires or by air.

Test OF ELECTROMAGNETIC HIGH-FREQUENCY FIELD AND HF SIGNAL COMING FROM THE MAIN

The purpose of this test is to verify immunity of the device against electromagnetic fi elds that are created by radio transmitters or by any other device which transmits electromagnetic energy by uninterrupted waves

(walkie-talkies, radio and TV transmitters.)

Test is carried out against disturbances in the main and emissions. We apply testing level 3 which for HF fi eld means intensity of fi eld 10 V/m and for HF signal it is voltage level 10 V.

Test OF ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE

It is a test of resistance against discharges of electrostatic energy caused by servicing or by surrounding objects. Such discharge can damage a device or its components.

Test is carried out by direct or indirect application of discharges to a tested device. Test is carried out according to a standard EN 61000-4-2. Direct infl uence of discharges is targeted into such places and surfaces that are accessible to servicing during common use. Indirect infl uence of discharge is done by horizontal and vertical coupling board.

The device is treated by at least ten individual discharges for positive and negative polarity. Testing levels are 2kV, 4kV, 6kV, 8kV, 15kV.

Company ELKO EP has its own test laboratory in which it carries out pre-certifi cation for conditions that must be met by each of our products. Thus customers gets not only a product of a high quality, which is ensured by many years of experience in the fi eld of switching relays, but also a product which can operate in demanding conditions of industrial environment. Product, tested this way, guarantees reliability and functionality to customer’s full satisfaction.

113

EMC - parameters

STANDARD STANDARD

114

PRODUCT

Time relays

CRM-91H/230V

CRM-91H/UNI

CRM-93H/230V

CRM-93H/UNI

CRM-9S

CRM-61

SHT-1

SHT-1/2

SHT-3

SHT-3/2

PDR-2A/230V

PDR-2A/UNI

PDR-2B/230V

PDR-2B/UNI

PRM-91H/8

PRM-91H/11

CRM-81J/230V

CRM-81J/UNI

CRM-83J/230V

CRM-83J/UNI

CRM-82TO

SJR-2/230V

SJR-2/UNI

CRM-2T/230V

CRM-2T/UNI

CRM-2H/230V

CRM-2H/UNI

CRM-91HE/UNI

CRM-2HE/UNI

PRM-92H

PRM-2H

SMR-T

SMR-H

SMR-B

CRM-4

CRM-42

Power and auxiliary relays

VS116K

VS116U

VS308K/230V

VS308K/UNI

VS308U

VS316/24V

VS316/230V

Dimmers

DIM-2

DIM-5

DIM-14

DIM-6

DIM6-3M-P

DIM-15

SMR-S

SMR-U

DIM-10

61000-6-3

61000-6-3

61000-6-3

61000-6-3

55022/B

55022/B

55022/A

55022/A

55022/B

55022/A

61000-6-3

61000-6-3

55022/A

55022/A

55022/A

55022/A

61000-6-3

55022/A

61000-6-3

55022/B

55022/A

55022/B

55022/A

55022/A

55022/A

55022/A

55022/A

55022/B

55022/A

55022/A

55022/A

55022/A

55022/A

55022/A

55022/B

55022/A

3

2

2

2

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

2

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

2

2

2

2

2

3

3

3

2

3

3

3

3

2

3

-

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

2

3

2

2

-

3

55022/A

55022/A

61000-6-3

55022/B

55022/A

-

55022/B

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

61000-6-3

61000-6-3

55022/B

55014-1

55014-1

55014-1

55022/A

55022/B

55022/B

PRODUCT

Power supplies

PS-10-12; PS-10-24

PS-30-12; PS-30-24

PS-100-12; PS-100-24

PS-30R

ZSR-30

ZNP-10-12V

ZNP-10-24V

Other modular devices

SOU-1/230V

SOU-1/UNI

SOU-2

SOU-3

MR-41/230V

MR-41/UNI

MR-42/230V

MR-42/UNI

Monitoring relays

HRN-41

HRN-42

HRN-33

HRN-34

HRN-35

HRN-37

HRN-63

HRN-64

HRN-67

HRN-55

HRN-55N

HRN-57

HRN-57N

HRN-54

HRN-54N

HRN-56/120

HRN-56/208

HRN-56/240

HRN-56/400

HRN-56/480

HRN-56/575

HRN-43

HRN-43N

PRI-32

PRI-51/1

PRI-51/2

PRI-51/5

PRI-51/8

PRI-51/16

PRI-51/0.5

PRI-52

PRI-41

PRI-42

HRH-1/230V

HRH-1/24V

HRH-1/110V

HRH-5

3

3

3

3

-

-

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

55022/B

55022/B

55022/B

55022/A/B

61000-6-3

55022/B

55022/B

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

2

3

3

3

3

61000-6-3

55022/A

61000-6-3

55022/B

55022/A

55022/A

55022/A

55022/A

61000-6-3

-

55022/A

61000-6-3

61000-6-3

55022/A

55022/A

55022/A

61000-6-3

55022/B

55022/A

55022/A

55022/A

55022/A

61000-6-3

61000-6-3

61000-6-3

61000-6-3

61000-6-3

55022/B

55022/B

55022/B

55022/B

55022/B

55022/B

55022/B

55022/B

61000-6-3

61000-6-3

55022/A

-

55022/A

55022/A

55022/A

-

-

55022/B

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

-

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

-

3

-

3

-

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

-

3

3

3

3

3

3

PRODUCT

HRH-4/230V

HRH-4/24V

HRH-6/AC

HRH-6/DC

COS-1

Thermostats

TEV-1

TEV-2

TEV-3

TEV-4

RHT-1

RHV-1

TER-3A

TER-3B

TER-3C

TER-3D

TER-3E

TER-3F

TER-3G

TER-3H

TER-4/230V

TER-4/24V

TER-9/230V

TER-9/24V

TER-7

ATR; ATC; ATF

DTR; DTC; DTF

STANDARD

3

3

3

3

3

-

3

3

3

3

55022/B

55022/B

61000-6-3

-

55022/A

55022/B

-

55022/B

-

55022/B

55022/B

55022/B

55022/B

55022/B

61000-6-3

55022/B

61000-6-3

55022/B

55022/B

55022/B

55022/B

55022/B

55022/B

55022/B

55022/B

55022/B

3

2

2

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

2

2

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

Overview of tested types of light sources and the loads

As is our good tradition, we have always been seeking for a maximum universality of our products. We have successfully developed a dimmer DIM-15 and SMR-M, and because the LED lighting dimming - as well as dimming of energy saving lamps - is a relatively new area and there are not so many manufacturers who produce dimmable energy saving resources, we will gradually test and expand the chart below. We welcome your feedback and cooperation in addressing us your comments and new types.

Type

Typ

Light sources ELKO Lighting

ELKO Lighting DLB-E27-806-2K7

ELKO Lighting LED DLSL-GU10-250-3K

Type Light sources from manufacturers

Brilum LED line 18led

Brilum LED line

Brilum LED line JCR-27D 48Led

Elim SMD-W12

Elim SDW21

Elim SMD-W20

Panlux E27L1-81120/T

LED LAMPJDRE27

Brilum Led line white 21led

Osram dulux el.dimmable lumilux warm white 1230lm

Megaman dimmerable 2700K DEC01

Lumee GU 10-60-CW-120

Lumee GU 10-P-60-CW-120

Lumee JDRE 14-60-CW-120

Lumee Ball-80-CW

Philips Master 20W

Led Osram Decospot 0,75W

Led Philips Master 7W

Philips LEDspot MV 4W GU10 40D

Philips LEDspot MR 16 LV 4W GU5,3 24D

Philips LEDspot MV 3W GU10 25D

Energetic BULB Warm White 250 Lumen

Energetic BULB Clear Warm White 250 Lumen

Energetic Warm White Refl ector GU10 600 CD

Energetic Cool White Refl ector GU10 550 CD

Energetic Warm White Dimmer 1200 Lumen

Energetic Wram White 3 Step Dimmer 1300 Lumen

Energetic Wram White 3 Step Dimmer 520 Lumen

TR-0WGE-05

Paulmann refl ector electrobnic 7W GU 10

Osram parathom classic A 40

Osram parathom classic B 25

Osram parathom PAR16

EMOS 48led 2W

EMOS dimmable saving fl uorescent lamps 20W

Socket

E27

GU-10

Dimmable

Yes

DIM 15 SMR-M LIC-1

RFDSC-11

RFDSC-71

RFDEL-71B

30 pc 16 pc 30 pc 30 pc 16 pc

Yes 50 pc 26 pc 50 pc 50 pc 26 pc

The maximum number of units can be connected to dimmers

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

Yes

No

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

Yes

Dimmable

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

GU-5.3

GU-10

E27

E27

GU-10

GU-10

E27

E27

GU-10

E14

E14

E27

GU-10

GU-10

GU-10

E27

E27

GU-10

E27

E14

GU-10

E14

Socket

GU-10D

GU-10P

E27

GU-10

GU-10

GU-10

E27

E27

GU10D

E27

E14

GU-10

E27

115

Products packing

Products Packing

COS-1, HRH-1, HRN-41, HRN-42,

HRN-43, PDR-2, PRI-41, PRI-42,

PS-12, PS-24, PS-R, ZSR-30,

ZNP-10, ZTR-10, HRN-56/480,

575

Packing of 3-MODULE relay - 1 pc

SHT-1, SHT-3, SHT-1/2, SHT-4,

SOU-2, TER-9,

Packing of 2-MODULE relay - 1 pc

PRM-91H/11, PRM-92H, PRM-2H Packing of plug - in relay - 2 pc

SMR-K, SMR-T, SMR-H, SMR-S,

SMR-U, SMR-M

Packing of SMR-14 pc

116

SOU-1, SOU-2, CRM-91HE ,

CRM-2HE

Packing of 1-MODULE relay with accessories

VS116K, VS116U, VS308K,

VS316/24, VS316/230, USS, VS

Packing of 1-MODULE relay - 12 pc

CRM-81J, CRM-83J, CRM-82TO,

CRM-61, CRM-9S, CRM-2H,

CRM-2T, CRM-4, CRM-42,

SOU-1, DIM-2, DIM-5, DIM-14,

HRH-5, HRN-33, HRN-34,

HRN-35, HRN-51, HRN-52,

HRN-54, MR-41, MR-42, PRI-31,

SJR-2, TER-3, TER-7, HRN-56,

HRN-63, HRN-64, HRN-67

Packing of 1-MODULE relay - 10 pc

Design

Dimensions

1-MODULE DESIGN

90

67.5

45

2-MODULE DESIGN

90

67.5

45

35

17.6

PRI-32

35.6

3-MODULE DESIGN

90

67.5

45

35

90

67.5

45

6

17.6

13.8

52

35

SOU-3

21

RHV-1, TEV-4

35

62 34

11

117

Dimensions

R13

MINI

SMR-T, SMR-H, SMT-K

R13

MINI

SMR-S, SMR-U

13.3

R21

MINI

SMR-B

ATR, ATF, ATC

49

89

13.3

28.6

56.4

49

12.6

DTR, DTF, DTC

89

49

21

28.6

54.3

PANEL PDR-2/A, PDR-2/B

4

48

41

4

HRN-41, HRN-42, HRN-43,HRN-43N,

PRI-41, PRI-42, COS-1, HRH-1, TER-4

48

PANEL ZSR-30, PS-30-R, ZNP-10

48

4.6

PS-100-12, PS-100-24

48

9 10

10

PS-30-12, PS-30-24

48

19

8

11

8.5

8.5

6-MODULE DESIGN

PS-10-12, PS-10-24

17.6

90

45

33.9

14.1

105

118

7

41

8.8

8.8

35

Dimensions

PRM-91H/11. PRM-91H/8 PRM-92H, PRM-2H

37

4

ES-11

Socket for PRM-91H/ 11, PRM-92H, PRM-2H, 750

ES-8

Socket for PRM-91/8

HRH-6

20

14

2,2x0,5

4,4 4,4 4,4

21,2

110

6 x 4

28 28

30

38

4.2

50

750L

782L

35 13 54,4

30

38

4.2

27

27 photosensor SKS

21.8

50

66

M16x1.5

M16x1.5

M16x1.5

23

20.8

external potentiometer

for CRM-2HE, CRM-91HE

27

M 22x1

B1 B3 B2

15

119

Dimensions

43

56

28

77

46

68

SR051; SR101; SR151

box IP66 for TEV1,2

110

46

SR200; SR250

box IP66 for TEV3

110

6

SR300; SR400; SR600

120

M20x1.5 M20x1.5 M16x1.5

27 27

M20x1.5 M20x1.5 M16x1.5

27 27

Dimensions

VS120

VS220

VSM220 17.5

VS425

VSM425

35

VS440

VS463

53.3

VS420

4.4

45

VSK-20

10

44

60

IKV

4.7

35.5

45.1

8.9

ATV-1

53.5

02

Mo Di

61

Mi

:

Do

21

Fr

8

Sa

4

So

AUTO

MANU

MENU OK +

121

Examples of usage

Multifunction time relay CRM-91H,CRM-93H

- for electric appliances, where is necessary to change the exact timing - controlling of the illumination, heating, motors, machines, ventilators, contactors...

N

N

L

L

A1 S  A2

A1 S  A2

Multifunc tionalit y alw ays and ev erywher e

15 16 18

15 16 18

Multifunction time relay with contactless output CRM-9S

- using for warning illuminatin on the road, fl ashers, cyclers, often switched systems ...

12 V AC

A1 S  A2

CR -9S

Multifunction time relay with external potentiometer CRM-91HE

- time adjusting via external operating unit, operating on panel, switchboard doors

N

L

A1 S  A2

B1 B3 B2 external operating unit

B1 18 18

Singlefunction time relay CRM-81J

- time switch, using for run down the pump after switch off the heating, switching of ventilators ...

N

L

A1 S  A2

15 16 18

Multifunction time relay CRM-61

- for electronic appliances, light control, heating, motors, fans.....

L

N

A2 A1

S

CRM-61

16

15 18

15 16 18

122

Examples of usage

Time relay plug-in type PRM-91H, PRM-92H

- serves to control light signallization, heating, motor and fan control... etc.

L

N

Doublestage delay unit SJR-2

- for sequential load switching, electric furnaces, heaters....

N

L

A1 A2

Delay OFF without supply voltage CRM-82TO

- delayed back-up switch off at current failure (emergency illumination, emergency respirator)

N

L

A1 A2

16 26

CRM-82TO

FUNC e a

18 28

15 25

Asymmetric cycler CRM-2H

- regular rooms ventilation, cyclic humidity exhaustion, illumination controlling, circulation pump, fl ash, warning appliances, regular pump down, regular irrigation via electromagnetic valve

N

L

A1 S  A2

1

2

25 26 28

15 16 18

3

Staircase switch CRM-4

- staircase automatic systems, ventilators switching, for multiplace operating illumina-

N tion on the staircases and halls...

L

A1 S  A2

15 16 18

Progammable staircase automat with signalling before switch off CRM-42

- starcaise illumination operation

- on-coming switch off signalling (fl ash = comfort + safety together)

L

A2 S

15 16 18

N

A1 18

123

Examples of usage

N

L

Digital time switch SHT-1/2

- for controlling of all appliances that depend on real time, appliances could be controlled in regular cycles, or according to adjusted program (blocking of main door out of working hours or night)

- in combination with other devices could be controlling combinated (rooms ventilation, irrigation controlling, bell at school or in church...)

ting in y our rida y o swit ch hea e... e

.g. on F

When y

.m.

A1 16 15 18

7

Auto

13th a

12

0 6

SHT-1/2

PRG

+ MAN

MAN 2

ESC

RESET

OK

A2 26 25

N

L

Programmable digital relay PDR-2

- illumination, ventilators, contactors controlling, controlling of interlocking plans, system of time abate and blocking (billiards, pin-balls....), away control via external buttons

cura te informa tion about time

.... y....

ou need maximum and ac

When y ou need a displa then y

26 25 28 18 15 16

N

230V

L

Twilight switch SOU-1

- outdoor illumination switching (garden illumination), fl ash, shop-window, hall and offi ce illumination (switch off in desired light level, controlling of intensity)

N

L

VS425

IN IN

IN IN

VS425

15 16 18

124

15 16 18

Examples of usage

Delay on star/delta CRM-2T

- motor starting more than 3 kW, electronic switchover from mode start to mode operation with device CRM-2T, what assures exact timing

N

L

A1 A2

VS425

Mini contactor VS425

- switching of the higher loads, especially in other categories than AC1

ork, c ontac tor

VS425

y rela y can no longer w ou

When auxiliar

VS425 will help y

25 26 28

15 16 18

Modular contactor VS120. VS220. VS420. VS425

- to switch circuits for supply and control of heating, lights, air-conditioning and other el. devices.

Switches loads AC-1, AC-3, AC-7a, AC-7b, AC-15

L

N

Modular contactors VS440. VS463

- to switch supply and control circuits for heating, air-conditioning and other el. devices, switching 3-phase motors

Switches loads A-1, AC-3, AC-7a, AC-7b, and AC-15

L

N

VS220-20

A1-A2 AC 230V

50/60Hz

A1-A2 DC 220V

( ) A1 1 3

( ) A2 2 4

AC1

4kW / 1 230V

AC3 1.3kW / 1 230V

VS440-40

I th

= 40A

A1-A2 AC 220-230V

50/60Hz

( )

A1-A2 DC 220-230V

A1

( ) A2

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

AC1 40A / 3

26kW / 3

AC3 11kW / 3

400V

400V

400V

Auxiliary plug-in relays 750. 782

- to switch bigger output (load) replacement of current plug-in relays when servicing...

Digital time switch SHT-1, SHT-1/2

- for controlling of all appliances that depend on real time, in daily or weekly mode

N

L

A1 16 15 18

Auto

7

0 6 12

SHT-1/2

reset

MAN 2

PRG

+ MAN ESC

OK

A2 26 25 28

125

Examples of usage

Staircase automat with dimming DIM-2

- step by step (fl uent) dim up, adjusted time is ON and fl uent dim down (e.g. possible to adjust permanent shine to min. brightness everlasting light)

- block of fl ats (entry, halls, staircases), garden lighting

N

L

A1 V

T2

. bulb can giv than y ou think e you mor e

N

L

Controlled dimmer DIM-5

- short press ON/OFF, long press - brightness regulation, is in memory.

Other presses activate memory

- switch on and dimming of hall, staircase ...

A1 V 

-

ve el

.ener

ces gy

Feel c omfor together with y our ligh t sour

A2 T

A2 T1

Power relays VS

- switching of higher load than is capacity of switched unit = repeater

- assistant light controlling, signalling, boilers, ...

N

L

Memory relay MR-41, MR-42

- because of 2-wire parallel buttons connection save money, place and time during the installation

- light switching, hall, staircase, big rooms, controlling systems, automation

A1 ON/OFF A2

B1 B2

MR-42

Un 1

2

L

N

A1 A3 A2

LED

21 22 24

11 12 14

11 12 14

N

L

Switching power supply PS-R

- power supply of any devices and appliances via safe voltage with full galvanically separated from mains

- power supply of driving systems, interlocking plants and use in measurement and control

21 22 24

A1 A3 A2

LED

11 12 14

31 32 34

Controlling and signalling units USS

- compact dimensions, elegant design, wide range of use, confi guration for request

- switching and signalling in switchboard, controlling centre, automation...

ches

, alt erna-

A3 A1

A2

ash:

Wide r ts tha t shine and fl ches and tha t all in double design in

Singal ligh

-

A12

A11 A13

126

Examples of usage

øíkladpoit

Monitoring voltage relay HRN-33 (35)

- monitoring of mains voltage for appliances inclinable to supply tolerance

AC 230 V

A1 A2

Monitoring voltage relay HRN-33 (35)

- protection of appliances against under-/overvoltage

A1 A2

Monitoring voltage relay HRN-35

- start of back-up supply in case of failure

N

AC230V

L

A1 A2

15 16 18

25 26 28

oring unit pa ys off

. t int ould be far higher

Investmen

Damage c

15 16 18

Monitoring voltage relay HRN-34

- load disconnected when voltage declines or battery is discharged

N

L

+

A1 A2

4

DC

AC

25 26 28

15 16 18

15 16 18

Monitoring current relay PRI-51, PRI-32

- current-limiting relay (on one branch two appliances, which never work together), controlling systems, motors, heating, current indication, controlling of 1-phase motor run down, during the installation of main housing switchboard could be controlled via eye, if the cooker is not switched

- in connection with current transformers, it is possible to extend current ranges up to 600A, which makes more things possible

N

AC230V

L

A1 A2

B1 B2

16

15 18

127

Examples of usage

L3

L2

L1

N

Relay monitoring power factor COS-1

- monitors power-factor in 3-phase mains / unloading of motors, pumps, lift systems

t tha t pa ys off

. Cost of a mot or can be far higher

L3

L2

L1

N

Monitoring voltage relay HRN-43

- regulation of voltage from generator, water el. plants, 3-phase control in the main

- monitors and protects main´s quality

te co ntro l

3-phase supply under ultima

Relay monitoring sequence and failure of phases HRN-55, HRN-55N

- monitoring of proper motor rotation, electric drive, etc.

L3

L2

L1

N

L1 N

L2 L3

Has y our mot or ev er burn t out? And ur r elay will w wh y? O ou.

you didn´t kno tell y

16

15 18

L3

L2

L1

Monitoring voltage relay for under/vervoltage for 3-phase mains HRN-54

- confortable monitoring of 3-phase mains

L1

L2 L3

Relay monitoring over-/undervoltage in 3-phase mains HRN-54N

- monitoring voltage in switchboard, protection of appliances

L3

L2

L1

N

L1 N

L2 L3

ompac t solution for monitoring mains e“ devic

. Prev ent pr oblems

16

15 18

N

L

Monitoring current relay PRI-41 (PRI-42)

- monitoring over-/-underload (machine, motor ...)

- monitoring consumption, diagnostics of distant appliance (short circuit, increased consump. ...)

AC230 V

16

15 18

One

-phase curr ent under magnifying glass

128

Examples of usage

Level switch HRH-1

- monitoring level in wells, tanks, pools, etc.

N

L

HRH-1

Level switch HRH-5

- monitoring level in well, sump, tanks, pool, silo...

N

L

Thermostat TER-3 with external sensor

- control of temperature of fl oor heating

N

L

A1 A2

T1 T1

ve y ou er o verfl

Has y our r eser voir ev t en ything while ha ving y ever burn to oper probaly ha es, y ou ch.

Regula tion = sa vings and c omfor t

N

L

2 stage thermostat TER-4 with 2 external sensors

- control of temperature of e.g. gas/electric boiler

Sav e money and ha two devic es in one ve

sensor 1

15 18

N

Thermostat for thermal protection of motors TER-7

- protection of motors against thermal overload

L

A1 A2

25 26 28

Befor e it is t oo la te. Simple and basic mot cont rol or

N

L

15 16 18

Ta R Tb built-in

PTC sensor

VS425

Multifunction digital thermostat TER-9

- complex control of heating and water heating in a house sensor 1

A1 T1 T1 16 15 18

Auto

T1

7

0 C

0

6 12

A2 T2 T2 26 25 28

t which will e and for the

Do y ou kno off ers y ou 6 func pric e of single

-func tion one?

sensor 2 sensor 2

129

130

Note

Enjoy the complete household equipment by ELKO EP

VS M 22 0

Contactor with optional manual switching (e.g. at boiler)

SM R U

Dimming of spot lights

DI M 15

Dimming of energy saving lights and LED lamps

SO U 3

Function of light switch for pulling down the shutters at a high luminous intensity

TE V 1

Two-level thermostat with independent setting of upper and lower temperature

TE R 9

Water temperature control according to 2 temperatures

SM R B

Ventilation of the room after turning off the button

US S

Versatile and signalling modules

“Do it yourself”

CR M 91 H

Multifunctional relay featuring

10 most frequently used functions

MR 4 2

Control of lighting from multiple locations, stepping relay.

ZT R 15 1 2

For powering the door bells, videophones, door locks

PS 3 012

Power source intrusion, fi re, and

TE R 3A

Thermostat for temperature monitoring and regulation

(for thawing the black ice)

TE V 4

PR I I I32

Central monitoring of the current

“is there a lamp switched on without any reason?”

SM R T

Delayed switch-off of room lighting, exhausting the bathrooms

SM R M

Dimming of LED bulbs and dimmable saving light bulbs

HR N 33

Monitoring the voltage at the devices “susceptible” to power supply tolerance

SH T 1

Real-time-based switching of electrical equipment and appliances

LI C 1

Automatically regulates the intensity of light in a room

DI M 2

Staircase automatic switch with adjustable smooth run-up and run-down of light

CR M 4

Staircase switch to control the entrance lights

CR M 2H

Ensures circulation of water at regular intervals ,

1x per 1 hour for 5 minutes

PS B 0 1 2

Ideal for supplying drives, motors, light sources

CO S 1

Monitoring the motor overloading and balancing

HR H 4

The level system consists of HRH-5 and contactors VS425

Temperature monitoring in outdoor and heavy-duty locations (IP 65)

SO U 2

Automatic switching-on of the outdoor lighting at twilight with integrated timer for blocking the functions

HR H 5

Level switch - pumping water from the tank

Industrial use of ELKO EP products

HRF-10

Monitors the value of the alternating voltage frequency

PRI-41/42

Monitoring the maximum permissible weight

TER-3

Monitoring temperature

in a tank

CRM.91H

Dosing material at preset intervals

MR-42

Group control of lighting from multiple locations

SOU-2

Automatic switching-on of the outdoor lighting at twilight

CRM-81J

Periodic ventilation

PRI-53

Intended to monitor the current in 3 phases

HRN-55

Phase failure monitoring

PRI-51

Checking for conveyor jamming

= current increase

VS425

3-phase contactor for triggering the motor

CRM-2T

Starting the motor, wye-delta

HRN-41

Monitoring the voltage level

CRM-91H

Pulse shift

SOU-1

Automatic switching-on of the outdoor lighting at twilight

CRM-2H

Lubricant dispensing

TER-9

Liquid temperature control of two independent circuits

COS-1

Power factor monitoring

= overall protection of motors

PRI-51

Indication of machine

failure / operation, depending on the fl owing current

HRN-37

Voltage / low voltage monitoring

PS-R

Power supply at stabilised voltage

HRN-54

Checking for overvoltage at sensitive machinery circuits

HRN-43

Assuring of continuous energy supply.

Back-up supply switching

HRH-5

Observing the liquid level

SHT-1/2

Pre-heating the devices at preset times

SHT-4

Used for controlling the lighting with no light sensors required

HRN-64

Observing the standby power unit battery

USS-modul

Lucid switching and signalling, modular design, wide range of combinations

Support of project design

Our aim is to give a complete care to all electro project designers.

Our activities:

Our products are a part of the following programs:

Project programs

elektrotechnika

Award programs

V ero

X

Obis

DTB ELKO EP XLS

XLS

MARKS AND SYMBOLS DWG

TRAINING

In case our products attracted your interest, do not hesitate to contact us at [email protected] or see our websites www.elkoep.com for more information.

TECHNICAL SUPPORT

In case of any questions regarding use of our products for a particular project, contact us at [email protected]

Note.: logos, names, software, hardware are protected by owner’s rights.

133

Production technology

The base of the production is a modern line disposing of SMD technology. SMD components compose of more than 80 % of all components. In the year 2004 the production line was modernized distinctly and it was completed by some new machines. Herewith the accurancy improved considerably and the capacity enhanced.

1)

Printed circuit boards are placed into a cartridge and then automatically delivered to SMD production line.

2)

Fully automatic adhesive and fl ux printer distributes adhesive or fl ux through profi le form to the place where the SMD components are then mounted. Part of this process is also 3D optic inspection of the executed operation.

3)

SMD components are mounted by pick-up machines.

Three heads with laser alignment can place up to

15,000 components an hour. This machine replaces approximately 100 workers.

4)

PCBs with mounted SMD components are inspected and forwarded to refl ow.

134

5)

Hot-air furnace ERSA serves for glue hardening or to activation of soldering fl ux by re-melting. The furnace has 3 zones. temperature after curing on

3rd ) output) zone approx. 1400C. For fl ux re-melting , the starting temperature is 130 0 C, middle 180 0 C and output is 280 0 C.

6)

Fully automatic line is ended by a cartridge which distributes picked and cured PCBs into holders.

Production technology

7)

After the classic components are manually mounted by experienced workers.

8)

Manual placing of classical components is followed by soldering in soldering unit SEHO 8135-PCS which already supports “lead free” soldering technology. Thanks to IR pre-heating, this soldering unit allows operations on PCB together with temperature sensitive components on the upper side of PCB. Soldering unit is equipped by LW soldering jet and Delta jet. These jets allow a good quality.

9) 10)

After necessary semi-product testing on pin-testers (Pic.9) fi nal assembling into enclosures is executed. The actual state of completion is monitored by bar codes during the whole production process (Pic.10).

11)

Semi-fi nished PCBs are tested by this tester. It replaces visual control.

By using weight board, particular pins on bottom part are in contact.

Functionality of SMD components and classical components is checked.

Testing one PCB set takes about 20 s.

12)

In the end the products are fully printed by laser technology. Laser can burn from upper part) side of the product) and side part (front panel and terminals) printing one piece takes about 30 s.

135

KO E P

EL KO E P R ss ia

O E P la

KO E P kra e

EL KO EP Ge rm an y

EL KO E P ovak ia

EL KO P Hu y iN EL S As ia ( n a)

ELKO EP, s.r.o.

Palackeho 493 / 769 01 Holesov, Vsetuly / Czech Republic tel.: +420 573 514 221 | fax: +420 573 514 227 | [email protected] | www.elkoep.com

Published: 09/2013 / Modifications or amendments reserved/ © Copyright ELKO EP, s.r.o. / 1st edition

Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement